Home

AP MAX User Manual.book

1. Cancel Figure 14 4 Save Announcement Prompt 9 Press OK in the Save Announcement prompt to continue The Announcement Number prompt see Figure 14 5 will be displayed Announcement Humber Announcement umber Po ee Figure 14 5 Announcement Number Prompt 10 Enter the number from 1 to 65535 that will be used to identify the new announcement and press the OK button The new announcement will now be listed in the switch announce ment set 14 1 2 Editing Announcements The Announcement Manager allows the following changes to be made to existing announce ments e The announcement description can be edited e Phrases see Section 14 1 4 1 Phrase Components can be added or deleted e Information components see Section 14 1 4 3 Information Components can be added deleted or have their Information Sub Type and Logical Station properties changed Announcements in any announcement set can be edited Follow these steps to edit an announce ment Document 715025 206 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager 1 In the Announcements tab expand the announcement set row containing the announce ment to be edited 2 Select the announcement to edit and press the Edit button An Edit Announcement win dow similar to Figure 14 6 will be displayed The contents of the selected announcement will be shown in the window Edit Announcement
2. Figure 10 3 Add New SIP Registration Window The settings in the Add New SIP Registration window are described below User Enter the username of the registration The combination of user and registrar user registrar must be unique for each SIP reg istration Entering a combination that already exists will over write the existing entry Document 715025 156 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 10 SIP Registration Registrar Enter the domain where the registration is to be sent Port The port the SIP registration will use Password Enter the password required for authentication when registering Expires The number of seconds before the SIP registration expires Populate the fields in the Add New SIP Registration window and press the OK button to add the registration or press the Cancel button to exit without adding a new registration The new regis tration entry will be immediately displayed in the SIP Registrations list To delete a SIP registration select the entry in the list on the left hand side of the Registration tab in the SIP Registration window and press the Delete button located below the list 10 2 SIP Client Registration Settings Select the Settings tab see Figure 10 4 in the SIP Registration window to view and configure system wide SIP registration properties EA SP Registration Prax F020 Client Server Reaistration Settings SIP Settings SI
3. Figure 3 1 APmax UI Sign In Window The first time the software is run a master Login ID user name and password must be used to access the software The initial login and password is Login ID MASTER gt Use all capital letters Password STRT gt Use all capital letters To login do the following l Enter the user name in the Login ID field Type MASTER if you are running the APmax UI for the first time 2 Enter the Password Type STRT if you are running the APmax UI for the first time Optionally a master APmax system may be designated at this time by expanding the Advanced section click on the expand symbol and doing one of the following a Select a Master APmax system that has been previously added to the APmax UI and has been designated as a master system b Enter into the Master APmax combobox the IP address of a master system s Unit 1 Administration CPU See Section 3 4 3 Master APmax Management for information about using a master APmax Click on the Sign In button or press the lt ENTER gt key to complete the login procedure Document 715025 27 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started The MASTER STRT login ID and password allows user administration functions only There fore after logging in access will be given only to the User Administration interface See Section 3 2 User Administration for detailed informat
4. need to set a product name in the consent screen Configure consent screen Cancel To create a Web Client ID or an Installed Application Client you Figure 11 11 Create Client ID 6 Select the Web application option in the Create Client ID screen and press the Configure consent screen button to display the Consent screen seen in Figure 11 12 Document 715025 169 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings Google Streaming IN e Overview Consent screen Permissions The consent screen will be shown to users whenever you request access to their private data using your client ID APls amp auth APIs Note This screen will be shown for all of your applications registered in this project Credentials Email address Consent screen InnovativeSystemsTestLP gmail com T Fush Dei Product name Monitoring Source Code Deploy amp Manage Homepage URL Compute Networking GE Product logo Big Data Privacy policy URL Terms of service URL Google page ID plus google com Figure 11 12 Consent screen 7 Specify an Email address and enter a Product name in the Consent screen and then press the Save button The Create Client ID screen will be displayed again Figure 11 13 Document 715025 170 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings Creat
5. General Announcement Information Announcement Description Message UU Announcement Text turn EEREN on off optional meg silence 300 me To hear the numbers on your list dial 1 To hear these instructions repeated dial 0 Please dial now torn E 300 ms sec silence Selected Phrase Properties Phrase Inflection Language k To turn this service None english Figure 14 6 Edit Announcement Window 3 Make the desired changes Options include e Change the text in the Announcement Description field This text is used to help iden tify the announcement within the APmax UI s Use the Add button to add components to the announcement For more information on adding phrases see Section 14 1 4 1 and for more information on adding information components see Section 14 1 4 3 e Remove unwanted components by selecting them in the Announcement Text section and pressing the Delete button or the Delete key on the keyboard 4 Press the Test button and listen to the announcement to verify the components of the announcement are playing correctly See Section 14 1 5 Testing Announcements for more information When finished close the Test Announcement window 5 When the announcement is satisfactory press the OK button in the Edit Announcement window to save the changes Alternatively all changes can be discarded by pressing the Cancel button If the OK button is pressed a prompt to close the window and save the announc
6. Parameters are the parts of an announcement that are variable That is parameters in an announcement may say different things each time the announcement is played For example if an announcement plays the current time such as The current time is CurrentTime then the Cur rentTime portion of the announcement is variable because it changes with the time of day Therefore CurrentTime would be a parameter in the announcement Selecting a parameter in the Announcement Text section of the Add Announcement window or Edit Announcement window illustrated in Figure 14 14 will display the details of the parameter in the Selected Parameter Properties section of the window Edit Announcement General Announcement Information Announcement Description Service is now on Based On Version 11 Announcement Text service is now on Silence 450 ms Please continue dial 0 for instructions or hang up silence 300 me tone 400 Hz 300 ms Type Parameter Z Delete Selected Parameter Properties Stream Index Type Sub Type Length Number Default a Condition Value Equal Equal Equal Equal Pless Figure 14 14 Parameter Component Properties Parameters are only found in factory defined announcements and cannot be added or deleted but the values of the Language Voice and Phrase properties may be changed These properties are described below Language The language e g English Spanish TTY that is used to v
7. Whether or not to walk subdirectories Yes or No tories Transfer Schedule Frequency between FTP transfers Options include One Time Hourly or Daily Transfer Start Time of day when the FTP transfer will begin Time File Inclusion Regular expression of files in the directory to include in the transfer If Mask blank then all files in the directory will be transferred File Exclusion Regular expression of files in the directory that will not be transferred Mask This expression takes precedence over the File Inclusion Mask lf blank then no files will be excluded Directory Exclu Regular expression of directory names not to transfer If blank then all sion Mask subdirectories will be transferred This setting is useful when the Include Subdirectories option is set to Yes Invoke Transfer Press this button to immediately run this FTP transfer task FTP Server Properties FTP Server IP or URL address of the FTP server where files will be sent Address FTP Server Port Port number of the FTP server UserName Username to login to the FTP server Password to login to the FTP server FTP Type The type of FTP protocol to use Options include e Normal e FIPS Secure e SFTP Secure Choose Passive or Active FTP The default is Passive er Press this button to test the connection to the entered FTP server Document 715025 227 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3
8. APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager Selecting a phrase and pressing the Play button at the bottom of the Phrases tab will play the selected phrase through your PC speakers if your PC has wave audio sound capabilities The Find button at the bottom of the Phrases tab is used to discover if any announcements are using a phrase To use this function select a phrase and press the Find button If the phrase is currently being used by one or more announcements a form similar to Figure 14 22 will be dis played listing the details of the announcements using the phrase The phrase you are searching For is currently in use by the Following announcements Language english Voice Female Version A Description We re sorry your request cannot be processed at this time This Announcement is Used in Announcement Set Std Class Announcement Number 66 Language english Voice Female Version 6 Description We re sorry you have reached a number that has been disconnected or is no longer in service I you Feel you have reached this recording in error please check the number and try your call again This Announcement is Used in Announcement Set Std Class Announcement Number 406 Figure 14 22 Phrase In Use The Add and Delete buttons in the Phrases tab are described in the following sections e Section 14 2 1 Adding Custom Phrases e Section 14 2 2 Deleting Custom Phrases 14 2 1 Adding Custom
9. Hardware Maintenance f Slide cover back into place and secure with screws in the back of the unit 8 Tighten the screws that secure the brackets to the APmax 5 per bracket 9 Install the unit back into the rack 10 Connect cables and wires 11 Return power to unit 12 Clear the alarms using the APmax UI see Chapter 19 Alarm Status after the unit has finished booting up Document 715025 201 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 13 Hardware Maintenance Document 715025 202 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager Chapter 14 Announcement Manager The Announcement Manager interface in the APmax UI allows new announcements and phrases to be created and also allows existing announcements and phrases to be modified To access the Announcement Manager interface right click on an APmax system s icon 4 in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Maintenance Announcement Manager command as illustrated in Figure 14 1 The name of the system for which you are managing announcements will be displayed at the top of the Announcement Man ager window Figure 14 2 Mitchell Announcement Manager Command Line AJ File viewer Package Management d Process Viewer Reboot Utility Report viewer Figure 14 1 Announ
10. Incoming ka BESS wi Figure 9 24 Enter PRI Trunk Group Info The top four trunk group properties displayed in the Enter Trunk Group Info window are described in Section 9 1 2 Enter the new trunk group number in the Trunk Group field The trunk group number must be unique and if it is not an error will be shown 3 Select PRI in the Signaling Type drop down menu 4 Enter the Trunk Group Name This field is optional The PRI Type setting is used to select the type of PRI switch associated with this trunk group 6 Press the OK button to add the new PRI trunk group to the list of trunk groups on the left hand side of the Trunk Configuration window Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 153 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration Document 715025 154 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 10 SIP Registration Chapter 10 SIP Registration The SIP Registration interface is used for the following functions e Configuring SIP Session Initiation Protocol registrations which allow users to register their current location and therefore receive information at the registered location e Allowing SIP devices to register locally with the APmax Calls made to and from these devices will not go through the phone switch but will be handled directly between the APmax and the device The SIP Registration interface see
11. Se Dei e De Receive Sensitivity 0 SS D513 Impedance 100 ohms DS1 4 e DS15 e 051 6 e Dis 0518 aa D Figure 7 3 DS1 Settings The top four settings below are displayed by default Click the tree symbol next to the Advanced label to display the bottom four settings DS1 Status Select whether the port should be Enabled or Disabled T1 Framing specify the T1 framing format that the switch should be using Options include D4 and ESF Extended Superframe Format ESF is less susceptible to false Yellow alarms caused by repet itive patterns in audio channels Document 715025 97 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 T1 Line Coding Transmit LBO Mode Transmit Haul Mode Receive Haul Mode Receive Sensitivity Impedance 7 1 3 DS3 Settings Chapter 7 Digital Carrier Configuration Specify the T1 line coding that the switch should be using Options include AMI or B8ZS Select the T1 cable length T3 dB or E1 ohms Options include Short and Long Used in conjunction with Receive Sensitivity to set the overall sensitivity on the DS1 port Options include e Short Select for cable lengths less than 655 feet e Long Select for cable stretches longer than 655 feet e Monitor Select for listening on a monitor port up to 46dB attenuation in resistive bridge and cable This option should be selected if using the monitor port on the patch panel If
12. Section 8 3 Combined Linksets e Routing Tab Section 8 4 Linkset Route Management e Global Title Translation Tab Section 8 5 Global Title Translation e AIN Tab Section 8 6 AIN Settings Document 715025 104 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration 8 1 General SS7 Settings The General tab see Figure 8 2 is displayed when the SS7 Configuration window is initially opened and contains the following settings Local Point Code The SS7 address assigned to this APmax system If a point code has not already been defined 0 0 0 will be displayed in this field SS7 point codes are partitioned into 3 digit sections network cluster and member The value of each portion of the point code must be in range of 1 255 AIN Point Code The point code used when the APmax originates an AIN query AIN Translation Type The translation type used when the APmax originates an AIN query The default value for this field is 204 CLASS GTT Point Code The point code used when the APmax originates a CLASS GTT query CLASS GTT Translation Type The translation type used when the APmax originates a CLASS GTT query The default value for this field is 150 Exception Point Code 1 The first point code for which the send notification parameter will be removed Exception Point Code 2 The second point code for which the send notification parameter will be removed The va
13. System Surveillance Ethernet Configuration Internet Access Settings Serial Configuration s Service Access Map SJP Registration 557 Configuration Figure 8 1 SS7 Configuration Menu Command Document 715025 103 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration Local 557 Settings Local Point Code 10 16 Outgoing AIN Queries AIN Point Code AIN Translation Type Outgoing CLASS GTT Queres CLASS GTT Point Code 0 0 0 CLASS GTT Translation Type 150 Send Notification Exception Point Codes Exception Point Code 1 0 0 0 Exception Point Code 2 0 0 0 Figure 8 2 SS7 Configuration Window The SS7 Configuration window is partitioned into six tabs General Linksets Combined Linksets Routing Global Title Translation and AIN The progression through the tabs from left to right provides a general order to setting up the SS7 interface within the APmax system For instance the local point code in the General tab should be defined before any linksets are defined and the linksets must be defined before any combined linksets can be created Changes to the configura tion are sent to the APmax system and saved as they are performed The functions available within the tabs are described in the following sections e General Tab Section 8 1 General SS7 Settings e Linksets Tab Section 8 2 Linkset Configuration e Combined Linksets Tab
14. Wa IS Internet Access Settings 4Pmax 9511 Dsp Number f 72 23 1215 172 23 12 116 1 172 23 12 155 J 0 172 23 12 158 3 Figure 11 31 External DSP Addresses Tab To configure a new external DSP address follow these steps 1 Press the Add button in the External DSP Addresses tab An External DSP entry window similar to Figure 11 32 will be displayed External DSP Address 172 23 12 115 Unit DSP a Figure 11 32 External DSP Entry Window 2 Populate the following fields in the External DSP window Address Enter the IP address or domain name that someone on the Internet would use to access this DSP Document 715025 184 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings Unit Select or enter the number of the APmax unit with the DSP DSP Select or enter a DSP number from 0 to 3 3 Press the OK button The external DSP address has now been created and will be dis played in the External DSP Addresses tab To remove an external DSP address select the address entry and press the Delete button A con firmation prompt will be displayed Choose Yes in the prompt to complete the deletion Document 715025 185 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings Document 715025 186 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4
15. Zb Zb 2400 Gateway 172 25 8 1 WRAP 192 165 5 235 Figure 4 11 Call Processing Settings Screen The Address Subnet Gateway and VRRP fields in the screen above provide the same function for the Administration CPU network as the fields in Step 1 provide for the Inter net subnetwork Enter IP address values into the fields and press the Next button to con tinue 4 The fourth screen Figure 4 12 of the Ethernet Configuration Wizard contains settings pertaining to the APmax s DSP network Document 715025 74 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration Ethernet Configuration Wizard DSP Ethernet Configuration Enter the Ethernet information for the DSP network Internet Unit DSP 1 DSP 2 DSP 3 DSP 4 Administration i 172 25 11 79 172 235 1180 172 23 11 85 172 23 11 86 Call Processing 2 172 23 12 105 172 23 12 106 172 23 12 111 172 23 12 112 DSP Figure 4 12 DSP Settings Screen As with previous screens in the wizard the DSP settings screen has a list that contains a row for each unit in the APmax system Next to the Unit number for each row are four cells representing the four DSPs on that unit Enter the IP addresses for DSPs 1 through 4 for each unit and press the Next button to go to the final screen of the wizard Once the Next button is pressed you cannot return to this screen unless the wizard is started again 5 Press the
16. add Edit X lt Delete Add X Edit Delete Figure 3 31 APmax System Administration Window The Add Edit and Delete buttons located below the system list and their associated functions are described in the following sections e Add button Section 3 4 2 1 Adding a System e Fdit button Section 3 4 2 2 Editing a System Name e Delete button Section 3 4 2 3 Deleting a System 3 4 2 1 Adding a System To add an APmax system to this installation of the APmax UI follow these steps Document 715025 49 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started 1 Right click on the APmax UI icon RK in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the APmax System Definition command as illustrated in Figure 3 23 The APmax System Administration window see Figure 3 31 will be displayed 2 In the left hand pane of the Defined APmax s tab select the region to which the new sys tem should be added 3 Press the Add button located at the bottom of the System List section of the window and select Add APMax from the drop down menu Figure 3 32 An empty System Informa tion window will be displayed see Figure 3 33 Addl No t Te delete SE Add APMax dP Add InnoStream Server Figure 3 32 Add Button Menu System Information Figure 3 33 Adding a System 4 The System Information window contains the followin
17. e Section 9 3 ISUP Trunk Groups e Section 9 4 SIP Trunk Groups e Section 9 5 MGCP Trunk Groups e Section 9 6 Generic Trunk Groups e Section 9 7 PRI Trunk Groups To delete a trunk group of any signaling type select the trunk group in the list on the left hand side of the Trunk Configuration window and press the Delete button located below the section A delete confirmation prompt see Figure 9 3 will be displayed Press the Yes button in the prompt to complete the trunk group deletion or press the No button to cancel the deletion Document 715025 134 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration Confirm Delete Figure 9 3 Delete Confirmation Prompt 9 1 Trunk Group General Settings The General Settings tab is located in the Trunk Group Settings section of the Trunk Configura tion window see Figure 9 2 and shows all of the settings for the particular type of trunk group that is currently selected in the Trunk Groups section of the window Most of these settings are different depending on the signaling type of the trunk group however there are four properties common to all signaling types These properties are shown in Figure 9 4 and are described below Trunk Group Settings General Settings Trunk Members Trunk Group Signaling Type Trunk Group Name Direction Figure 9 4 General Settings Tab Trunk Group The logical trunk group numb
18. tify the announcement within the APmax UI Document 715025 208 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager s Use the Add button to add components to the announcement For more information on adding phrases see Section 14 1 4 1 and for more information on adding information components see Section 14 1 4 3 e Remove unwanted components by selecting them in the Announcement Text section and pressing the Delete button 4 Press the Test button and listen to the announcement to verify the components of the announcement are playing correctly See Section 14 1 5 Testing Announcements for more information When finished close the Test Announcement window 5 When the announcement is satisfactory press the OK button in the Copy Announcement window to save the changes Alternatively the new announcement can be discarded by pressing the Cancel button If the OK button is pressed a prompt to close the window and save the announcement will be displayed see Figure 14 9 Save Announcement 7 Close window and save changes to announcement i Cancel Figure 14 9 Save Announcement Prompt 6 Press OK in the Save Announcement prompt to continue The Announcement Number prompt see Figure 14 10 will be displayed Announcement Humber Announcement umber PE RER Figure 14 10 Announcement Number Prompt 7 Enter the number from 1 to 65535 that will be us
19. voice Mail Cancel Figure 26 27 Add New Service Group Window Document 715025 330 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management Enter the information of the new service group into the fields described below of the Add New Service Group window The Billing Account Number and Billing Service Address fields default to the values of the parent subscriber and cannot be changed Name Enter the name or a short description of the service group The entered value does not have to be unique and is used in vari ous interfaces to help identify the service group System Select the APmax system on which the new service group record will be located Phone Number Enter the default 10 digit directory number associated with this service group The default service group phone number can be changed by adding a new 10 digit phone number in the Address Info tab see Section 26 1 3 and then selecting that new number in the Default Phone Number field in the General Info tab see Sec tion 26 1 2 Shortened phone numbers ranging from 7 to 9 digits may be automatically added to the Address Info tab depending on the settings in the Phone Number Format interface described in Section 12 2 Billing Account The account number used by the billing system for this service Number group Billing Service This field is typically a postal address but it may be some other Address locatio
20. 273 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 NOTES e The name of the APmax system for which surveillance is being performed will be dis played in the caption of any window that is opened using the System Surveillance command If the system name that is displayed in the caption is not the system you want to monitor then close the window and right click on the icon of the system you want to monitor e The Network Trace function in the System Surveillance menu should not be used except under the direction of vendor technical support personnel Document 715025 274 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 19 Alarm Status Chapter 19 Alarm Status 19 1 Monitoring System Alarms The Alarm Status tool allows system administrators to view and monitor alarms on APmax sys tems If an alarm is present on an APmax system the system s icon in the Command Center window will have an alarm symbol amp in the upper left hand corner of the icon Hovering the mouse pointer over the alarm symbol will display a tooltip illustrated in Figure 19 1 contain ing a short description of the most recent alarm on the system Major Alarm on Unit i 557 Mtche Figure 19 1 System Alarm Tooltip To access the Alarm Status interface either click on the alarm symbol amp in the upper left hand corner of the system s icon or 1f the symbol is not present beca
21. APmax TimeSync UDP 32567 Call Logging Portal TCP 20 APmax Ul TCP 21 APmax Ul TCP 80 APmax UI Web Portal TCP 443 APmax UI Web Portal TCP 943 APmax UI Web Portal TCP 4530 APmax UI Web Portal TCP 48256 APmax Ul TCP 57301 APmax Ul Inbound Ports to Internet Interface of CPU2 UDP 53 UDP 123 TCP 80 DNS TCP 443 APmax UI Web Portal NTP APmax Ul Web Portal TCP 943 TCP 4530 TCP 48256 APmax UI Web Portal APmax Ul APmax Ul Web Portal Outbound Ports UDP 123 NTP TCP 20 FTP for APmax Packages see note below TCP 21 FTP for APmax Packages see note below TCP 23 Telnet Switch Interface TCP 25 Email TCP 80 Various APmax Services TCP 443 Voice Transcription etc Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration Note The APmax has the ability to download newer versions of package files see Chapter 16 Package Management from the Innovative Systems FTP site This feature requires an FT P aware firewall or a firewall that allows all outbound con nections as FTP uses one known and one random port per connection Passive FTP is used so both connections are outbound from the APmax This requires TCP ports 20 and 21 to be open into the APmax for Pre staged Packages to function The configuration interfaces for APmax system communications are described in the following sections e Section 4 1 Ethernet Confi
22. APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 2 Installing the APmax UI Fe Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 Setup Me x Miceeofg Download and Install Progress net Fra mework Installing CO J Download complete You can mow disconnect From the Internet Cancel Figure 2 5 NET Framework Install Progress Screen When the NEI Framework installation is complete the screen in Figure 2 6 will be dis played Press the Exit button to close this screen and continue to the next step Fe Microsoft HET Framework 3 5 Setup aie EN Micreeofg Setup Complete Net Framework Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 has been installed successfully A It is highly recommended that you download and install the latest service packs and security updates For this product For more information see Windows Update Figure 2 6 NET Framework Setup Complete 4 The APmax UI installation Welcome screen see Figure 2 7 1s shown once the setup pro gram verifies the required runtime environments are loaded on the PC Document 715025 16 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 2 Installing the APmax UI i APmax InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for APmaz The InstallShield R Wizard will install 4Prmax on your computer To continue click Next WARMING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties i Cancel Figure 2 7 APmax UI Installation
23. Any port that is enabled on this unit can be the sync master by selecting the port in the sync Master drop down list Document 715025 96 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 7 Digital Carrier Configuration DS1s Note This function is only available for systems with APmax Release 4 3 or greater The Enable and Disable buttons are used to activate and deactivate all DS1 ports on the selected unit This is done in a non volatile manner so the state is preserved if the unit is rebooted Note that the DS7 Status setting for individual ports will not change when these buttons are pressed This allows all DS1 ports to be easily disabled when upgrading a system and then re enabled and returned to their previous status when the upgrade is complete 7 1 2 DS1 Settings When any of the DS1 1 to DS1 8 ports are selected in the left hand pane of the Digital Carrier Setup tab see Figure 7 3 the settings for the selected port will be displayed in the right hand pane These settings are described below Figure 7 3 Digital Carrier Configuration APmax Mitchell Digital Carrier Setup PRI Setup Digital Signal Carriers Settings for 057 1 on Unit 1 am rit 1 D51 Status e ap SS 051 2 T1 Framing 4 051 3 e DS1 4 T1 Line Coding hl nd oe Transmit LEO Mode 71 Short 0 133 ft ai CH 051 7 E Advanced all 051 8 Transmit Haul Mode Short DS3 am Unit Receive Haul Mode Short
24. Document 715025 62 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration Chapter 4 Network Configuration When a new system is defined in the APmax UI see Section 3 4 2 1 Adding a System it is necessary to establish a direct connection from the PC running the APmax UI software to the APmax hardware through a Local Area Network LAN using IP based protocols Communica tion with the new system must be established before any other features associated with the new system can be configured The diagram in Figure 4 1 illustrates a configuration where the APmax hardware has communica tion established with the APmax UI and the Internet _ Firewall e Internet LAN IP S Network Management IP APmax Units The APmax has separate built in vlan networks for Internet access Administrative access and Call APmax Processing Redundancy is Management implemented via VRRP at the PC network level inside the APmax Figure 4 1 Connecting the APmax to the Internet Firewall Rules The inbound and outbound port rules that should be enforced by the network to which the APmax connects are as follows Document 715025 63 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration Inbound Ports to Admin or LAN Interface of CPU2 UDP 53 DNS UDP 123 NTP UDP 5060 SIP UDP 25015 APmax UI Auto Discovery UDP 25021
25. Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager Description The name of this information component This name will be used to identify this information component in the Add Announcement and Edit Announce ment interfaces Populate the fields in the Add Phrase window and press the nsert button to add the information component to the announcement To delete an information component from an announcement select the information component in the Announcement Text section of the Add Announcement or Edit Announcement window and press the Delete button In addition to changing property values conditions may be defined for information components by selecting the component and pressing the add condition D button in the upper left hand cor ner of the Selected Information Properties section When a condition is added an expand symbol will appear on the left hand side of the component s row in the Selected Information Properties section Expanding the row will display the conditions for the selected component illustrated in Figure 14 15 Each condition row contains the type of condition a Value column and a Value2 column The necessity of entering a number into the Value2 column depends on the type of con dition Conditions types that may be defined include Always Equal Not Equal Less Than Greater Than Less Than Equal Greater Than Equal Range Equal Range Not Equal Invalid and
26. Oct 27 16 15 57 mate_cpu alarmd Setting Alarm mcastbootd Stopped to Major 1445980557 Oct 27 16 15 58 mate_cpu watchd Process mcastbootd has stopped Oct 27 16 15 58 mate_cpu alarmd Clearing Alarm mcastbootd Stopped Oct 27 16 15 58 mate_cpu alarmd Setting Alarm mcastbootd Stopped to Critical 14459805535 Oct 27 16 15 59 9511 unt Cpul weatherd Error EMPTY _STRING reference 38 CanadaRadarlmage cpp has occurred Failed to get radar Oct 27 16 15 59 9511 unt Cpul weatherd Error EMPTY _STRING reference 219 WeatherCanada cpp has occurred Failed to download itt Oct 27 16 16 02 9511 unt Cpul weatherd Error OPERATION FA Ei reference 92 WYeatherCanada cpp has occurred create TCP tunnel Figure 22 4 Tail Log The pause play button II at the bottom of the tab can be used to stop and restart real time log viewing When real time logging is stopped then the search box at the top of the tab will be enabled allowing the contents of the tab to be searched 22 1 4 Analyze Log The log analyzer tool is used to plot the frequency with which specific terms are found in existing Y or real time logs This feature is accessed by pressing the button next to a log row in the left hand pane of the Log Reader window Figure 22 2 This will open a tab for the selected log file and display the log analysis settings as shown in Figure 22 5 Document 715025 296 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual
27. Other Figure 14 15 illustrates a TotalRain information component with a condition that the TotalRain value be greater than zero Note The Barometric Trend information component does not support conditions To remove a condition from an information component select the condition row in the Selected Information Properties section and press the delete condition button Each condition of an information component may have one or more actions associated with it Use the expand symbol on the left hand side of a condition row to view the actions defined for the condition The add action button can be used if more than one action is necessary for a condition The move action up and move action down buttons are used to rearrange the order in which the actions take place Changes to property values and conditions will be saved when the OK button is pressed 14 1 4 4 Built In Components Components that are Built In perform custom announcement operations that cannot be created using standard phrase parameter or information components This type of component can be deleted from an announcement but cannot be added using the Announcement Manager If a built in component is inadvertently deleted and the announcement is saved the component will have to Document 715025 215 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager be restored by using the Original button in the A
28. SEEventRouting 1 0 Ds1ConfigurationSettings 2 0 Ds3ConfigurationSettings 4 0 Internet AccessSettings 2 0 LicensekeysTable 2 0 LicenseResourcesUsedTable 3 0 MateUnits 1 0 ScheduleTaskTable 2 0 SerialConfig 6 0 SubscriberRecord 12 0 Figure 16 7 Tables Tab Document 715025 233 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 16 Package Management Selecting the Contents tab will display the following tabs Tables Files Licenses Announcements and Addons The Tables tab Figure 16 7 contains a list of the tables found in the package The following properties of each table are displayed in the list Name Version A short descriptive name of the table The version number of the table General Info Dependencies Contents Mame admin_proxyd alarmd alarms ap_discoveryd armd docmd Fiy_printeny Fiy_sebeny hwsupd ident Category Executable Executable Executable Executable Executable Executable Executable Executable Executable licensemanagerd Executable load_arm Executable Build 43 166 126 426 z297 154 1 1 142 106 245 104 Revision 13767 13767 13767 13767 13767 1 1 Figure 16 8 Files Tab Overwrite S S S S S USR The Files tab Figure 16 8 contains a list of the files found in the package The following properties of each file are displayed in the list Name Categor
29. See Section 22 1 3 Real Time View of Log for more information Press this button to setup log analysis See Section 22 1 4 Analyze Log for more information 22 1 1 Log Reader Toolbar At the top of the Log Reader window 1s a toolbar that contains controls for printing saving copy ing and refreshing log data These controls are described below ey A Press this button or Ctlr P to print the rows currently selected in the right pane of the Log Reader window To select all rows in the right pane press Ctrl A on the key board Press this button or Ctrl S to save the full contents of the currently selected log tab to your PC The log can then be viewed in a text editor such as WordPad Press this button or Ctrl C to copy to the contents of the rows currently selected in the right pane The copied rows can then be pasted into a text editor soreadsheet email message body etc To select all rows in the right pane press Cirl A on the keyboard Press this button or Ctrl R to refresh the log file currently displayed in the right pane of the Log Reader window with the latest records on the system The Transfer Mode selection box offers the following options for retrieving logs from the APmax High Speed Uses Command Link File Transfer to retrieve log files from the APmax This option requires the APmax system to have APmax Release 4 2 or greater and version 4 3 33 or greater of the AudioSubsystem package FTP Uses slowe
30. The four settings at the top of the General Settings tab are common to all types of trunk groups and are described in Section 9 1 Beneath these settings are three group boxes Far end Settings Advanced Settings and Continuity Tones Next to the legend of each group box is a tree sym Document 715025 141 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration bol Clicking a tree symbol will alternately show and hide the settings in the associated group box Figure 9 12 illustrates this portion of the General Settings tab when all of the settings are displayed S Far end Settings Far end Name Advanced Settings FLT Guard Time rs Pick Order Glare Control UNC wi Hop Counter Confusion Message Continuity Hate El Continuity Tones In Receive Tone In Transmit Tone Out Receive Tone Out Transmit Tone Figure 9 12 ISUP Trunk Group General Settings The ISUP specific trunk group settings are described below Far end Name The linkset or linkset route this trunk group uses to connect to the network element normally a switch at the immediate far end of the trunks in the trunk group Since an ISUP trunk group can contain trunks that terminate at only one end point this field identifies that far end network element The drop down menu contains a list of linksets and linkset routes that have been defined in the SS7 Configuration inter face see Chapter 8 SS7 Config
31. Version 4 3 10 Index V VLAN Configuration 76 VRRP Settings 69 W Web Portal Configuration 163 189 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Index Document Number 715025 Index 346 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10
32. document The Reporting Server Address consists of the IP address or DNS name of the server followed by a colon and port number e g apmaxservices 7219 After entering a server address press the OK button The APmax Ul will attempt to connect to the entered address If the connection fails then an error message will be displayed and the new address will not be saved To exit the APmax UI Preferences window without saving any changes press the Cancel button Note If a Master APmax see Section 3 4 3 is set then this address setting will be shared with other APmax UI installations that have the same Master APmax The version of APmax Central Reporting Server software that this APmax UI is connected to 44 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 4 APmax System Administration This section explains the concepts of System Regions Section 3 4 1 Master APmax Mode Sec tion 3 4 3 and Single Web Portal Section 3 4 4 It also contains instructions for adding Sec tion 3 4 2 1 editing Section 3 4 2 2 and deleting Section 3 4 2 3 systems within the APmax UI The interface for performing these functions is the APmax System Administration window see Figure 3 24 To access the APmax System Administration window right click on the APmax UI icon RK in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the APmax System Definition command as illustrated in Figure 3
33. information in an SS7 message in order to determine the destination address of that SS7 message It allows SS7 message originators to send messages without knowing the final destination of the Document 715025 113 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration SS7 message SS7 messages are routed to network elements such as the APmax where the Global Title Address is translated to a destination SS7 point code Once the translation is per formed the message is forwarded to that SS7 Signaling Point This section describes how to pro vision the APmax so that it can properly translate received SS7 messages that require Global Title Translation The GTT user interface see Figure 8 14 can be accessed by selecting the Global Title Transla tion tab in the SS7 Configuration window Instructions for opening the SS7 Configuration win dow are given at the beginning of Chapter 8 57 Configuration APmax Mitchell General Linksets Combined Linksets Routing Global Tithe Translation AlN Global Titles amp Translation Types Advanced Global Title T able Map Number Global Address Function Selector Primary Route Alternate Route G e Final Translation amp Alter GON Local Point Code ae 605995 Final Translation amp Alter SSM Local Point Code 0 0 0 6059956120 Final Translation amp Alter SSM Local Point Code 0 0 0 605999 Final Translation ISUP Route 2 605555 Intermediate T
34. 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started Secondary Master APmax Setup After a Master APmax has been configured subsequent APmax UI installations that intend to use the data stored on the Master APmax should choose a Master APmax from within the APmax Sign In screen Figure 3 41 This is done by expanding the Advanced section click on the expand symbol in the APmax Sign In screen and performing one of the following actions a Select a Master APmax system that has been previously added to the APmax UI and has been designated as a master system b Enter into the Master APmax combobox the IP address of a master system s Unit 1 Administration CPU APmax Sign In Login ID administrator Password Innovative Signin Systems Canca Advanced Master APmax 192 168 12 81 r Figure 3 41 Master APmax Sign In If the chosen system is a valid Master APmax then the user will be able to login with any user account previously defined in the Master APmax database More information about logging into the APmax UI is available in Section 3 1 Section 3 2 User Administration provides instruc tions for creating user accounts 3 4 4 Single Web Portal Setup The Single Web Portal tab in the APmax System Administration window see Figure 3 42 is used to transfer service subscribers from multiple APmax systems to a single APmax system This allows a single IP address or domain name to be used as the
35. 131 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration To remove the Basic Conferecing Service access number select the DN and press the Delete but ton at the bottom of the tab 8 7 4 Remote IP The Remote IP tab Figure 8 35 is used to assign a trunk group to the Remote IP Service See the Remote IP Service Description for more information about this service m service Configuration 4Priax 9511 Default Trigger Screen List Edit Basic Conterencin z2 Call Start Trunk Event Type Figure 8 35 Remote IP Tab To assign a trunk group select the Remote IP tab and press the Add button An Add Trunk win dow see Figure 8 36 will be displayed Enter a trunk group number select an Event Type e g Call Start and press the OK button Add Trunk Trunk Event Type Call Start d D Cancel Figure 8 36 Add Trunk To remove a Remote IP Service trunk group select the trunk group and press the Delete button at the bottom of the tab Document 715025 132 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration This chapter describes how to configure trunks connected to the APmax system The trunk facili ties provided through the T1 circuits are used by the APmax to provide voice services Leg announcements or for routing calls in certain servi
36. 2 2 051 2 bau 1 R5449 2 Rod449 2 Rod449 Figure 8 7 Add Links Window A list of available channels is displayed on the left side of the window and a list of the channels that are going to be added to the linkset is on the right side The channels in the Available Chan nels list are retrieved from the APmax system each time this window is opened To be considered available a T1 channel must belong to a T1 interface that has been enabled in the Digital Car rier Configuration interface see Chapter 7 and the channel must not be used for another purpose Document 715025 108 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration e g used as a member of a voice trunk group In addition to DS channels both RS449 ports for each unit in the selected system are also available to be assigned as channels in a linkset if they have not already been assigned WARNING Assigning an RS449 port to a linkset will set the mode of that port to RS449 over riding any previous settings of that port that were made using other interfaces For example if port 1 on unit 1 is configured as RS232 in the Serial Configuration interface see Chapter 6 and port 1 on unit 1 is then assigned to a linkset in the SS7 Configuration interface the port will now be RS449 It is recommended that a port already in use by another interface not be added as a channel to a linkset To add channels to th
37. 23 A window similar to Figure 3 24 will be displayed EES K n Kc w Environment Code Map Ei User Administration User Preferences System Regions System List System Name System ID South Dakota East S 2 Mitchell 9511 South Dakota West 2 7020 7020 Nebraska 2 oz 9073 EO 10001 10001 ep 10002 10002 a ada X Delete a Add D a Edit Delete Figure 3 24 APmax System Administration Window The APmax System Administration window is partitioned into two tabs Defined APmax s and Master APmax Setup The Defined APmax s tab has two sections System Regions see Section 3 4 1 and System List see Section 3 4 2 The System Regions section contains a list of the regions that have been defined within this installation of the APmax UI The System List section contains a list of all the systems that have been defined for the region currently selected in the System Regions section Document 715025 45 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started The Master APmax Setup tab is used to designate a master APmax system and is discussed in Sec tion 3 4 3 3 4 1 System Regions The System Regions feature allows APmax systems to be partitioned into regions This feature is intended to help with the management of a large number of APmax systems in a single APmax UI installation and is not necessary when managing a small number of systems in
38. 3 Enter a keyword into the Pass Phrase field select a Key Length of either 1024 or 2048 bit depending on the requirement of the certificate provider and press the Generate button in the Private Key section of the SSL Setup tab This will create a unique key and save it on the APmax see Figure 11 24 This key is used when requesting a certificate and must match the key on the certificate file that is installed WARNING After generating a private key do not press the Generate button in the Pri vate Key section again until the requested certificate file is received and installed other wise the private key on the APmax will not match the key in the certificate Success i Private key successfully generated on the AP a Figure 11 24 Private Key Generated Document 715025 179 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings 4 The Generate button in the Certificate Signing Request section should now be enabled Press it to display the Certificate Signing Request form see Figure 11 25 Certificate Signing Request State or Province South Dakota Local Organization Name Innovative Systems Organizational Unit Common Name E Mail Address admin innovsys com Figure 11 25 Certificate Signing Request Form 5 Fill out the following fields in the Certificate Signing Request form Country Input the 2 letter abbreviation of t
39. 3 19 in the APmax UI Preferences window contains the following set tings Quick Launch Subscriber Man agement Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 Select whether or not the Quick Launch bar will be displayed The Quick Launch bar displays the most frequenty used menu commands Options include Display The Quick Launch bar will be shown docked on the right hand side of the APmax UI window see Figure 3 8 This option is selected by default Hide The Quick Launch bar will not be displayed Select whether or not the Subscriber Management interface see Sec tion 26 1 will be automatically displayed when the APmax UI is started Options include Display The Subscriber Management interface either as a floating window or docked panel will be shown in the APmax UI window by default This option is selected by default Hide The Subscriber Management interface will not be automatically displayed when the APmax UI is started but can be accessed by right clicking on the Services icon in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and then selecting the Subscriber Management command as illustrated in Figure 3 20 E Licensing ap Subscriber Figure 3 20 Subscriber Management Menu Command Changes to this setting will not take effect until the APmax UI is restarted 42 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started Subscriber Man Choose how t
40. A new entry for each imported NPA NXX will be displayed in the Subscriber System Map window Add Hew Mapping List Mapping Information Mapping Type WRa Ni w Figure 3 49 Add New Mapping List Window To delete a Subscriber System Map entry select the row of the entry you wish to delete and press the Delete button Document 715025 59 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started Document 715025 60 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Part 2 System Configuration Overview Part 2 provides instructions for configuring communications time and other features for APmax systems For information on installing the APmax hardware or APmax UI software or an over view of the APmax UI see Part 1 Introduction to APmax The following chapters are found in System Configuration e Chapter 4 Network Configuration e Chapter 5 System Time Manager e Chapter 6 Serial Configuration e Chapter 7 Digital Carrier Configuration e Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration e Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration e Chapter 10 SIP Registration e Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings e Chapter 12 Phone Number Format To access the configuration interfaces for an APmax system right click on the system s icon 2 in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu Select the System Configura tion command to expand the
41. C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 7 Digital Carrier Configuration Chapter 7 Digital Carrier Configuration This chapter describes how to configure Digital Signalling Level 1 DS1 ports Digital Signalling Level 3 DS3 ports and Primary Rate Interface PRI ports for APmax systems To access the Digital Carrier Configuration interface right click on the system s icon 2 in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Configuration Trunks Digital Carrier Configuration command as illustrated in Figure 7 1 The name of the system for which you are configuring ports will be displayed at the top of the Digital Carrier Configuration window Figure 7 2 Mitchell SS Digital Carrier Configuration A3 System Configuration ia System Maintenance 3 System Time Manager Trunk Configuration System Surveillance t 12 Ethernet Configuration o Internet Access Settings Serial Configuration Service Access Map CH SIP Registration Sa 557 Configuration Figure 7 1 Digital Carrier Configuration Menu Command Section 7 1 Digital Carrier Setup provides instructions for configuring DS1 and DS3 ports Section 7 2 PRI Setup provides instructions for configuring PRI ports 7 1 Digital Carrier Setup Select the Digital Carrier Setup tab Figure 7 2 in the Digital Carrier Configuration window
42. CASS button next to the Billing Service Address field is an optional feature that uses the CASS system to improve the accuracy of the billing address by verifying it with the United States Postal Service To certify an address follow these steps 1 Enter a postal address address city state and zip code into the Billing Service Address field 2 Press the CASS button If the entered address matches the certified address then nothing will happen If the entered address does not match the certified address then an Address Change window similar to Figure 26 32 will be displayed showing the originally entered address and the certified address Press Yes in the Address Change window if displayed to update the Billing Service Address field with the certified address Address Change Z gt The address returned during CASS certification is different than the WS listed address Would you like to update the address with the values returned during CASS certification Original 1000 Innovative Dr Mitchell 5D 57301 CASS 1000 Innovative Dr Mitchell SD 57301 5516 Figure 26 32 Address Change for CASS Certification The 10 digit directory number associated with this billing ser vice address or service group This field is configured sepa rately for each of the subscriber s billing service addresses and service groups The default value for the first billing service address is the phone number entered when the subscriber
43. Chapter 15 FTP Transfer Service 15 2 FTP Client Backup This section provides general instructions for using a third party FTP clients to backup APmax databases These steps may need to be adapted to fit the user interface of your FTP client 1 Open an FTP connection to an APmax unit by using the following information Host Administration IP address of an APmax unit ipadownioadt2 LS EG 2 Once logged in navigate to the backup directory ap databases backups The backups folder will have three folders named MMDDYY month day year which contain backup copies of the database Copy the most recent MMDDYY folder from the APmax to your local or network drive Document 715025 228 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 16 Package Management Chapter 16 Package Management 16 1 Package Management Interface APmax packages contain the tables and files necessary to provision features for APmax systems When a package is deployed the contents of the package are copied to the appropriate locations on the system The Package Management interface is used to deploy packages to a system remove packages from a system and view the contents of packages To access the Package Management interface right click on the system s icon _ in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Maintenance Package Management command as illustrated in Figure 16 1 The na
44. DOE vuvu CN Alpena H S BF Peete E OC Woonsocket CN Woonsocket SS 605 796 eexx Figure 8 23 Toll Call Management Tab The Toll Call Management tab is partitioned into three sections Called Numbers see Section 8 6 3 1 Called Areas see Section 8 6 3 2 and Calling Numbers see Section 8 6 3 3 8 6 3 1 Called Numbers The Called Numbers list contains any number that one or more originators in a service area may dial without incurring a charge The numbers in the list may be NPAs NPA NXXs or 10 digit directory numbers DN Called Numbers are assigned to Called Areas Each Called Number may be assigned to only one Called Area Adding Called Numbers New Called Numbers can be added by clicking the Add button below the Called Numbers list or by clicking the right hand mouse button within the list and selecting the Add New Number com mand in the popup menu as illustrated in Figure 8 24 Document 715025 122 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration Called numbers Ce D ZOE wu D D DAD vu GUDD vu D wun DE wu uNwN OF MEHR Add New Number Delete Number Figure 8 24 Add New Called Number When one of the Add commands is selected a new entry is added to the list and a prompt to enter the new Called Number is displayed Enter the new Called Number directly into the prompt see Figure 8 25 below Valid Called Numbers must be in on
45. Last Updated By Last Update Time Figure 26 8 Billing Address Right Click Menu Selecting the Move Billing Service Address command displays the Move Billing Service Address window see Figure 26 9 Move Billing Service Address Biling Account Number 1 103988534 7123 IM Sub Account Billing Service Address 1000 Innovative Dr et Figure 26 9 Move Billing Service Address Enter the new Billing Account Number for this billing service address s If the entered account number already exists then the Billing Service Address selection box will list the addresses already defined for the entered account number and you will have the option to check the Sub Account box to join the billing account as a sub account If the Sub Account box 1s checked when the OK button is pressed then a prompt to join as a sub account will be displayed see Figure 26 10 Choosing Yes in the Join as Sub Account prompt will add the selected billing service address and all of its associated services as a sub account underneath the selected Billing Service Address Join as Sub Account ES The specified Billing Account Number already has a matching Billing Service Address Would you like to continue and join the Billing Account as a Sub Account SS Figure 26 10 Join as Sub Account s If the entered account number already exists but the Sub Account box is not checked then a prompt to merge the selected billing service address with th
46. NET environment Therefore the computer on which APmax UI software is installed must be running one of the Microsoft operating systems that support the NET environ ment see the System Requirements listed above The NET Framework version 4 5 must also be installed on the computer If the appropriate runtime environment is not available on the com puter when APmax Ul is installed a prompt to install the correct NET Framework will be dis played The installation procedure is outlined in Chapter 2 Installing the APmax UI Document 715025 2 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 1 Hardware Installation Chapter 1 Hardware Installation 1 1 General Information The APmax is suitable for installation in network telecommunication facilities and in locations where the NEC applies It is intended to provide many features Each APmax unit provides e Tl communication channels e SS7 interfaces e Serial ports RS232 RS449 V 35 capable e Ethernet ports for connection to the LAN WAN VoIP and for inter unit communication The T1 trunks can be used to provide Announcements such as CLASS announcements They also allow ME detection DTMF detection and voice feedback for some features The T1 trunks are also used as an SS7 interface providing SS7 over T1 The APmax also supports ISUP signalling over the SS7 network which is used to implement call based services Call based services use T1 tr
47. OK button in the final screen of the wizard to close the wizard and apply the entered settings to the tabs m the Ethernet Configuration window Section 4 1 1 The Ethernet Configuration window must be closed before all of the entered settings will be applied to the APmax system Ethernet Configuration Wizard Ethernet Configuration Wizard has finished Pres OK to exit Figure 4 13 Wizard Finished Screen Document 715025 75 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration 4 2 VLAN Configuration Each unit in an APmax system has a 16 port internal Ethernet switch The Virtual Local Area Network VLAN feature of the APmax allows these Ethernet switch ports to be provisioned into separate VLANs The VLANs along with the APmax Firewall rules provide a way to control net work access to the system and protect the call processing network from network storms and attacks WARNING This interface should not be used except under the direction of vendor technical sup port personnel or a vendor documented procedure Any mistakes made using this interface could have serious ramifications VLAN configuration changes will not take effect until the Call Process ing CPU and Administration CPU on each APmax unit has been restarted To configure VLAN communications for an APmax system right click on the system s icon E in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu an
48. Phrases The Announcement Manager provides an interface for creating new phrases by importing Micro soft WAV formatted audio files from an outside source onto the APmax system The following table lists the wav file encodings that are supported by Announcement Manager and the APmax Unsigned 8 bit PCM Signed 16 bit PCM Signed 24 bit PCM Signed 32 bit PCM 32 bit float 64 bit double u law encoding A law encoding IMA ADPCM MS ADPCM GSM 6 10 G721 ADPCM 32kbps Follow these steps to add a custom phrase 1 Press the Add button at the bottom of the Phrases tab in the Announcement Manager win dow An Enter Phrase Information window similar to Figure 14 23 will be displayed Document 715025 221 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager 2 3 Enter Phrase Information Language Voce female ei Wi File W file to be added Tert Text to be used for this phrase Inflection None Ww ENEE Figure 14 23 Enter Phrase Information Window Choose the language of the new phrase in the Language selection box If the desired lan guage has not been defined it may be added by pressing the L button next to the Lan guage selection box which will display an Add window similar to Figure 14 24 Enter the new language and the initial voice of the new language set into the Add window and press the OK button to continue Language french Voce Femal
49. Preferences michel System Icon This icon represents an APmax system being managed by the APmax UI There will be one of these icons for each system that has been defined in the APmax UI see Section 3 4 2 1 Adding a System The name of the system will be shown in the label below the system icon Right clicking on the system icon will allow you to access the commands used to configure the system If an alarm is present on an APmax system then the system s icon will have an alarm symbol amp in the upper left hand corner of the icon For more information on alarms see Chapter 19 Alarm Status If an error occurs that causes the APmax UI to be disconnected from the system then a disconnect symbol E will be shown in the upper left hand corner of the system icon Hov ering the mouse pointer over either of these symbols will display a tooltip with information about the alarm or error Document 715025 34 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started 9511 Ip KE Ee Te System Maintenance bel System Surveillance jon Ze VLAN Configuration Phone Number Format Serial Configuration SIP Registration 57 Configuration SSN Configuration Switch Interface Configuration System Time Manager Trunks Kode oe ome System Configuration Part 2 Elation Messenger Configuration Section 4 3 Internet Access Settings Ch
50. Release 4 3 Chapter 22 Log Reader S Analyze ap_error log Unit 1 e Analysis Settings Analyze Live Log Start Analysis Sunday October 25 2015 12 48 18 PM ka Analysis Temtet mcast End Analysis Tuesday October 27 2015 08 42 54 4M ka g tcp tunnel call failed Analysis Frequency 4poly dnalysis lt 24 mcast tcp tunnel call Failed 1Of25 2015 12 48 00 PM 10 26 2015 3 48 00 4M 10 26 2015 6 48 00 PM Figure 22 5 Analyze Log The Analysis Settings are described below Analyze Live Log Selecting Yes will use real time log analysis and selecting No will down load the existing log records found within the specified Start Analysis and End Analysis time range and analyze them when the Apply Analysis button is pressed Analysis Term s Enter terms words or phrases into one or more rows in this list to search the log for those terms and plot the results Start Analysis When using existing log records Analyze Live Log is set to No this is the beginning of the time range of log records that will be included in the analy SIS End Analysis When using existing log records Analyze Live Log is set to No this is the end of the time range of log records that will be included in the analysis Analysis Frequency When using existing log records Analyze Live Log is set to No this value either 1Minute or 1 Hour determines the frequency with which search results are grouped together and
51. Started Figure 3 45 Subscriber System Map Menu Command Subscriber System Map Mapped Iter 605 555 605 555 605 995 605 995 605 999 605 999 605 970 605 970 605 970 605 996 605 970 605 996 605 995 605 995 MPA NPo NSs NPo NSs NPo NSs NPo NSs NPo NSs NPo NSs NPo NSs NPo NSs NPo NSs NPo NSs NPo NSs NPo NSs NbPo hNas Service Default Subscriber System voicemail BasicConferencing Default Subscriber System BasicConferencing Default Subscriber System voicemail BasicConferencing voicemail Default Subscriber System Call Logging Portal Call Lagging Portal Default Subscriber System Default Subscriber System Voicemail Figure 3 46 Subscriber System Map Window System Name ae Mitchell Mitchell Mitchell Mitchell Mitchell Mitchell Alpena Alpena Alpena Alpena Alpena Alpena Woonsocket Woonsocket The Subscriber System Map window contains a list of all the NPA NXX service system map pings defined for the APmax systems being administered in the APmax UI The list has the fol lowing four columns Mapped Item Type Service System Name The value of the item being mapped to the associated service and system For example if the Type is NPA NXX then this value will be a 6 digit NPA NXX The only Type of mapping available at this time is NPA NXX The APmax service mapped to this NPA NXX and system The APmax system mapped to this service and NPA NXX To enter one
52. TIP DS1 7 TRANSMIT TIP DS1 8 RECEIVE RING DS1 8 TRANSMIT RING Gei RECEIVE TIP Gei TRANSMIT TIP i CHASSIS GROUND i CHASSIS GROUND CHASSIS GROUND CHASSIS GROUND CHASSIS GROUND Table 1 3 T1 Pin Out Table for 600632 600634 Revs AO and Al DS1 SIGNAL NAME DSI 1 RECEIVE RING DS1 1 TRANSMIT RING DS1 1 RECEIVE TIP DS1 1 TRANSMIT TIP Document 715025 10 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 pore ocw DS1 2 Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 WHT ORG pepe s 1 wron so o mee s O o ves s mmer ose mm ae mm ere 4d Chapter 1 Hardware Installation RECEIVE RING TRANSMIT RING RECEIVE TIP TRANSMIT TIP RECEIVE RING TRANSMIT RING RECEIVE TIP TRANSMIT TIP RECEIVE TIP TRANSMIT TIP RECEIVE RING TRANSMIT RING RECEIVE RING TRANSMIT RING RECEIVE TIP TRANSMIT TIP RECEIVE TIP TRANSMIT TIP RECEIVE RING TRANSMIT RING RECEIVE RING TRANSMIT RING RECEIVE TIP TRANSMIT TIP RECEIVE RING TRANSMIT RING RECEIVE TIP TRANSMIT TIP CHASSIS GROUND CHASSIS GROUND CHASSIS GROUND CHASSIS GROUND Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 1 Hardware Installation LJ JUMPER CHASSIS GROUND 9 Apply power to the APmax system 10 Go to Chapter 2 Installing the APmax UI and follow the steps to install the software on the PC 11 Go to Secti
53. Tees CHA ise a Multicast Frames Received l Ext RJ45 6 Wl d 100 Mbit Broadcast Frames Sent 100 Mbit 100 Mbit 100 Mbit 100 Mbit Figure 21 2 Ethernet Switch Information Window The left hand side of the Ethernet Switch Information window contains a list of all the Ethernet switch ports that are being monitored The list can be sorted by clicking on the column headings Selecting a port in the list will display the statistics for that port in the Statistics and Advanced Sta tistics tabs see Section 21 1 located on the right side of the window Document 715025 289 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 21 Ethernet Switch Information The columns in the Switch Ports list are described below Unit The APmax system unit number on which this Ethernet switch port is located Port The Ethernet switch port number that is being monitored Connected To The device to which this switch port is connected e g RJ45 port Ethernet port DSP Enabled This box will be checked if the switch port is enabled and unchecked if the switch port is disabled Linked This box will be checked if this switch port is used in parallel with other Ethernet ports to increase the link speed and redun dancy beyond the limits of a single port This box will be unchecked if the switch port is not linked Speed The port speed The speed is typically determined by the con nected to d
54. Upgrade Completed Successfully Please verify that the upgraded unitis are in Service A copy of the logs regarding this upgrade are located at CrUsers dennisuDocuments iS stem_Upgrade_Log_9511_635570784752475308 tx t Figure 18 9 Upgrade Complete Document 715025 272 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Part 4 System Surveillance Overview Part 4 provides instructions for using the system surveillance functions that are included in the APmax UI software The following chapters are found in System Surveillance e Chapter 19 Alarm Status e Chapter 20 Digital Carrier Status e Chapter 21 Ethernet Switch Information e Chapter 22 Log Reader e Chapter 23 SS7 Status To access the surveillance interfaces for an APmax system right click on the system s icon x2 in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu Select the System Surveil lance command to expand the popup menu as illustrated in the figure below The expanded menu will display all of the available surveillance interfaces for this system Select a command from the expanded menu to display the associated interface Mitchell eS System Configuration is System Maintenance Kal System Surveillance En Digital Carrier Status Ethernet Switch Information C Log Reader 6 Notify Status Tu 557 Status System Surveillance Menu Document 715025
55. Welcome Screen Press the Next button when you are ready to begin the APmax UI installation 5 The Customer Information screen will now be displayed This screen is shown in Figure 2 8 i APmax InstallShield Wizard Customer Information Please enter your information User Name Organization pe ooo Install this application For Anyone who uses this computer fall users only For mei InstallShield Figure 2 8 Enter Customer Information Enter your user name and organization name select the scope of users who should be allowed to use the APmax UI software on this computer and then click the Next button to continue the installation Document 715025 17 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 2 Installing the APmax UI 6 The Setup Type screen will now be displayed Your choices will be Complete and Cus tom The Complete installation will install everything The Custom installation will let you choose which components to install This screen is displayed in Figure 2 9 i APmax InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits your needs Please select a setup type Complete J All program Features will be installed Requires the most disk space O Custom Choose which program Features you want installed and where they Will be installed Recommended For advanced users Figure 2 9 Choose the Setup Type Sel
56. a new position by moving the mouse in the desired direction A When the item is in the desired position release the left hand mouse button The Command Center window will retain its last size between APmax UI sessions Also the items within the Command Center window will maintain their position between APmax UI ses sions Document 715025 33 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 3 2 Command Center Items amp Commands Icons in the Command Center window will display a popup menu when the right hand mouse button is clicked while the mouse pointer is positioned over the icon The popup menu will con tain commands specific to the selected icon The items found in the Command Center and all of their associated commands are described below bis o rr e m ti A Pmax UI Icon This icon represents APmax UI administration From this icon you can access commands that affect the configuration of the APmax UI itself e g change user pref erences and define APmax systems The available commands are listed below APmax System Definition Subscriber System Map User Administration S User Preferences APmax System Definition See Section 3 4 APmax System Administration Subscriber System Map See Section 3 5 Subscriber System Map User Administration See Section 3 2 User Administration User Preferences See Section 3 3 4 User
57. addresses Each billing service address may have one or more advanced services or service groups added to it Services that have already been added to a billing service address or service group are shown below the associated billing service address icon or service group icon in the Subscribers list of the Subscriber Management interface illustrated in Figure 26 5 To add an advanced service to a billing service address or service group select the address or ser vice group and press the Add button at the bottom of the Subscribers list A drop down list of available services similar to Figure 26 29 will be displayed Select the service you wish to add from the drop down list Depending on the service some variation of an Add Subscriber win dow will be displayed containing all of the required fields that must be populated to subscribe to the selected service Enter the requested data into the fields and press the OK button to complete the subscription procedure More information on each service listed in the Add button menu is available in the Service Description document associated with each service oe Add New Subscriber 6 Add New Service Group JR Add ACD Call Center Wie Add Notify Plus ZG Add Originating Call Management CH Add SIP Intercom We Add Switch Services D Add Terminating Call Management S Add Universal Call Management Figure 26 29 Add Button Service Menu Document 715025 332 Innovative Systems L L
58. are viewed by service end users include a banner that typically displays the logo or name of their service provider The graphic used for this banner must be in a computer file of the format PNG Portable Network Graphics When editing an existing portal configuration the banner graphic that is currently being displayed to subscribers can be viewed by pressing the Current button This will open a Web Portal Banner window similar to Fig ure 11 5 The Figure 11 5 example shows a banner where the end user s service provider is the fictional company ABC Telecom To change the banner being displayed to subscribers press the New but ton This will open a standard file selection window which will allow a new PNG file to be selected Once the file is selected it will be displayed in the Web Portal Banner window Press the OK button in the Web Portal Ban ner window to accept the new banner or press Cancel to exit without updating the banner Web Portal Banner ABC Telecom Figure 11 5 Web Portal Banner Document 715025 165 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings Portal HTML The HTML file that defines the entryway to the Web Portal Service inter face can be viewed and customized by pressing the Edit button in the Por tal HTML section of the Web Portal tab which will display a Web Portal HTML window populated with the current HTML After any changes are made
59. as illustrated in Figure 23 3 and then clicking the Enable Disable command If the command is selected when the status is INS or SMB the status will be changed to MMB If the command is selected when the status is MMB the status will be temporarily changed to SMB until the true status INS or SMB of the link is returned from the APmax system by either pressing the Refresh button or by closing and opening the SS7 Status user interface SST Status APmax Mitchell Thy Linkset 1 C515005RF Unit SLC Status Inhibit Status Ti SN A Ost 1 9 EE Enable Disable Inhibit Uninhibit Figure 23 3 Enable Disable SS7 Link Document 715025 300 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 23 SS7 Status Inhibit Status The current inhibition state of the SS7 link Potential states are as follows e Green Link is uninhibited and available e Yellow Link is locally inhibited e Red Link is remotely inhibited e Gray Link is inhibited and unavailable The inhibition state of an SS7 link can be changed by right clicking on the link to invoke a popup menu as illustrated in Figure 23 3 and then clicking the nhibit Uninhibit command If the nhibit Unin hibit command is selected when the status is Available then the SS7 link inhibit procedure will be initiated for the selected link If the Inhibit Uninhibit command is selected when the status is Unavail able then the i
60. associated with the billing service address or service group currently selected in the Subscribers list of the Subscriber Management interface At the very least a subscriber will have their default phone number listed in the Address Info tab Instructions for adding see Sec tion 26 1 3 1 and removing see Section 26 1 3 2 addresses are given below General Info Address Info Intenet Subscriber Addresses Address Type p 605 555 1010 Phone Number 555 1010 Phone Murnber jim jones innovsys com E Mail jimsip innovsys com SIP Address 176 Centres Extension Add X Delete Figure 26 34 Address Info Tab 26 1 3 1 Adding Addresses To add an address to a billing service address first press the Add button located below the Sub scriber Addresses list to display the Add New Address window By default the Address Type selected in the Add New Address window will be Phone Number see Figure 26 35 Add Hew Address Ed Add Mew Address Address Type Phone Number Ke Address Type Phone Number Ww Address 605 555 1010 Address 555 1010 Figure 26 35 Add New Phone Number Next select the type of address you wish to add Options include Phone Number Figure 26 35 E Mail Figure 26 36 SIP Address Figure 26 37 and Centrex Extension Figure 26 38 The formatting of the Address field will change depending on which Address Type is selected Document 715025 336 Innovative S
61. button to cancel the deletion Document 715025 47 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started Continm Delete d Delete the 4P region Minnesota Figure 3 28 Prompt to Delete an Empty Region Confirm Delete eh Delete the 4P region East South Dakota ds This action will delete 4 AF systems contained in this region Figure 3 29 Prompt to Delete a Region with Systems 3 4 1 4 System Regions in the Command Center When the APmax systems administered by the APmax UI have been partitioned into regions the following changes will occur in the display of the Command Center window e The Regions drop down box Segen in the menu bar at the top of the APmax UI window will contain a list of regions that have been defined and the active region will be selected s The name of the active region will be displayed in the Command Center window caption s The Command Center will only display system icons E for the active region All of these changes to the display of the Command Center window are illustrated in Figure 3 30 below File Window Help Region East South Dakota ze Command Center Region East South Dakota Ke Services APmax Ul Woonsocket Mt Vemopn E Mitchell Alpena Figure 3 30 Selecting a Region in the Command Center Document 715025 48 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getti
62. button will unassign the default route Document 715025 112 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration Defaut Route Linkset Linkset1 ell set Disable _ Linkset ID Description Far End Point Code 2 Linkset2 3 Linkset3 4 Linkset4 E Figure 8 12 Selecting a Default Route 8 4 2 Adding a Route To add a route to the SS7 configuration press the Add button located below the Routes list in the Routing tab Figure 8 11 of the SS7 Configuration window An Add New Route window similar to Figure 8 13 will be displayed Add New Route Route Info Fa ell Een oie Route Description Linkset ID Description Mate Linkset 2 Linkset 2 Linkset 1 3 Linkset 3 4 Linkset A Linkset 5 5 Linkset 5 Linkset 4 canei Figure 8 13 Add New Route Window The Add New Route window contains the Far End Point Code field the Route Description field and a list of linksets that have been defined in the SS7 configuration If a linkset in the list is part of a combined linkset the Mate Linkset column in the list will display the description of the mate Enter the far end point code and a description of the route select which linkset the route is associ ated with from the list and press the OK button to add the route to the SS7 configuration 8 5 Global Title Translation Global Title Translation GTT is an SS7 standard operation that uses telephone network related
63. can be clicked to display or hide the link rows in the linkset By default all link sets are expanded to show the status of their links A vertical scrollbar will be displayed on the right hand side of the window if the linksets and links create a table longer than can be shown in the SS7 Status window Document 715025 299 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 23 SS7 Status The list of links beneath each linkset row contains six columns of information about the SS7 links in the linkset The lists can be sorted by clicking on the column headings The columns are described below Unit The number of the APmax system unit on which this link is located SLC The signaling link code used to match each link with the SRP STP at the opposite end of the data link The SLC is the only common link identity information used at both ends of the data link and is therefore used by the network element at each end of the link to transfer link status information to the opposite end of the link Con sequently the SLC for each link must be unique within each APmax system Status The current status of the SS7 link Potential states are as follows e Green Link is in service and is capable of carrying SS7 traffic e Yellow Link is in a man made busy MMB state e Red Link is in a switch made busy SMB state The status of an SS7 link can be changed by right clicking on the link to invoke a popup menu
64. data e g subscribers of all APmax systems being administered by the APmax UI System specific service settings are found in the menus under the appropriate system icon 2 The menu options displayed in the figure below are found under the Services icon in all installations of the APmax UI Additional menu options may be displayed as other services are installed on APmax systems The interfaces for additional services are not discussed in the APmax User Manual Documentation for each additional service e g APmax Voice Mail is packaged with that service Licensing Ei License Viewer wo Subscriber p Voice Mail Services Menu Document 715025 309 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Document 715025 310 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APMAXx User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 25 License Viewer Chapter 25 License Viewer The License Viewer interface is used to view the announcement licenses and advanced service licenses found on all APmax systems being managed by this installation of the APmax UI Licenses are provided by Innovative Systems and determine the quantity of services supported by each APmax system Licenses are configured for individual APmax systems and in some cases for an individual unit within a system Additional licensing is required to increase the quantity of Services To access the License Viewer interface right click
65. determine which end of the circuit will gain control if both ends simultaneously attempt to seize the cir cuit The circuit that does not become the controlling end will attempt the call on another available circuit Options for this field are listed below e None The far end will be the controlling end for all instances of glare e UNC Uncontrolled This is the default value The control ling end will be determined on a per trunk basis following the rules outlined in GR 317 e ALL The APmax will be the controlling end for all instances of glare This field indicates how the reception of unknown ISUP mes sages is to be handled If this field is set to Send then a Confu sion message is returned to the originator of the unknown message If this field is set to Don t Send then unknown mes sages are handled as stated in GR 317 The default setting is Don t Send This field allows the inbound ISUP trunk receive continuity tone to be viewed and adjusted The tone can be set to either 1780 Hz or 2010 Hz The default inbound receive continuity tone is 1780 Hz This field allows the outbound ISUP trunk receive continuity tone to be viewed and adjusted The tone can be set to either 1780 Hz or 2010 Hz The default outbound receive continuity tone is 2010 Hz 144 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration In Transmit Tone This field allows the inbound ISUP trunk transmit conti
66. displayed in the analysis graph Press the Apply Analysis button to begin log analysis using the specified settings Document 715025 29 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 22 Log Reader Document 715025 298 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 23 SS7 Status Chapter 23 SS7 Status 23 1 Monitoring SS7 Links The SS7 Status tool allows system administrators to monitor SS7 links in APmax systems SS7 links are defined in the SS7 Configuration interface described in Section 8 2 To access the SS7 Status interface right click on the system s icon E in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Surveillance SS7 Status command as illustrated in Figure 23 1 The name of the system for which you are monitoring SS7 links will be displayed at the top of the SS7 Status window Figure 23 2 Mitchell 3 System Configuration d System Maintenance _ Alarrn Status SS Digital Carrier Status Ethernet Switch Information Log Reader 557 Status S57 Status APmax Mitchell AHA Shy Linkset 1 C515005RP Figure 23 2 SS7 Status Window The SS7 Status window contains a table of the SS7 linksets and links that have been defined see Section 8 2 for this APmax system On the left hand side of each linkset use row is a tree symbol that
67. displayed while the databases are backed up and downloaded SC Working Backing Up File 14 of 21 Figure 17 4 Database Backup Progress Instructions for using Report Viewer functions to create view and manage reports are found in the following sections e Section 17 1 Creating a Report e Section 17 2 Viewing Reports a 17 2 1 Printing and Exporting Reports e Section 17 3 Report Management Operations a 17 3 1 Saving Reports Document 715025 248 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer b 17 3 2 Renaming Reports c 17 3 3 Password Protecting Reports d 17 3 4 Deleting Reports e 17 3 5 Scheduling Report Emails 17 1 Creating a Report The following steps provide a general guide to creating a new report using the Report Viewer tool 1 Open the Report Viewer tool if it is not already open If the Report Viewer tool is already open and there are items in the white draw control page in the middle of the window then press the New button at the top of the Report Viewer window to begin creating a new report 2 Click on the Subscriber icon a on the left hand side of the Report Viewer window and drag it to the white draw control page in the middle of the window as illustrated in Figure 17 5 The name of the new report will be displayed at the top and center of the draw con trol The report is tentatively
68. el Direction a Tag Outbound Packets Yes e Port Description Video Port Enable Port Down Alam Yes OK Cancel Figure 4 20 Add Port to VLAN Populate the following fields in the Add Port to VLAN window and press the OK button APmax Unit Select which units on the currently selected APmax system will be configured with the new VLAN port Port Select the new port Options may include ADMIN E CPROC Eth1 External Ports 1 6 and DSPs 1 4 depending on which ports have already been configured for this VLAN Direction Select the direction of the new port In Out or 2 way Document 715025 79 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration Tag Outbound Should outgoing packets be tagged for the new port Yes or Packets No Port Description Enter a short description of the port Enable Port Down Should this port set an alarm if the port is down Yes or No Alarm This option is available for External Ports 1 and 3 6 The new port will be shown in the Defined VLANs section beneath the VLAN for which it was configured Select the port to display its settings in the right hand side of the VLAN Configuration window see Figure 4 21 If the port is ADMIN Fb CPROC Eth or a DSP and Tag Outbound Packets is set to Yes then the ZP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway fields in the Port IP Settings section on the right hand side of the VLAN Configuration window must
69. error log entries Entries Total Core Files The number of core files Total DSP Core The number of DSP core files Files Total Alarms The number of alarms Total Service The number of restarts of services Restarts Document 715025 306 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 24 Daily Log Analysis Tool Total Unit Restarts The number of times the specified unit restarted Number of days hours minutes and seconds the unit has been run ning since the last reboot TIPC Queue Stats TIPC receive Number of TIPC requests in the queue currently queue depth Current Alarms Alarms that have been set through CPU 1 or CPU 2 List of alarms gen The alarm name alarm type CPU the alarm is on and whether the erated alarm has been cleared Core Files The core file generated and the name of the service DSP Core Files DSP Core Files The DSP core file generated and the name of the service Service Restarts Service Restarts The service names that have been restarted Disk Usage File System The size of the system the current amount of disk space used the cur rent amount of disk space available and the percentage of disk space used total for system var and vmfs System Info List of set alarms ID register APmax hardware revision number Measured voltages Status of onboard voltage converters for the APmax Document 715025 307 Innovat
70. in the selected APmax system A symbol representing the most urgent alarm for each unit will be dis played above the system icon These symbols are listed below A Indicates there are no alarms present for this unit A Indicates a minor alarm for this unit A Indicates a major alarm for this unit x Indicates a critical alarm for this unit The right hand side of the Alarm Status window contains a list of the current alarms on all units in the selected APmax system Each row in the list represents an individual alarm and contains the following information for that alarm timestamp of the alarm unit number CPU level of the alarm and additional information that identifies the possible cause of the alarm In most cases the alarm will be cleared by the system when the reason for the alarm has been cor rected However some alarms have to be cleared manually For example if an alarm indicates a system restart it must be cleared manually to acknowledge the occurrence of a system restart To manually clear an alarm select the alarm in the list and press the Cancel Alarm button Multiple alarms can be selected and cleared simultaneously by holding the Shift or Ctrl key down while selecting alarms To manage the notifications audio and email associated with each alarm level see Section 19 1 1 Document 715025 276 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 19 Alarm Status To view a recent h
71. it is recommended that you use the Ethernet Configuration Wizard described in Section 4 1 2 The Ethernet Config uration Wizard can be accessed by pressing the Wizard button at the bottom of the Ethernet Con figuration window 4 1 1 Ethernet Configuration Interface The Ethernet Configuration window is partitioned into five tabs General DSP VRRP Static Routes and Tie Line The General tab is displayed by default when the Ethernet Configuration interface is opened The configuration settings available in each of these tabs are described in the following sections 4 1 1 1 General Settings The General tab Figure 4 3 allows viewing and editing of the primary Ethernet configuration settings The settings in this tab are described below Ethernet Configuration APmax Mitchell General DSP VARP Static Routes Tie Line Name Server DNS Address Name Server DNS Address Host Name 9526 Internet 192 163 5 100 255 255 255 0 192 166 5 2 Internet 192 168 5 101 255 255 255 0 192 166 5 2 Administration 172 23 11 75 255 255 245 0 KEES EC Administration 1 72 25 12 104 255 255 245 0 KEES EC Call Processing 172 235 1177 255 255 245 0 172 223 0 1 Call Processing 172 23 12 103 255 255 245 0 KGR Inter Unit Inter Unit Figure 4 3 Ethernet Configuration Window General Settings The General tab contains the following fields Host Name The local host name of the system A space separated list
72. linkset Also the total of all channels in all linksets for each unit in the APmax system may not exceed eight If channels already exist in the linkset and the number of channels added to the linkset would make the total over eight an error will be displayed when the OK button is pressed in the Add Links window Press the OK button to complete the addition of the channels in the Channels In the Linkset list to the linkset 8 2 4 Deleting a Link from a Linkset To delete a link from a linkset select the linkset in the list on the left hand side of the Linksets tab see Figure 8 3 The links assigned to the linkset will be displayed in the Links section lower right corner of the tab Select the link to delete and press the Delete button in the Links section The link has now been deleted 8 3 Combined Linksets A combined linkset is the logical grouping of two linksets into a single entity that can be used to transmit messages to given destinations Typically a combined linkset is created when two link sets exist where each linkset is connected to one STP in a mated STP pair A mated STP pair provides redundant message routing to other SS7 point codes Therefore any link in a combined linkset can be used to transmit a message to these far end point codes The Combined Linksets tab Figure 8 10 allows for the configuration and display of the com bined linksets on the APmax system Document 715025 110 Innovative Systems L L C V
73. more than 65 536 records However some CSV file viewing applications e g Excel 2003 do not support viewing more than 65 536 records so while the exported CSV file may contain more than 65 536 records the number of records that can be viewed will be subject to the limitations of the CSV file viewer Applications such as Excel 2007 support display ing more than 65 536 records s The To Excel button is used to export the contents of the report window into an XLS file and display it in your default XLS file viewer This button will be disabled if the current report contains more than 65 536 records e Pressing the Preview button will display a print preview screen see Figure 17 25 contain ing a table of the records in the report This button will be disabled if the current report con tains more than 65 536 records Document 715025 258 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer ER Preview File view Background e zi eh l q DW ai j ER ie GI La Saf w N 100 ie H Platinum Subscriber Report Default Phone Number Service List Mailbox Number Options Package List Description Ryan Tupper Gene vold Jahn Cersosima Becky Weier Becky Weier Greg Goldammer greg Goldammer Greg Goldammer 605 555 1022 605 555 1050 605 555 1021 605 555 1046 605 555 1046 605 555 1011 605 555 1011 605 555 1011 Voicemail Voicemail Voicem
74. named New Search since it has not yet been saved Also notice that there is now a Columns heading on the left hand side of the draw control Beneath the Columns heading is a list of all the database fields that will be displayed in the report At this time the only fields listed are the Name and Default Phone Number fields since they were added to the report by default when the Subscriber icon was dragged onto the draw control Mew Search Columns ame Default Phone Humber HF Subscriber Figure 17 5 Draw Control with Subscriber Icon Note The Subscriber icon is not required to create a report Enhanced service icons such as Voice Mail may be used independently to create reports that do not include information from the Subscriber database However the Subscriber database is present in all APmax configurations and is used as an example throughout this procedure Unwanted icons in the draw control can be removed by right clicking on a single icon in the draw control to invoke a popup menu and selecting the Delete command in the menu as illustrated in Figure 17 6 Document 715025 249 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer MAI Subscriber Getatch Wee Create Oor Preview Link Type Figure 17 6 Delete Popup Command 3 Click on the Subscriber icon in the draw control in the middle of the Report Viewer win dow The Columns and Criteria tabs on the ri
75. new user has now been cre ated and will be displayed in the list of users in the Administrative Users tab 11 5 2 Editing a User To modify the settings Username Password Description of an existing administrative user select the user in the Administrative Users tab see Figure 11 28 and press the Edit button An Administrative User window see Figure 11 29 populated with the current settings of the selected user will be displayed Make any desired changes to the settings and press the OK button to save the changes 11 5 3 Deleting a User To delete an administrative user select the user in the Administrative Users tab see Figure 11 28 and press the Delete button A delete confirmation prompt Figure 11 30 will be displayed Select the Yes button to complete the deletion Delete 2 4re you sure you wish to delete the selected Administrative User Figure 11 30 Delete User Prompt Document 715025 183 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings 11 6 External DSP Addresses Note The External DSP Addresses interface is only available for APmax systems with either the SysConfig package installed or APmax Release 4 3 or greater The External DSP Addresses tab Figure 11 31 1s used to manage the list of domain names and IP addresses that can be used by Internet and mobile device applications to query APmax system information from DSPs on the APmax
76. of domains to use during DNS look ups when no domain is specified Domain Search Document 715025 66 Version 4 3 10 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Name Server DNS Address Chapter 4 Network Configuration IP address of the Name Server DNS that should be used by this system There are two Name Server DNS Address fields The second field is optional and will be queried after the address in the first Name Server DNS field is queried The values of these fields can be any valid IP address in dotted notation i e 172 23 8 5 The columns and cells in the General tab grid are described in the table below Click in each cell and enter the appropriate IP address Address Subnet Gateway Table 1 Ethernet General Settings The WAN IP address for the selected network interface The WAN IP address can be any valid IP address in dotted notation i e 192 168 5 100 The subnet mask for the selected network interface The subnet mask is used to determine what IP addresses are on the same local network as this system interface The Subnet can be any valid sub net mask in dotted notation e 255 255 255 0 The IP address of the gate way to be used by this sys tem The gateway is used when the system needs to send an IP message to a des tination that is not on the local network The Gateway can be any valid IP address in dot ted notation i e 192 168 5 2 Docum
77. on the Services icon in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the Licensing License Viewer command as illustrated in Figure 25 1 A License Viewer window similar to Figure 25 2 will be displayed Services 7 ol Licensing License Viewer JG Subscriber Figure 25 1 License Viewer Menu Command SN License Viewer elei ses Drag a column header here to group by that column System Consumer Resource License Use Distribution Type Expiration Date Alarm Threshold 9511 Music On Hold Application Music On Hold Service DI O System Never N i 9511 Voice Mail Voice Mail Boxes 8 OI10D0 9 System Never OU 9511 Any Voice Transcription DI 0 System Never Na 9511 Any Voicemail Mobile Access Subscribers 10 100 10 System Never 9511 On Demand Conferencing On Demand Conferencing Ports Dilz 0 System Never 9511 Web Portal Subscriber Web Portal Subscribers Of1000 0 System Never 9511 Unknown Unknown oS 100 System Never mitchell Any Voice Transcription DI O System Never mitchell Notify Notify Subscribers Of100 0 System Never mitchell Terminating Call Management Terminating Call Management Subscrib Of200 0 System Never mitchell Calling Name Calling Name Subscribers Of109000 0 System Never mitchell Calling Name Configuration Calling Name Configurations o 1 100 NA System Never mitchell Calling Name 557 Expansion Calling Name 557 E
78. popup menu as illustrated in the figure below The expanded menu will display all of the available configuration interfaces for this system Select a command from the expanded menu to display the associated interface Document 715025 61 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 ACD Configuration Announcements Call Logging Portal Settings Calling Name Diagnostic Settings Configuration DSP Configuration FireBar Internet Access Settings Local Number Portability Notification Center Management Ze VLAN Configuration Notify Configuration OCM Configuration On Demand Conferencing Phone Number Format Serial Configuration Service Access Map Single Number SIP ACS SIP Registration 57 Configuration SSN Configuration Switch Interface Configuration System Time Manager Terminating Call Management Configuration Trunks Universal Call Management Configuration Wireless he System Maintenance System Surveillance CREPES Ek amp hered seer St 4Oe Ron 9 System Configuration Menu NOTE The name of the APmax system being configured will be displayed in the caption of any window that is opened using the System Configuration command If the system name that is displayed in the caption is not the system you want to con figure then close the window and right click on the icon of the system you want to configure
79. restart the APmax UI to install them now Figure 2 23 Restart Prompt 2 3 2 On Demand Updates The Innovative Systems FTP site can be checked at any time for updated APmax UI files by selecting the Help Check for Updates command in the menu bar as illustrated in Figure 2 24 Document 715025 25 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 2 Installing the APmax UI Contents Check for Updates About Online Tech Support Program Messages If one or more updates are found then a prompt with a 2 hour timer will be displayed see Figure 2 25 The APmax UI will be restarted and the updates will be installed when the timer reaches zero unless the Cancel button is pressed Choosing Install in the prompt will restart the APmax UI Upon startup the Downloading and Installing Updates progress window will be shown see Figure 2 22 The window will remain open until all updates are downloaded and installed and then it will close allowing the APmax UI to resume startup If no updates are found then a No Updates Found message will be displayed Figure 2 26 10 APmax UI Update s are Available Release Notes NotifyPlus_V5 Version 5 4 0 14 Fixed a problem where Carrier codes are only displayed as 3 digits if leading digit is 0 SubscriberManagement Version 4 1 0 9 Fred problem that would produce odd subscriber node hierarchy when searching by Name TCMAdmimn Vers
80. sections describe each tab available in the Service Configuration interface e Section 8 7 1 Default Trigger e Section 8 7 2 Screen List Edit e Section 8 7 3 Basic Conferencing e Section 8 7 4 Remote IP 8 7 1 Default Trigger The Default Trigger tab Figure 8 29 is used to manage the subsystem number SSN used by the DefaultTriggerHandler package which handles triggers not assigned to services Document 715025 129 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration Deel service Configuration 4Priax 9511 Event Type Figure 8 29 Default Trigger Tab To configure the SSN select the Default Trigger tab and press the Add button An Add SSN win dow see Figure 8 30 will be displayed Enter an SSN value from 0 to 254 select an Event Type e g Tcap Query Trigger and press the OK button to complete the addition Add 33h Event Type Teap Query Gei Figure 8 30 Add Default Trigger SSN To remove the SSN from the Default Trigger tab select the SSN and press the Delete button at the bottom of the tab 8 7 2 Screen List Edit The Screen List Edit tab Figure 8 31 is used to manage the subsystem number SSN used by Screen List Editing SLE services GN service Configuration 4Priax 9511 ka a Basic Conferencing Remete IP Event Type E Add x Delete Figure 8 31 Screen List Edit Tab Document 715025 130 In
81. send this information to your certificate authority e vensign innovative systems etc BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST MIIBSCCAUSCAQ AwgaLkCzAJBgNVBAYTAIVTMRUwEwYDVOQlEwx Tbh3VOaCBEYWtv dGExETAPBgNVBAc TCE lpdGNo WsMRswGQ YDVGGKExJJbmSvdmFOaxAilFN5c3Rl b MeCzAJBgNVBAs TARKIUMR8wHOYDVGGDExZ3d3cuYXBtYXguaW Sub3ZzeXMu Y 2 MSEwHw JKoZlhveNAGQkBFhJhZG Ipbk BpbmSvdnNSey5ib20waZSwDQYJKoZlhveN AGEBBGADgYDAMIGJAGGBAM 7XV5MgNN8Rd K Owjd SP Ken M8Sh2mPoc kgSAVat SxjhqwJOEgg NuGeWXRefk 6gRfv7TscZFQW3DGiKdoW 3azreb WaoX8D3aGRagl615h b6MY RaKAMOrHriax6u 1 Trah3DtKPrexg TRK Av Wn HKA KG VplyrgW Depp Zi AgMBAAGGADANBgkghkiGSwOBAGUFAAOBgQ BK GzwReSzYpWGFrurTh llzpNB tj qq CKEs8lEro8CYRraavacjMkOLegRAlwBTg4D ASplay 6VRsalK330SVcSHVh QcblUloeviQne8DFEdCaDXdeW Ajdt4 DhzdlleF nOzcip Ev Kimari Shy Doc VObL ISSAZ TUT Bkvw END CERTIFICATE REQUEST Figure 11 26 Certificate Signing Request Information 7 Submit the CSR request file to a certificate authority online e VeriSign They will generate a PEM CRT or PFX certificate response file which contains your public key and is digitally signed by the certificate authority When the response file is received con tinue to the next step NOTE If the certificate is a CRT PEM file with text content but the file name ends with a CRT extension and it has BEGIN CERTIFICATE and oo END CERTIFICATE in it then it must be renamed to have a PEM extension before being installed 8 In
82. similar to Figure 12 4 will be displayed Enter a routing number from to 10 and press the OK button to complete the entry Add Trunk Routing Configuration Number Routing Number fl r Figure 12 4 Add Trunk Routing Configuration Number Numbers in the Trunk Routing Configuration Numbers list can be moved up and down in the pri ority queue by selecting the row of the number and pressing the up or down arrow buttons on the right hand side of the list 12 2 Subscriber Settings The Subscriber Settings tab Figure 12 5 is used to configure the length number of digits of the phone number addresses that are automatically added to the APmax system when a new sub scriber record is created For example if entries for 7 and 10 are in the Subscriber Settings tab and a new subscriber with the phone number 605 555 1000 is added to the APmax then a 7 digit phone number address of 555 1000 would also be added to the system for the new subscriber record Note An address length of 10 digits will be automatically configured for non international APmax systems and cannot be deleted from the Subscriber Settings tab Zi lal Phone Number Format 4Pmax 9511 Fomat Setings Subscriber Settings Subscriber Address List Lengths Em lq Add Delete Figure 12 5 Subscriber Settings Tab Document 715025 189 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 12 Phone Number Form
83. table Ee Files Dependencies Licenses Tables Announcements ProcessT able 2 0 SupervisorContig 4 0 AEE venblonsumers 4 0 AEE ventProducers 4 0 SEEventRouting 1 0 SubscribersystemMap 1 0 SystemUnitDefinition 1 0 Figure 16 22 Tables Tab The Announcements tab is divided into three tabs Announcement Sets Announcements and Fragments These tabs are described below The Announcements Sets tab see Figure 16 23 contains a list of the sets of announcements found in the package The following properties of each announcement set are displayed in the list SetiD The unique ID of this set of announcements Description A short description of the type of announcements contained in this set Document 715025 243 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 16 Package Management WEEN Announcement Sets Announcements Fragments Set ID Description SMM voces Figure 16 23 Announcements Sets Tab The Announcements tab selected in Figure 16 24 contains a list of the announcements found in the package The following properties of each announcement are displayed in the list GUID The unique announcement ID Version The version number of the announcement Annc Text The text that the announcement will voice when it is played Description A short description of the announcement that may contain the name and type o
84. the APmax UI System regions are defined in the left pane of the Defined APmax s tab in the APmax System Administration window If no system regions have been defined then the only item in the left pane will be the lt Default Region gt system region see Figure 3 25 An example of this window with multiple regions defined can be seen in Figure 3 24 ZE APmax System Administration System Regions System List Oh lt Default Region gt l System Mame System ID 5511 9511 Figure 3 25 Default System Regions List Instructions for adding regions deleting regions and renaming regions are given below See Sec tion 3 4 1 4 for details of how using system regions affects the display of the APmax UI Com mand Center 3 4 1 1 Adding a System Region To create a new system region press the Add button below the System Regions section in the APmax System Administration window see Figure 3 25 An Add Region window will be dis played see Figure 3 26 Enter the name of the new region and press the OK button APmax sys tems can now be added to the new region see Section 3 4 2 1 Adding a System Document 715025 46 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started Add New Region Region Name cence Figure 3 26 Adding a Region 3 4 1 2 Editing a System Region Na
85. the address and port that connects the APmax system to eLation the Innovative Systems OSS product see http www innovsys com Products eLation eLation html This allows APmax services to add records to the eLation Subscriber Activity Log The Service Description documents associated with each service will provide more details on eLation interaction with that particular service Note The Elation Messenger Configuration interface is only available for APmax systems with the Elation Messenger package installed To access the Elation Messenger Configuration interface right click on the system s icon E in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Config uration Elation Messenger Configuration command as illustrated in Figure 4 22 The name of the system you are configuring will be displayed at the top of the Elation Messenger Configura tion window Figure 4 23 8 Call Lagging Fortal Settings Zi Calling Marne ACD Configuration Announcements Diagnostic Settings Configuration DSP Configuration T FireBar Za Internet Access Settings g System Configuration Te System Maintenance m Sesten Surveillance i Address Figure 4 23 Elation Messenger Configuration Window The Port and Address settings in the Elation Messenger Configuration window are described below Enter the eLation connection information and close the wind
86. the same subnet as the IP address Description A short description used to identify the static route To delete a static route from this APmax system select the route in the list and press the Delete button located at the bottom of the Static Routes tab Document 715025 71 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration 4 1 1 5 Tie Line Configuration Tie lines are used to maintain redundancy between APmax units The Tie Line tab Figure 4 8 in the Ethernet Configuration window is used to designate two Ethernet switch ports to be tie lines One of the designated ports is also allowed to be shared meaning the tie line can connect to an external switch rather than a cable connecting two ports on the back of the APmax hardware WARNING Read the entire contents of Section 4 1 1 5 Tie Line Configuration before making changes to the default tie line switch ports In a default APmax configuration port 5 of the first unit will be connected to port 5 of the second unit and port 6 of the first unit will be connected to port 6 of the second unit This interface should not be used except under the direction of vendor technical Support personnel or a vendor documented procedure Any mistakes made using this interface could have serious ramifications Any external switch port can be designated as a shared tie line except for port 2 which is the WAN port for the Administratio
87. unit on which this DS1 is located DS1 The DS port that is being monitored Status The state of the DS port Potential DS port states are INS In Service SMB Switch Made Busy MMB Man Made Busy or Unknown MMB ports will only be shown if the Show MMB DS1s box is checked in the upper left hand corner of the win dow as illustrated below in Figure 20 3 o Digital Carrier Status APmax 9511 Di Trunks SIF Summary D51 Status Unit DS Status Timing Source b 2 0511 No 2 D51 2 No 2 051 3 No Figure 20 3 Show MMB DSals Checkbox Document 715025 282 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 20 Digital Carrier Status Timing Source Indicates Yes or No if this DS1 is the sync master port The sync master port is the preferred source of external clock syn chronization and is used to synchronize all internal clocks to the network or BITS clock On the left hand side of each row is a tree symbol that can be clicked to display more statistical details about the associated DS1 port as illustrated in Figure 20 2 At the bottom of the DS tab is the DS3 Status section which shows the status and bipolar violation counts for each unit in the current APmax system 20 2 Monitoring Trunks The Trunks tab Figure 20 4 displays the status of all DS channels that have been assigned to MF and ISUP trunk groups For more information on trunk groups see Chapt
88. who do not know the password from changing the report configuration The report may still be viewed without knowing the password but it will be read only and cannot be altered unless the correct password is entered To password protect a report check the Read Only box in the lower right hand corner of the Report Viewer window and press the Save button An Enter Password window see Figure 17 33 will be displayed The password you enter will be case sensitive Enter the password and press OK to save it Attempts to open the report in the future will result in a prompt to enter the pass word Document 715025 262 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer Enter Password Name Figure 17 33 Enter Password Window 17 3 4 Deleting Reports To delete a report select it the Recent dropdown box at the top of the Report Viewer window see Figure 17 34 and press the Delete button A delete confirmation prompt will be displayed Choose Yes in the prompt to complete the deletion or No to cancel the deletion Figure 17 34 Select a Report to Delete 17 3 5 Scheduling Report Emails Report configurations that have been saved see Section 17 3 1 Saving Reports can be sched uled to run automatically The results will then be sent to a list of email addresses The following steps provide a guide for scheduling report emails NOTE Reports containing ACD Statistics or IPTV Ch
89. 0 Save Button Menu Previously saved report files can be saved as a different file by using the Save As command in the drop down menu that is accessed by pressing the arrow next to the Save button see Figure 17 30 Document 715025 261 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer When saving a report if a report with the same file name is currently scheduled for email delivery see Section 17 3 5 Scheduling Report Emails then a prompt to update the scheduled report will be displayed see Figure 17 31 Choosing Yes in the prompt will update the scheduled report and choosing No will save the current report locally but will not update the report scheduled for email delivery Auto Update Scheduled Report 23 A report with this name is currently scheduled for auto delivery via the central reporting server would you like to update this scheduled report as well Figure 17 31 Prompt to Update Scheduled Report 17 3 2 Renaming Reports To rename an existing report open the report in Report Viewer and click the Rename button in the lower right hand corner of the Report Viewer window The New Name window see Figure 17 32 will be displayed Enter the new report name and press the OK button to confirm the change Hew Mame Name Ge Figure 17 32 New Name Window 17 3 3 Password Protecting Reports Report Viewer reports can be password protected to prevent those
90. 1 3 Password Management 177 RB ST Dr EE 178 11 5 Administrative Users 182 SETAJU QNIGCE geed A e ees 182 El le Le E RTE 183 RR ARTE ue E BETEN 183 11 6 External DSP Addresses 184 Chapter 12 Phone Number Format 187 12 1 WEE EE 187 12 2 Subscriber Settings 189 Part 3 System Maintenance 191 Chapter 13 Hardware Maintenance 193 13 1 Cleaning Air Vents 25 6 0 c05 508 5 ones Deka Bie RNa doe Reha ous 193 13 1 1 Remove Vent Cover 193 13 1 2 Remove Foam Padding 0 ccc cee eens 194 13 1 3 Remove Dust From Foam Padding 0 cece eee 195 13 2 Fan Replacement eg Eech dE Ries EEN e 195 132 1 Recommended TOONS istia andere dew dokse eeh dow Ser de sete aen seks r 196 Tee Fan Replacement Procedure cairo ethers EE 196 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager 203 14 1 Announcements 203 14 1 1 Adding Announcements ususususnsesunes eee eens 205 14 1 2 Editing Announcements 0 cece cece eens 206 14 1 3 Copying Announcements 208 14 1 4 Announcement Components 209 14 1 4 1 Phrase Components 210 14 1 4 2 Parameter Components 212 14 1 4 3 Information Components 213 14 1 4 4 Built In Components 215 14 1 5 Testing Announcements 216 14 1 6 Restoring Original Announcements 0 00 cece eee eens 218 14 2 Phrase Management 219 14 2 1 Ad
91. 1000 Innovative Dr Mitchell SD 57301 5516 Figure 26 24 Address Change for CASS Certification Service Select a default service e g Terminating Call Management Voice Mail to be configured for this subscriber This field is optional and may be left blank If a default service is selected then an additional service config uration window may be displayed when this subscriber is added The service description for the selected service will contain more information about any additional service configu ration needed for this subscriber 26 1 1 6 Deleting Billing Service Addresses To delete a billing service address from a subscriber select the appropriate billing service address icon in the Subscribers list and press the Delete button located below the list A delete confir mation prompt will be displayed Press Yes in the prompt to complete the deletion If services are currently assigned to the billing service address then an error will occur and the delete will be aborted Attempting to delete the only billing service address for a subscriber will result in a warning see Figure 26 25 that doing so will also delete the subscriber and any data associated with the sub scriber Document 715025 329 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management Delete 4re you sure you wish to delete the last Biling Service Address doing so will delete the Subscriber F
92. 11 Zb Zb 290 1 2 25 8 1 DSP 4 172 23 11 86 Zb Zb 290 172 23 81 DSP 4 172 23 12 112 Zb Zb 290 1 2 25 8 1 Figure 4 4 DSP Settings The fields in the DSP grid are described in the table below Click in each cell and enter the appro priate IP address Table 2 Ethernet DSP Settings DSP 1 4 Address The IP addresses for DSPs 1 through 4 on the selected APmax unit The IP address can be any valid IP address in dotted notation i e 172 23 11 79 Changing a DSP IP address will require the associ ated unit to be restarted for the change to take effect The subnet mask for the selected network interface The subnet mask is used to determine what IP addresses are on the same local network as this system interface The Subnet can be any valid sub net mask in dotted notation i e 255 255 248 0 Subnet The IP address of the gateway to be used by this DSP The gateway is used when the system needs to send an IP message to a destina tion that is not on the local network The Gateway can be any valid IP address in dotted notation i e 172 23 8 1 and does not need to be in the same subnet as the DSP s IP address Gateway Document 715025 68 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 4 1 1 3 VRRP Settings Chapter 4 Network Configuration VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol is designed to increase the reliability of the default gateway services The VRRP tab
93. 12 1 O51 1 13 1051 1 14 1 055 1 1 1 O53 1 1 O55 1 2 051 1 2 051 1 2 D51 1 2 D51 1 2 051 1 Figure 9 7 MF Trunk Members The list in the Trunk Members tab shows the APmax Unit T1 and channel of each trunk To delete trunk members from a trunk group select the trunks you wish to remove in the list and press the Delete button at the bottom of the Trunk Members tab A delete confirmation prompt will be displayed see Figure 9 8 Press the Yes button in the prompt to complete the deletion Confirm Delete 4re you sure you want to delete the selected trunk member s Figure 9 8 Delete Confirmation Prompt New trunk members can be added to the selected trunk group by pressing the Add button at the bottom of the Trunk Members tab A window similar to Figure 9 9 will be displayed Document 715025 138 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration Select Trunk Member s to Add Available Trunks Channel 5 6 H 5 J E E 10 11 Ea Figure 9 9 Add MF Trunk Members The Select Trunk Member s to Add window contains two lists Available Trunks and Selected Trunks The Available Trunks list on the left side shows the T1 channels that are contained in DS1 DS3s that have been enabled within the Digital Carrier Configuration interface see Chapter 7 Digital Carrier Configuration but have not been assigned to other trunk groups or service
94. 1212 voicemail Jim Jones 605 555 1051 voicemail Jim Jones 605 555 1015 TerminatingTallManagement Jim Jones 605 555 1014 TerminatingTallManagement Jim Jones 605 555 1010 Terminating callManagement Jim Jones 605 555 1010 voicemail Jim Jones 605 555 1010 UniversalCallManager Jim Jones 605 555 1110 voicemail John Smith 605 555 1300 voicemail John Smith 605 555 1300 UniversalCallManager Jonesco 605 555 1013 TerminatingTallManagement Tanesin A0S 555 1013 Voiremal Lount 9 To Excel Preview Figure 17 17 Subscriber Report Preview 7 Ifthe Voice Mail Service or another enhanced service supported by Report Viewer is installed on the current APmax system the icons representing those services can be dragged from the groups on the left hand side of the Report Viewer window onto the draw control in the center of the window to create a report that includes fields from multiple databases For example if a Subscriber icon a already exists in the draw control and a Voice Mail icon k is dragged onto the draw control a link similar to the one seen in Fig ure 17 18 will be created between the two icons Document 715025 254 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer Mew Search Columns H ame Default Phone Number Serice List Mailbox Number KS Subscnber Default Phone Number Like 605555 Service List Include TerminatingCallM anagement UniversalCallM anager Voic
95. 13 10 48 22 AM APMax Central Reporting Service T Error 5 3 2013 10 46 20 AM APMax Central Reporting Service E Information 5 3 2013 10 41 56 AM Office Software Protection Plattor CD Information 5 3 2013 10 34 07 AM Office Software Protection Plattor Information 5 3 2013 10 33 55 AM Office Software Protection Plattor Figure 17 40 Event Viewer Document 715025 266 Version 4 3 10 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 18 System Upgrade Manager Chapter 18 System Upgrade Manager The System Upgrade Manager tool allows APmax system upgrades to be performed with little or no assistance from Innovative Systems technical support personnel This allows system adminis trators to upgrade on their own schedule and in a more timely manner Upgrade progress reports are available throughout the process To access the System Upgrade Manager interface right click on the system s icon 2 in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Maintenance System Upgrade Manager command as illustrated in Figure 18 1 Announcement Manager Command Line Diagnostics File Wiewer FTP Transfer Service Fackage Management Reboot Utility Report Viewer dm Syste po oae Manager L e Figure 18 1 System Upgrade Manager Menu Command The System Upgrade Manager introduction screen Figure 18 2 displays a general warning that should be
96. 263 Secure Sockets Layer 178 Serial Configuration 91 Service Configuration 128 Service Licensing 311 Service Subscriber Management 315 Services 309 License Viewer 311 Subscriber Management 315 Seven To Ten Mapping 119 Single Web Portal 55 SIP Registration 155 SS7 Configuration 103 Combined Linksets 110 Linkset Routing 111 Linksets 105 SS7 Status 299 SSL Setup 178 SSN Configuration 128 Static Routes 70 Subscriber Management 315 Adding Subscribers 324 Address Info 336 Deleting Subscribers 326 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 General Info 333 Internet 338 Subscriber System Map 57 Sync Master 96 System Administration 45 49 System Communications 65 System Configuration 61 System Logs 293 System Maintenance 191 Package Management 229 System Regions 46 System Requirements 1 Hardware 6 System Surveillance 273 Digital Carrier Status 28 1 Ethernet Switch Information 289 Log Reader 293 SS7 Status 299 System Time Manager 85 T Technical Support Info 11 Test DSP Access 82 Tie Line Configuration 72 Time 85 NTP 88 Setting the Time 85 Toll Call Management 122 Trunk Configuration 133 General Settings 135 ISUP Trunk Groups 140 MF Trunk Groups 136 SIP Trunk Groups 147 153 Trunk Monitoring 283 U Upgrade Procedure 20 User Administration Access Rights 30 Add User 29 Delete User 30 Edit User 30 User Preferences 41 Document Number 715025 Index 345
97. 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration Add VLAN VLAN Description Video Head End Intemal VLAN ID 5 External VLAN ID Figure 4 16 Add VLAN Window 2 Enter a name for the new VLAN into the VLAN Description field Also enter an unused one to four digit External VLAN ID and then press the OK button The new VLAN will be displayed in the Defined VLANs section of the VLAN Configuration window 3 Click on the new VLAN in the Defined VLANs section to display its settings in the right hand side of the window illustrated in Figure 4 17 The VLAN Description and External VLAN ID that were used when adding the VLAN can be edited at any time in the General VLAN Settings section of the window The VLAN Routes section of the window is used to manage the routes for the selected VLAN Gi O IFD VLAN Configuration APmax Mitchell Defined WYLAN Selected ltem Settings T JW enera ettings Ze DEFAULT ID 1 G WLAN Gett Unit All Port CPROC Em VLAN Description Wideo Head End En Unit Al Port ADMIN E e Unit All Port Ext 1 Intemal VLAN ID 4 Extemal VLAN ID Unit Al Port DSP 1 gen Unit All Port DSF 2 VLAN Routes Unit All Port DSP 3 Address Netmack Gateway Description Unit Al Port DSF 4 A TEE gen Unit All For ADMIN Eat 10 11 12 14 250 255 255 0 10 11 13 14 Route 2 Unit Al Port DSP 1 Unit Al Pork DSF 2 Unit Al Pork DSF 3 Unit Al Pork DSF 4 T
98. 3 4 2 2 Editing a System Name 52 Document 715025 iii Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Table of Contents 3 42 95 Deleling a System 5 6 cok vbaa ks Gam eda eed ere eee ew Rees eS 53 3 4 3 Master APmax Management 53 3 4 3 1 Master APmax Setup eee nee nee 54 3 4 4 Single Web Portal Setup 0 0 00 ce eens 55 3 5 Subscriber System Map 57 Part 2 System Configuration 61 Chapter 4 Network Configuration 63 4 1 Ethernet Configuration 0 000 0 00 65 4 1 1 Ethernet Configuration Interface 66 e Wa BEE ER e EE EE 66 A11 2 DSP SeUINGS EE 68 AeA VRRP SS CUUINGS preire wd etek ae Renee ane ena aimee ea hoe ae 69 AAA E det EE 70 4 1 1 5 Tie Line eer te ee 12 4 1 2 Ethernet Configuration Wizard 73 4 2 VLAN Configuration e Age EEN Reeg ban dee ends aided sean eee eo aws 76 4 3 Elation Messenger Configuration 0 0 0 81 4 4 Test DSP RE 82 Chapter 5 System Time Manager 85 5 1 Manually Setting the System Time 85 5 2 Network Time Protocol 88 Chapter 6 Serial Configuration 91 Chapter 7 Digital Carrier Configuration 95 7 1 Digital Carrier Setup EE 95 FAT Re re tee EE 96 TA ID SA E ee EE 97 PAd dD So OS UINGS ENER 98 EEN ege e t Eee en eae Poe eae ane eae eas Gad as 100 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration l a 103 Sl Gen
99. 3 45 36 PM Call Proc Admin weatherd alarmd Error OPERATION _FAILED reference 92 WeatherCanada cpp has occurred create TCP tunnel call Failed Domain Name 32423423 logicalStation 1 rc 113 reason No route to host Contact support Clearing Alarm mcastbootd Stopped 10 27 2015 3 45 36 PM Admin alarmd Setting Alarm mcastbootd Stopped to Major 1445978736 10 27 2015 3 45 37 PM Admin watchd Process mcastbootd has stopped 10 27 2015 3 45 37 PM Admin alarmd Clearing Alarm mcastbootd Stopped 10 27 2015 3 45 37 PM Admin alarmd Setting Alarm mcastbootd Stopped to Critical 1445978737 Figure 22 2 Log Reader Window Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 293 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Ma nual Release 4 3 Chapter 22 Log Reader The Log Reader window is divided into two panes By default the left pane displays a tree view of log categories e g ap sys user Expand these categories to display the logs that are available for viewing e g ap log ap log 1 In each log row there are three buttons that can be pressed to perform the following actions on the log i Lee ll Press this button to connect to the InnoStream Server transfer the selected log file from the server and display the contents of the log in the right pane See Section 22 1 2 View Log for more information Press this button to setup real time log viewing
100. 3 Chapter 12 Phone Number Format Chapter 12 Phone Number Format The Phone Number Format interface provides the following functions s Formatting the playback of phone numbers in announcements see Section 12 1 e Configuring the length of phone number addresses that are automatically added to the APmax system when a new subscriber record is created see Section 12 2 The Phone Number Format interface is accessed by right clicking on the system s icon 2 in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and then selecting the System Configura tion Phone Number Format command as illustrated in Figure 12 1 The name of the system for which you are configuring settings will be displayed at the top of the Phone Number Format window Figure 12 2 ACD Configuration he System Maintenance bal System Surveillance Announcements F Call Logging Portal Settings Calling Name Diagnostic Settings Configuration DSP Configuration FireBar Internet Access Settings Local Number Portability Network Configuration LETA TE RAF Notification Center Management Phone Number Format g Serial Configuration S i Service Access Map Figure 12 1 Phone Number Format Menu Command The Phone Number Format window is partitioned into two tabs Format Settings Figure 12 2 and Subscriber Settings Figure 12 5 The settings and functions in these tabs are described bel
101. 4 71 24 oe JonesCo 001 598234 2345 Ges Jim Jones 1 103988534 71 23 gt 1000 Innovative Dr 605 SC Refresh Subscriber ACD Call Center D ZS Call Logging Notify Plus l On Demand Conferencing nA Originating Call Management SIPACS gt Terminating Call Management gt Universal Call Management Figure 26 7 Subscriber Right Click Menu Clear Subscriber from search Billing Service Address Menu Commands Right clicking on a billing service address will display a popup menu see Figure 26 8 with the Move Billing Service Address command This command can be used to create a new subscriber account for the selected billing service address or to merge the billing service address with an existing account Document 715025 320 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management Dei subscriber Management Subscribers General Info Address Info Phone Number ze 605555101 gt Find Billing Account Number J Biling Service Add Ge Jane Jones 1 983756293 7123 dee Ge John Jones 1 238394994 7342 Ge Jack Jones 1 134532344 71 24 Ge JonesCo 001 598234 2345 Ge Jim Jones 1 103988534 71 23 cH O00 Innovative Dr B05 naini ACD Cal Center Re EE ZS Call Logging Notify Plus i On Demand Conferencing E Originating Call Management Default Phone Murnber Time Zone Dial By Name Digits System Name Latitude
102. 40 Master Mode in Status Bar 3 4 3 1 Master APmax Setup Settings are shared between multiple APmax UI installations by designating an APmax system as the Master APmax on which APmax UI configuration changes will be saved If an APmax UI installation is configured with a Master APmax then upon startup it will receive from the Master APmax any APmax UI configuration changes made with other APmax UI installations that share the same Master APmax NOTE A Master APmax system should only be designated one time instructions are provided below on one APmax Ul installation Subsequent APmax UI installations should use the APmax Sign In screen Figure 3 41 to choose the Master APmax from which they will get their APmax UI configuration settings Initial Master APmax Setup When setting up a Master APmax for the first time go to the Master APmax Setup tab in the APmax System Administration window see Figure 3 39 The left hand side of the Master APmax Setup tab has a list with two columns System Name and System ID The System Name column contains a short description of each system defined in the APmax UI and the System ID column contains the unique number assigned to the system To assign a system as the Master APmax select the system in the list and press the right arrow button To unassign the Master APmax system press the left arrow button next to the Master APmax field Document 715025 54 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3
103. 5 100 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 7 Digital Carrier Configuration Digital Carrier Configuration APmax Mitchell PRI Trunks Unit Port PRI Variant Description 1 DS1 4 National PRI Trunk 1 D53 28 Nationale PRI Trunk 2 Figure 7 6 PRI Setup Tab PRI ports can be configured for the APmax system by pressing the Add button located at the bot tom of the PRI Setup tab filling out the settings in the Add PRI Trunk window see Figure 7 7 and pressing the OK button The settings in the Add PRI Trunk window are described below Fig ure 7 Unit TDM Interface PRI Type Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 ES Add PRI Trunk Unit TOM Interface 051 4 PRI Type National Description PRI Trunk 1 Figure 7 7 Add PRI Trunk Select the unit on the APmax system which will be configured with the new PRI port entry Select the Time Division Multiplexed Audio Interface TDM Interface port for this entry Select the type of PRI switch associated with this entry 101 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 7 Digital Carrier Configuration Description Enter a short description to help identify this entry in the user interface To delete a PRI port entry from this APmax system select the entry in the list and press the Delete button located at the bottom of the PRI Setup tab Document 715025 102 Innovative Syste
104. 7 37 Enter the address and press the OK button to finish adding it to list Multiple email addresses may be entered for each scheduled report Add Email Email Address admin inno Figure 17 37 Add Email Address 9 The report is now scheduled to be generated and emailed To view a history of report emails select a report in the Report Name list and then select the Logs tab see Figure 17 38 This will show the time and email results for the scheduled report Figure 17 39 shows an example of a successful scheduled report email that has a CSV file attached Schedule Loss Time Send Success 2 1 2013 8 38 AM 2 1 2013 8 33 AM SIE Figure 17 38 Logs Tab From Se Se Dinnovsys com Sent Fri 2 1 2013 6 14 AM To admin innovsys com DA Meee reports Binnovsys com Cc Subject APmax 9511 Internet Users REPORT FROM Friday February 01 2013 i Message Kol Internet Users csw 2 KB Please find your requested report attached to this email Figure 17 39 Example Report Email If a report email is not sent successfully follow these steps to find more information about the problem using Event Viewer Document 715025 265 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer a Open Event Viewer on the PC or server where the APmax Central Reporting Service is running To open Event Viewer in Windows 7 click the Start bu
105. Announcement Description field that will help identify the announce ment within the APmax UI Choose in the Type selection box the component to be added either Phrase or Information Press the Add button An Add Phrase window will be displayed The fields in the window will depend on the type of component that is being added For more information on add ing phrases see Section 14 1 4 1 and for more information on adding information compo nents see Section 14 1 4 3 Fill out the fields in the Add Phrase window and press the nsert button to add the compo nent to the announcement Document 715025 205 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager 6 Repeat the three previous steps until all of the desired components have been added to the new announcement Unwanted components can be deleted by selecting the component in the Announcement Text section and pressing the Delete button 7 Press the Test button and listen to the announcement to verify the components of the announcement are playing correctly See Section 14 1 5 Testing Announcements for more information When finished close the Test Announcement window 8 When the announcement is satisfactory press the OK button in the Add Announcement window A prompt to close the window and save the announcement will be displayed see Figure 14 4 Save Announcement 7 Close window and save changes to announcement
106. Announcements Defaults E 6 Tis Configuration Defaults To es E VLAN partitioning AO Oi Voicemail Defaults Sy OO a0 AnnouncementLibrary EAR RemotelIp Se OIA 0 Calling Name License Information Dege Tag Firmware 1 4 1 0 Firewall 4 1 4 0 Announcement Service Interface e CS1500 Announcements A ail eo Calling Name co Bree ee ay EE NOtLIy Hare Ke OCM i ge pms la On Demand Conferencing Plus 4 2 7 0 Web Portal 4 1 47 0 Base Package Araso An Telephony 4 2 82 0 TriggerRouter ESE E Document 715025 305 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 24 Daily Log Analysis Tool ACD ees or alla Universal Call Manager 4 2 4 0 TCM Spek NOOO Log Analysis Tg AO Voicemail EE AudioSubsystem Ais RG IE 0 dE AEN End of Log Analyzer HHtHHFEEEEEE HEHE EE HHH EH HF 24 1 3 Log Analysis File Content Information All of the log analysis information is divided into subsections containing information for the specified unit both CPU 1 and CPU 2 for the previous day These values are defined as follows Table 24 1 Log Analysis File Definitions Log Analyzer Log Analyzer The date the log file was generated Month Day Year Weekday Heading Date System ID The APmax system ID number The APmax serial number The APmax unit number Date Range Pro The date for which the log file was created Yesterday and the date cessed Month Day Year Error Log Statistics Total Error Log The number of
107. C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management 26 1 1 10 Deleting Subscriber Services To delete an advanced service from a billing service address or service group select the service in the Subscribers list of the Subscriber Management interface and press the Delete button at the bottom of the list A delete confirmation prompt see Figure 26 30 will be displayed Select Yes in the prompt to complete the deletion 4re you sure you wish to delete this service Figure 26 30 Delete Service Prompt 26 1 2 General Info The General Info tab see Figure 26 31 1s displayed when the Subscriber Management interface is initially opened Itis used to manage a variety of subscriber settings that are associated with the subscriber s billing service addresses and service groups To view and edit the contents of the General Info tab expand the subscriber s icon ss in the Subscribers list on the left hand side of the Subscriber Management interface and then select a billing service address or service group e as illustrated in Figure 26 31 g subscriber Management Subscribers General Info l Address Info Internet Phone Number 605555100 Find Biling Account Number 1 103988534 7123 E J 1 103988534 7123 Biling Service Address 1000 Innovative Dr oe Jim Jones Fleet Default Phone Number 605 555 1010 i IRC Sllstsesplt DA VK ACD Call pane Time Zone US Central ZS Call Logging
108. Configuration Figure 9 1 Trunk Configuration Menu Command Document 715025 133 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration Trunk Configuration APmax Mitchell Trunk Groups Trunk Group Settings General Settings Trunk Members Trunk Group Signaling Type Trunk Group Name OCS VM Direction S Far end Settings Far end Name kel B Advanced Settings Guard Time ye Pick Order High Glare Control Hop Counter Don t Decrement zc Confusion Message Don t Send wi Continuity Hate Evy ei B Continuity Tones In Receive Tone 1780 sel In Transmit Tone 2010 Out Recetve Tone 2070 Out Transmit Tone 1780 ALT Hone Figure 9 2 Trunk Configuration Window The Trunk Configuration window is partitioned into two sections Trunk Groups and Trunk Group Settings The Trunk Groups section is on the left hand side of the window and contains a list of the currently defined trunk groups along with buttons for adding and deleting trunk groups The Trunk Group Settings section see Section 9 1 is on the right hand side of the window and is used to manage the settings and trunk members of the trunk group currently selected in the Trunk Groups section The following sections provide instructions for creating and configuring trunk groups based on the following signaling types MF ISUP SIP MGCP Generic and PRI e Section 9 2 MF Trunk Groups
109. Dial By Name Digits 546 Notify Plus System Name 9511 i On Demand Conferencing GIS E Originating Call Management Wa SIPACS gt Terminating Call Management gt Universal Call Management amp Voice Mail Last Update Time 72011 5 22 09 PM UTC F 1501 Main Ave 605 555 1110 Placement Type TASS Longitude oO Latitude oO Last Updated By administrator clear Clear ead Add Pad Delete e GIS Figure 26 31 General Info Tab The subscriber settings found in the General Info tab are described below Name A non unique name or description of this subscriber or service group This field defaults to the name entered when the sub scriber or service group was added Editing this name for a subscriber record will change it for all billing service addresses defined for the subscriber Document 715025 333 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Billing Account Number Billing Service Address Default Phone Number Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management The account number used by the billing system for this sub scriber This field is not constrained to be unique and therefore multiple subscribers may have the same billing account num ber Editing the value for this field will change it for all billing service addresses and service groups defined for this sub scriber This field is typically a postal address but may be another loca tion The
110. EN e bel Systern Surveillance t Command Line epes s Diagnostics File Wiewer FTP Transfer Service Package Management Reboot Utility Report Viewer System Maintenance Menu NOTE The name of the APmax system for which maintenance is being performed will be displayed in the caption of any window that is opened using the System Maintenance command If the system name that is displayed in the caption is not the system you want to configure then close the window and right click on the icon of the system you want to configure Document 715025 192 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 13 Hardware Maintenance Chapter 13 Hardware Maintenance APmax system hardware may periodically require maintenance The procedures in this chapter provide step by step instructions for performing the following maintenance functions e Cleaning Air Vents Section 13 1 e Fan Replacement Section 13 2 13 1 Cleaning Air Vents The APmax system contains eight four per unit air vents The following instructions describe how to properly clean these air vents Complete this process once every six months or when other central office equipment has a similar maintenance procedure performed 13 1 1 Remove Vent Cover Remove the vent cover using needle nose pliers or a similar instrument Simply grab part of the vent cover and pull see Figure 13 1 Docume
111. ElementsByTagName s 8 if d getElementByIdfidi return js d createElement s js id id js src connect facebook net en_Us sdk js fjs parentNode insertBetoretjs fjs t document script tacebook jssdk j script gt You can also configure the SDK with advanced settings Tell us about your website site URL ipty innovsys com Next Figure 11 21 Setup the Facebook SDK Select the appld value and copy it Do not close the web browser Go to the Internet Access Settings interface Web Portal tab HTML tab Figure 11 7 and paste the appld value into the Login Provider Key cell next to Facebook Close the Inter net Access Settings interface to save the key value 8 Go back to the web browser and enter the Site URL where the web page will be hosted e g iptv innovsys com and press the Next button Document 715025 176 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings 11 3 Password Management The Password Management tab Figure 11 22 is used to enforce system wide restrictions on passwords used by Internet Access enabled subscribers to login to Web Portal Service interfaces we LH ACCESS SES EH iii BESSE Minimum Password Strength Weak Default Password 000 W Enable Lockout Maximum Failed Login Attempts Figure 11 22 Password Management Tab The Password Management tab contains the following properties
112. Figure 10 2 for an APmax system 1s accessed by right click ing on the system s icon 2 in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and then selecting the System Configuration SIP Registration command as illustrated in Figure 10 1 The name of the system for which you are configuring settings will be displayed at the top of the SIP Registration window Figure 10 2 OB Mitchell A3 System Configuration C ia System Maintenance Trunks System Time Manager System Surveillance Ethernet Configuration Internet Access Settings Serial Configuration vd Service Access Map CA SIP Registration 557 Configuration D SIP Registration 4Prmax 7020 Client Registration Settings SIP Registrations SIP Registration Info user 1 innovsys co fi A User user Registrar innovsys com sales innovsys com Port eil acrmir tmmapagermplbope corm supporb innovsys com Password 123abc user2 innovsys com Expires 86400 D User s innovs Ys COD USet DlppOsd ewe COD Ou Liter Comino corn EI Delete Figure 10 2 SIP Registration Window Document 715025 155 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 10 SIP Registration The SIP Registration window is partitioned into two tabs Client and Server The Client tab is used to configure SIP registrations and is divided into Registration and Settings tabs T
113. Figure 22 3 Entering text into the Filter box of the setup screen is optional Any text in the Filter box must be found in a log row for that row to be displayed setup Realtime Log Filter LC Gei Figure 22 3 Setup Realtime Log Press the OK button to begin real time viewing A new tab similar to Figure 22 4 will be opened displaying in real time any matching log entries that are reported by the system Document 715025 295 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 22 Log Reader G ap_error dog Unit 1 x Ba Tail ap_error log Unit1 X S Analyze ap_error log Unit1 X Q Oct 27 16 15 25 mate_cpu watchd Process mcastbootd has stopped A Oct 27 16 15 26 mate_cpu alarmd Clearing Alarm mcastbootd Stopped Oct 27 16 15 26 mate_cpu alarmd Setting Alarm mcastbootd Stopped to Critical 1445950526 Oct 27 16 15 41 mate_cpu alarmd Clearing Alarm mcastbootd Stopped Oct 27 16 15 41 mate_cpu alarmd Setting Alarm mcastbootd Stopped to Major 1445980541 Oct 27 16 15 42 mate_cpu watchd Process mcastbootd has stopped Oct 27 16 15 42 mate_cpu alarmd Clearing Alarm mcastbootd Stopped Oct 27 16 15 42 mate_cpu alarmd Setting Alarm mcastbootd Stopped to Critical 1445980542 Oct 27 16 15 42 9511 unt Cpul weatherd Error OPERATION_FAILED reference 92 WYeatherCanada cpp has occurred create TCP tunnel Oct 27 16 15 57 mate_cpu alarmd Clearing Alarm mcastbootd Stopped
114. Figure 4 5 allows VRRP addresses to be specified for the WAN subnetwork Administration CPU network interface and Call Processing CPU network interface Ethernet Configuration APmax Mitchell Internet Administration 192 165 5 236 192 165 5 237 255 200 200 0 255 255 245 0 192 165 52 KG Call Processing 192 165 5 238 255 255 245 0 KG Figure 4 5 VRRP Settings The fields in the VRRP grid are described in the table below Click in each cell and enter the appropriate IP address Table 3 Ethernet VRRP Settings weng Administration Call Processing Address The VRRP address for the system s The VRRP address for The VRRP address for WAN interface It can be any valid the Administration CPU the Call Processing IP address in dotted notation i e network interface CPU network interface 192 168 5 236 Subnet The subnet mask for the WAN inter The subnet mask forthe The subnet mask for face The subnet mask is used to Administration CPU net the Call Processing determine what IP addresses are work interface CPU network interface on the same local network as this system interface The Subnet can be any valid subnet mask in dotted notation i e 255 255 255 0 Document 715025 69 Version 4 3 10 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration Table 3 Ethernet VRRP Settings weng Administration Call Processing Gateway The IP address of the
115. G 4 El TG Name MEI 1 D511 24 S TG 155 TS Name Barge In unit 1 pose 1 TG 156 TG Name Barge In Unit 2 Z D511 zZ Z D511 E TG 157 El TG Name Voice Mail Z D511 zZ D511 Z D511 zZ D511 Aux Shake Enable Disable Disable When Idle Figure 20 5 Trunks Tab Expanded View The following columns of information are given for each DS channel in the Trunks tab Unit The number of the APmax system unit on which this trunk group is located DS1 The DS port that is being monitored Channel The channel on the DS port that is being monitored CIC The Circuit ID Code CIC used to identify trunk members in an ISUP trunk group This field will be blank if this is an MF trunk group CICs are assigned during trunk configuration see Sec tion 9 3 ISUP Trunk Groups Document 715025 284 Version 4 3 10 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Admin State CP State Aux State 20 3 SIP Status Chapter 20 Digital Carrier Status The administrative state of the T1 channel may be Enabled or Disabled The Admin State of the channel can be toggled to the opposite of its current state by right clicking on the channel in the Trunks tab to invoke a popup menu as illustrated in Figure 14 5 and then selecting the Enable Disable menu command A trunk can also be set to be busy when idle by selecting the Disable When Idle menu command from the popup menu The Call Processing sta
116. Info Dependencies Contents GUID OcOFfd5 b5d3 4308 925t 40Fsd207 dbs Version 1 3 168 0 Description Base package containing software common to all Fma loads Figure 16 5 General Info Tab The package properties found in the General Info tab are described below Name A short descriptive name of the package GUID The unique package ID Version The version number of this package Description A paragraph describing the purpose of this package Document 715025 232 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 16 Package Management General Info Dependencies Contents Mame Version Operator Firmware 1 1 2 0 gt Figure 16 6 Dependencies Tab The Dependencies tab contains the following three columns of information for each pack age that is required for this package Name The name of a package that is required for the currently selected package Version The version number of the required package that is combined with the Operator to determine which version s of the required package are necessary for the selected package Operator The logical operator used to indicate if the version of the required package must be less than the selected package greater than the selected package et al General Info Dependencies li Contents dr Tables Files Licenses Announcements Addons Version Mame AEEVentProducers 4 0
117. Innovative Systems APmax User Manual APmax User Manual Release 4 3 DOCUMENT NUMBER 715025 Version 4 3 10 Innovative Systems Innovative Systems L L C Mitchell South Dakota APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Document History Document History Version Changes Release Date 4 3 01 DCR 1966 Initial Revision April 03 2013 4 3 02 DCR 2000 Log Reader updated for Save and Transfer Mode functions July 01 2013 Report Viewer updated with information about scheduled report success logs Updated Login instructions for Master APmax option Added Status Bar information and updated UI default preferences 4 3 03 DCR 2009 Report Viewer updated for Copy Results function User Prefer November 14 2013 ences updated for Reporting Server changes Alarm History added Test DSP Access added Basic Conferencing allows 7 digit access numbers Patch and Utility packages added to pre staging User Access Rights and Quick Launch Bar updated 4 3 04 DCR 2038 Subscriber Management updated for Centrex Extension and February 18 2014 CASS certification changes 4 3 05 DCR 2050 FTP Transfer Service added Master APmax updated April 11 2014 4 3 06 DCR 2058 License Viewer allows alarm thresholds to be set Alarm notifi June 02 2014 cation e mails allowed 4 3 0 7 DCR 2066 Single Web Portal updated System Upgrade Manager added August 11 2014 4 3 08 DCR 54259 SSL Setup System Upgrade Manager updated Hardware Janu
118. InstallShield Wizard installs 4Prmax This may take several minutes Status Validating install Figure 2 17 Installation Progress Screen 6 When the installation of the new version of the APmax UI is complete the APmax UI Installation Complete screen see Figure 2 18 will be displayed Press the Finish button to close this screen and exit the installation program At the end of the installation you may be presented with a screen see Figure 2 19 prompting you to restart your PC for the APmax UI changes to take effect Make sure that you know the username and password to log back onto the PC after the restart and then either select Yes to restart now or remember to restart your PC later before starting the APmax UI application i APmax InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Completed The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed 4Pmax Click Finish to exit the wizard Figure 2 18 Installation Complete Screen Document 715025 22 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 2 Installing the APmax UI i APmax Installer Information changes made to 4Pmax to bake effect Click Yes to restart now or Mo if you plan to restart later i You must restart your system For the configuration Figure 2 19 Restart Prompt 2 3 APmax UI Update There are three ways the files of an existing APmax UI installation can be updated e Install an updated version of the APmax UI i
119. Installing Microsoft NET Framework 4 0 Installing Microsoft NET Framework 4 0 Cancel Figure 2 3 NET Framework Installing Screen Once the installation components are loaded a screen with the NET Framework license terms may be shown see Figure 2 4 depending on which version of the NET Frame work is currently installed Complete the instructions in the screen and press the nstall button to continue the installation Fe Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 Setup Miczeeoft Welcome to Setup net Fra mework Be sure to carefully read and understand all the rights and restrictions described in the license terms You must accept the license terms before you can install the software MICROSOFT SOFTWARE SUPPLEMENTAL LICENSE TERMS w Press the Page Down key to see more text I have read and ACCEPT the terms of the License Agreement IDO NOT ACCEPT the terms of the License Agreement Send information about my setup experiences to Microsoft Corporation Details regarding the data collection policy Download File Size 33 MB Download Time Estimate 1 hr 21 min 56 kbps amp min 512 kbps Figure 2 4 NET Framework License Terms Wait while the NET Framework is configured and installed in the appropriate locations on the computer The status of the configuration and installation will be illustrated by the Download and Install Progress screen Figure 2 5 Document 715025 15 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10
120. L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer i gt Subscriber Delete Detatch Create Or Preview Link Type Figure 17 24 Preview Popup Command Functions available in the Report Viewer screen Figure 17 23 are described in the following set ions e Section 17 2 1 Printing and Exporting Reports e Section 17 2 2 Copying Report Data to the Clipboard 17 2 1 Printing and Exporting Reports To export or print a report created using the APmax UI s Report Viewer first open the report in the Report Viewer and then press the Results button or use the Preview popup command to dis play the contents of the report see Figure 17 23 as described above in Section 17 2 At the bot tom of the report window Figure 17 23 there are three buttons The To CSV button the To Excel Z button and the Preview button These buttons function as follows e Press the Jo CSV button to save the contents of the report window as a comma separated value CSV file that can be imported and edited by most spreadsheet database and word processing applications When the button is pressed a standard Save As window will be displayed Enter the file name and press the Save button to create the CSV file The CSV file can now be manually opened by any program that supports viewing CSV files Note Exporting to a CSV file is the only option for saving the contents of reports that con tain
121. Launch APmax box in this screen Press the Finish button to close this screen and exit the installation program At the end of the installation you may be presented with a screen see Figure 2 13 prompting you to restart your PC for the APmax UI configuration to take effect Make sure that you know the username and password to log back onto the PC after the restart and then either select Yes to restart now or remember to restart your PC later before starting the APmax UI application i APmax InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Completed The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed 4Pmax Click Finish to exit the wizard L Launch 4Pmax Figure 2 12 APmax UI Installation Complete Screen Document 715025 19 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 2 Installing the APmax UI Ge APmax Installer Information You must restart your system For the configuration Jj changes made to 4Pmax to kake effect Click Yes to restart now or Mo if you plan to restart later Figure 2 13 Restart Prompt Once you are back at the Windows desktop continue to Chapter 3 Getting Started for instructions on using the APmax UI application 2 2 Upgrade Procedure This section contains step by step instructions for upgrading an existing installation of the APmax UI Instructions for new installations of the APmax UI can be found in Section 2 1 Installation Proc
122. MM HH 00 23 AM phrase will be played if HH is less than 12 and PM if HH is 12 or greater yyyymmddHHMM HH 00 23 AM and PM phrases will not be played Xxx where x is 0 9 Barometric Trend 0 2 Steady Rising Falling 14 1 6 Restoring Original Announcements There are two types of custom announcements new announcements that were not originally deployed with an announcement set see Section 14 1 1 announcements that came with an announcement set but were edited Section 14 1 2 Announcements A custom announcement can be reverted to its original state by selecting the Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 Adding Announcements and 218 Innovative Systems L L C Editing APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager announcement in the Announcements tab table and pressing the Original button located below the table The Original button will not be enabled if the selected announcement is not a custom announcement Restoring a custom announcement that was not originally part of an announcement set will delete the announcement from the system since there is no original version to restore Attempting to do this will result in the warning prompt shown in Figure 14 19 Pressing the Yes button in the prompt will complete the deletion Delete 3 Reverting this announcement will delete ik Do you wish to continue Figure 14 19 Delete Announcement Warning Resto
123. Minimum Password The minimum strength required for all new Internet Access Strength passwords Password strength is determined by number of characters type of characters uppercase letters lowercase letters numbers symbols and whether or not the password includes common words found in the internal dictionary The four levels of password strength are described below e Weak Any password that is not Medium Strong or Best e Medium Any password with 8 or more characters that has at least two different types of characters and does not directly match words in the internal dictionary e Strong Any password with 8 or more characters that has at least three different types of characters and does not match any variation of a word in the internal dictionary e Best Any password with 14 or more characters that has at least three different types of characters and does not match any variation of a word in the internal dictionary Default Password The default password 20 characters maximum that will be assigned to new Internet Access subscriber accounts Document 715025 177 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings Enable Lockout Check this box to lock individual Internet Access accounts if the specified Maximum Failed Login Attempts value has been reached for the account Subscribers with locked accounts will not be able to login to Web Portal until their ac
124. Options Package List Description Jane Jones Yoicemmail Greg Goldammer 605 555 1021 Voicemail 605 555 1021 Platinurn Gene vold 605 555 1022 voicemail 605 555 1022 Platinurn Ryan Tupper 605 555 1026 Voicemail 605 555 1026 Platinurn John Cersosina 605 555 1027 voicemail 605 555 1027 Flatinum Becky Weier 605 555 1026 voicemail 605 555 1028 Platinum Greg Goldammer 605 555 1054 TerminatingcallManagement 605 555 1054 Platinurn Count 21 x To Excel Preview Figure 17 21 Subscriber Report with Multiple Databases For information on managing reports that have already been created see the following sections Document 715025 256 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer 17 2 Viewing Reports There are two ways to open an existing report in Report Viewer If a report has opened previously from within the current APmax UI installation then it can be opened again by selecting it in the Recent drop down box at the top of the Report Viewer window see Figure 17 22 If the report is not available in the Recent drop down box then it can be accessed by pressing the Open button at the top of the window This will display a standard file selection window that will allow you to choose the RVF Report Viewer File file that you wish to view Once a report file 1s selected using one of these methods the white draw control page in the center of the Report Viewer win dow will be po
125. P Strip Off Digits Drouu Address sip proxy address Digit Length SIP Strip OFF Listen Fort 5060 a ad e Delete Figure 10 4 SIP Registration Settings The S P Settings section of the Settings tab contains the properties described below Proxy Address The SIP proxy address to be used by the system Keep Alive Timer The number of seconds between keep alive messages Listen Port The port the system uses to listen for SIP messages The default and recommended port number is 5060 Document 715025 157 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 10 SIP Registration The SIP Strip Off Digits section of the Settings tab is used to manage the list of leading digits that will be removed from called calling redirecting and original call party numbers For example if an entry is found in the SIP Strip Off Digits section for Digit Length of 12 and SIP Strip Off of 1 and a 12 digit number such as 16059956120 is received by the switch then the number will be changed to 6059956120 before being sent to a service To add a set of SIP strip off digits press the Add button located at the bottom of the SIP Strip Off Digits section An Add SIP Strip Off window similar to Figure 10 5 will be displayed Add SIP strip Off Cancel Figure 10 5 Add SIP Strip Off Enter into the Digit Length field the number of phone number digits that will be looked for when determining if lea
126. P Test 82 E Elation Messenger 81 Ethernet Configuration 63 Ethernet Configuration Wizard 73 Ethernet Switch Information 289 Ethernet Switch Port Statistics 290 External DSP Addresses 184 F Fan Replacement 195 File Viewer 72 76 191 Firewall rules 63 FTP Client Backup 228 FTP Transfer Service 225 G General Description 1 Generic Requirements 6 Getting Started 27 Hardware Installation Procedure 7 Parts List 3 Requirements 6 Specifications 4 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Hardware Installation 3 Installation Hardware 3 New Install 13 Software APmax UI 13 Upgrade 20 Installation Procedure 13 Internet Access Settings 161 Introduction 1 Is Toll Configuration 122 L License Viewer 311 Licensing 311 Linkset Configuration 105 Linkset Route Management 111 Log Reader 293 Login to the APmax UI 27 Master APmax Setup 53 Monitoring SS7 Links 299 N Network Configuration 63 Network Time Protocol 88 NTP 88 P Package Management 229 Auditing Packages 245 Deploying Packages 230 Properties 240 Package Properties 240 Password Management 177 Document Number 715025 Version 4 3 10 Index 344 Index Personal Computer 6 Phrase Management 219 Phrases 219 Adding 221 Preface 11 PRI Setup 100 Process Viewer 72 76 191 Q Quick Launch Bar 36 42 R Reboot Utility 72 76 191 Regions 46 Report Viewer 247 Scheduling 263 S Scheduling Reports
127. Press the OK button to add the new MGCP trunk group to the list of trunk groups on the left hand side of the Trunk Configuration window 7 Configure additional settings see Section 9 5 2 for the new MGCP trunk group 9 5 2 MGCP Trunk Group Settings This section contains information on configuring settings specific to MGCP trunk groups These settings are displayed in the General Settings tab of the Trunk Configuration window when an MGCP trunk group is selected in the list on the left hand side of the window Document 715025 149 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration The four settings at the top of the General Settings tab are common to all types of trunk groups and are described in Section 9 1 There is one setting specific to MGCP trunk groups Destination Address If this setting is not visible in the General Settings tab click the tree symbol next to the MGCP Settings legend in the General Settings tab The Dest Address setting will be dis played as illustrated in Figure 9 19 B MGCP Settings Dest Address mgcp proxy cor Figure 9 19 MGCP Trunk Group General Settings The Dest Address field is used to specify the MGCP destination server address either an IP address or a host name optionally followed by a port number e g 192 168 1 5 2020 9 6 Generic Trunk Groups 9 6 1 Adding a Generic Trunk Group To add a Generic trunk group follow these
128. Receive Haul Mode is set to Long this setting will be used to indicate the dB of attenuation on long haul signals that can be tolerated i e amplified This setting is ignored if Receive Haul Mode is set to Short or Monitor The available range is from 32 to 0 Specify the impedance to use in ohms Options include 100 110 or 120 The selected value should be 100 for T1s When the DS3 tree item is selected in the left hand pane of the Digital Carrier Setup tab see Fig ure 7 4 the DS3 settings for a unit will be displayed in the right hand pane These settings are described below Figure 7 4 Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 98 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 7 Digital Carrier Configuration Digital Carrier Configuration APmax Mitchell Digital Carrier Setup PRI Setup Digital Signal Carriers Settings for 053 on Unit 1 DS3 Status D53 Framing El Advanced DS2 1 Framing Olla LI GN Ba adi fe EI Du CL lt DS2 2 Framing m ro lt DS2 3 Framing a FA D53 SS 053 1 DS2 4 Framing e 053 2 nd 053 3 D52 5 Framing nd D534 DS2 6 Framing Gg 053 5 SS 053 6 DS2 Framing SS 053 7 SS 053 8 SS 053 9 SS 053 10 SS 053 11 a Si lt Ga a Pha FA ii am ro lt Figure 7 4 DS3 Settings The DS3 Status and DS3 Framing settings below are displayed by default Click the tree sym bol next to the Advanced label to
129. Sent 2 305 746 Multicast Frames Received D Broadcast Frames Sent 14 600 748 Broadcast Frames Received 2 041 Figure 21 3 Statistics Tab The Advanced Statistics tab see Figure 21 4 in the Ethernet Switch Information interface con tains a list of advanced statistics for the selected Ethernet switch port Name Fragments Bytes Received Bad Frames Bad Frames Received 64 Byte Frames 10 376 911 65 127 Byte Frames 21 251 474 128 255 Byte Frames 3 910 129 256 511 Byte Frames 431 734 512 1023 Byte Frames 63 915 1024 Max Byte Frames 293 044 Flow Control Frames Sent 1 Flow Control Frames Received 0 Drop Events D Undersized Frames oO Oversized Frames 0 Jabber Frames Oo Bad CRC Errors oO Collisions oO Late Collisions 0 Excessive Collision Errors oO MAC Transmit Errors U D D MAC Receiver Errors Unrecognized Mac Ctl Received Figure 21 4 Advanced Statistics Tab Document 715025 291 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 21 Ethernet Switch Information Document 715025 292 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 22 Log Reader Chapter 22 Log Reader 22 1 Viewing System Logs The Log Reader tool allows system administrators to view the logs generated by the APmax sys tem To access the Log Reader interface right click on the system s icon B in the Com mand Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the
130. Service sub scribers see the Web Portal Service Description for more information on integrated subscribers WARNING This setting is Disabled by default because it is extremely resource intensive Also after enabling this service it may be neces sary to clear the browser cache before real time call logging will func tion properly 11 2 1 1 Adding a Portal NOTE APmax Release 4 2 or greater is required for additional portals to be configured Earlier APmax releases will be limited to the default Portal entry Press the Add button to display the Portal Configuration window Figure 11 4 Document 715025 164 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings PortalContigForrm Portal Name Innovativesystems Top Banner PHG New Fortal HTML Edit x CEE Figure 11 4 Portal Configuration Add The settings in the Portal Configuration window are described below Complete these settings and press the OK button to add the portal Portal Name Used in conjunction with the External Address to access the login page of the web portal Users access the login page by navigating to http lt External Address gt lt Portal Name gt where lt External Address gt is the IP address or domain name defined in the General tab see Section 11 1 and lt Portal Name gt is the value of this field Top Banner PNG Web Portal Service interfaces that
131. Start for Website screen Figure 11 19 Add a New App 60006 Android Facebook Canvas Website Figure 11 18 Add a New App Skip and Create App ID Quick Start for Website Streaming TV Create New Facebook App ID Figure 11 19 Enter Project Description Document 715025 174 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings 4 Enter a description in the Quick Start for Website screen Figure 11 19 and press the Create New Facebook App ID button The Create a New App ID screen Figure 11 20 will be shown Create a New App ID Create StreamingT App Category Choose a Category e By proceeding you agree to the Facebook Platform Policies Cancel Weu Figure 11 20 Create a New App ID 5 Choose a Category and press the Create App ID button A screen similar to Figure 11 21 will be displayed Document 715025 175 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings Setup the Facebook SDK for JavaScript The following snippet of code will give the basic version of the SDK where the options are set to their most common defaults You should insert it directly after the opening lt body gt tag on each page you want to load it escript Window fbasyncInit function 4 FB init appId gt 1638948396317159 xfbml true version a H I EEN ch var js fjs d get
132. Subscriber icons would be required To facilitate this right click on the Subscriber icon to invoke a popup menu and select the Create Or command as illustrated in Figure 17 13 H3 Subscnber WW Delete Detatch Preview Link to Item Link Type Figure 17 13 Create Or Command Document 715025 252 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer When the Create Or command is selected a second Subscriber icon will be added to the draw control with a logical OR link between the first and second Subscriber icons see Figure 17 14 The report will now consider Subscriber database records that match the criteria specified for either Subscriber icon Clicking on the second Subscriber icon will display a Criteria tab see Figure 17 8 for that icon which allows additional Subscriber database criteria to be specified for the report Y Subscnber Default Phone Number Between 6059949999 AND 6059960000 A we Default Phone Number Between 6056099999 AND 6056170000 Figure 17 14 Additional Criteria To remove an icon that is connected with an OR link right click on the icon and select the Detach command from the popup menu as shown in Figure 17 15 Ba subscriber Default Phone Number Between 6059949999 AND 6059960000 D BT Gate Dhana biraka Between 6056099999 AND 6056110000 l Preview Figure 17 15 Detach Command Set the desired
133. System Surveillance Log Reader command as illustrated in Figure 22 1 The name of the system for which you are viewing logs will be displayed at the top of the Log Reader window Figure 22 2 Mitchell System Configuration System Maintenance Alarm Status Digital Carrier Status Ethernet Switch Information Log Reader 557 Status Figure 22 1 Log Reader Menu Command Transfer Mode High Speed ms Log Name ap_error log Unit1 X FD Tail ap_error log Unit 1 X Ea Analyze ap_error log Unit 1 X syslog Unit2 X Unit Number 1 Q Log AccountPayment Log Time Cpu Type Text Log ap Log ap_error ap_error log Gei Tue Oct 27 03 44 PM ap_error log 1 FO ap_error log 2 FO Sun Oct 25 12 46 PM Thu Oct 22 12 48 PM ap_error log 3 FD ap_error log 4 Gei ap_error log 5 FO Mon Oct 19 12 46 PM Fri Oct 16 12 46 PM Tue Oct 13 12 46 PM ap_error log 6 Gei Sat Oct 10 12 48 PM ap_error log 7 Gei Wed Oct 07 12 48 PM ap_error log 8 Gei Sun Oct 04 12 46 PM ap_error log 9 Gei Thu Oct 01 12 48 PM ap_error lo Gel ap_error lo ob Mon Sep 28 12 48 PM Fri Sep 25 12 48 PM ap_error lo ap_error lo ap_error lo bz Tue Sep 22 12 48 PM Sat Sep 19 12 48 PM Wed Sep 16 12 48 PM ap_error lo Su
134. US Facific US Pacific New U5 Samoa Figure 5 3 Selecting the Time Zone 3 From the drop down list select the time zone where the system is located The Time Zone Time will change to display the time according to the selected time zone 4 Press the Set Time button to set the time on the system to the time displayed in the Time Zone Time field A confirmation message see Figure 5 4 will be displayed when the time is successfully set Press the OK button to close the message sstem Time Manager The time on the AP has been set successfully Figure 5 4 Time Set Successfully Message This change will be immediately transferred to the selected system Document 715025 87 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 5 2 Network Time Protocol Chapter 5 System Time Manager Network Time Protocol NTP allows systems to periodically synchronize their system time with the clocks of computers time servers over the Internet These time servers maintain more accu rate time than the system hardware See http www ntp org for more information about NTP and public NTP servers To configure NTP for a system complete the following steps 1 Right click on the system s icon E in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Time Manager command as illustrated in Figure 5 5 The System Time Manager window Figure 5 6 will be displayed The name of the sys tem for wh
135. Window The DSP Echo Server selection box in the Test DSP Access window lists the address and unit number of each DSP on the selected APmax system See Section 4 1 1 2 DSP Settings for information on configuring DSP addresses on the APmax The Test Size Bytes field is used to set the size of the test packet Select a DSP set the test packet size and press the Test button to intiate the communication test The test results will be displayed in a Test Complete window Figure 4 26 Document 715025 82 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration Test Complete Ci Echo Service test to 172 23 12 115 completed in 0 003 seconds Figure 4 26 DSP Test Complete Document 715025 83 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration Document 715025 84 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 5 System Time Manager Chapter 5 System Time Manager The clock in an APmax system by itself is not extremely accurate There are two methods described in this chapter that may be used to ensure the system time is correct They are as fol lows e Manually Setting the System Time Section 5 1 The system time may be manually set to the current PC time using the interface accessed through the System Configuration System Time Manager menu command from the system p
136. a GTT entry is made in the Global Titles amp Translation Types tab and its map number is not pre defined in the Advanced tab then an entry for that map number with map key lengths of 3 6 10 and 0 will be automatically inserted into the Advanced tab SST Configuration APmax Mitchell General Linksets Combined Linksets Routing Global Tithe Translation Map Number Key Length 1 Key Length 2 Key Length 3 Key Length 4 EE EE EE 6 10 D 3 a 6 10 U 3 6 10 Fi Figure 8 18 GTT Advanced Tab To make a new entry in the Advanced tab press the Add button A new row with the default map key values will be added to the table Click in each cell of the new row and enter the desired map number from 0 to 19 and key lengths from 0 to 10 Now GTT entries may be made in the Global Titles amp Translation Types tab for the map number entered in the new row The global addresses of those GTT entries may contain the number of digits found in any of the four key lengths specified for the entered map number To delete an entry select the row and press the Delete button Document 715025 118 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration 8 6 AIN Settings The AJN tab in the SS7 Configuration window see Figure 8 19 contains the interfaces used to configure AIN Advanced Intelligent Network related settings on the selected APmax system The settings in the AJN tab a
137. a INTER CPU ID 3 Ta Video Head End ID 4 Ea Unit All Port Ext 3 TEE ITE Figure 4 17 VLAN Settings 4 To add a route to the selected VLAN press the Add button below the VLAN Routes sec ton The Add VLAN Route window see Figure 4 18 will be displayed The APmax Unit field is used to designate which units in the currently selected APmax system will be configured with the new route Populate the Route Address Subnet Mask and Gateway fields enter a short description of the route and press the OK button to complete the addi tion The new route will be shown in the VLAN Routes section of the VLAN Configura tion window Repeat this step to add additional VLAN routes Routes can also be deleted by selecting them in the VLAN Routes section and pressing the Delete button below the section Document 715025 78 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration Add VLAN Route APmax Unit Route Address Subnet Mask 255 255 255 Gateway 10 11 13 14 Description Figure 4 18 Add VLAN Route 5 To add a port to the selected VLAN click the dropdown arrow on the Add button that is located below the Defined VLANs section and then select the Add Port command from the dropdown menu as illustrated in Figure 4 19 The Add Port to VLAN window see Fig ure 4 20 will be displayed Add VLAN Add Port to VLAN APmax Unit GK Port et 3
138. ae a aE a ae Ae AE AE AE Ea ae aE AEE AEE EAE EE EEE aE aE Total error log entries 1604 Lota core tiles iO Total dsp core files 0O Total alarms U Total service restarts 0 Total unit restarts U Uptime 33days 14hours 52minutes 43seconds Ee Alas EE EE EE Current alarms KEE No alarms set EES No alarms set List of alarms generated Alarm Name Alarm Type Cpu Cleared Time none ee COGS Pi bee SS SS EE none SS Se Se eS ae Service REOSbALLS SSS Sse SS S334 SS aS none ts ni RECs i RE ae sk Disk Usage SSeS SS Sa SS SSS eg FileSystem Size Used Available UsedPercentage system G26 4 6G 4 2G 53 var 28G hoe 26G 55 vmfs 412G H 3G 383G 3 Se a a a ei eel tar SVS ECKL e SSS a Sea SSSeee Sele SSS Se SSeS Document 715025 304 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 24 Daily Log Analysis Tool No alarms set ID register 0x32 Measured voltages LAV 1206y 5V 4 99V DES Ss Ly Deo SECH Deo ke Dok GOre 1a 2V CPU Core s 3V FPGA core 1 53V Etm Switch Core EE Lee he 22V TeroV Ss OSV SRIO 125V Temperatures Supervisor internal temp 48C 118F DSPS O1600 temp O20 L25F Vreg Q1601 temp 50C 122F Clock generator OK Fan Obactus Fan 14997 O RPM Fam 229069 REM Fan 3 9623 RPM Fan 4 5672 RPM EE ASNES Packages 2netel led Sa Sases nese See ee Package Name Version FileSystemVersion Lag Oa LSTo 11 E re aes aC CS1500
139. agement UniversalCallManager voicemail H Weather announcements Select All Unselect All Specifies the services associater x account Figure 17 9 Criteria Tab Service List Menu Document 715025 251 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer 1 Subscriber Record Default Phone Number Like 605555 Dial By Name Digits Like 505555 Mame Te SE ti gt OK Cancel ime Zone Between 2 Oddress List Equal or Greater Than Address Type Equal or Less Than Equals Subscriber Address Grecter ahaa 3 Service List Less Than Service List UR x System ID ne SO ER ECH Figure 17 10 Criteria Tab Default Phone Number Menu Equal or Greater Than Equal or Less Than Gap GG Greater Than oo Lepm Value gt Less Than DUDU Within O OS AIM hich this mailbox will be deleted Figure 17 11 Criteria Tab Date Criteria Menu To remove the criteria specified for a field right click in the field to invoke a popup menu and select the Reset command as illustrated in Figure 17 12 ike 605555 Dial By Mame Digits Mame Figure 17 12 Reset Command for Criteria Some reports may require more than one of the same type of icon to specify all of the desired criteria For example if two ranges of Default Phone Number field values need to be specified then two
140. agement window 16 1 2 Deleting a Package WARNING Use this command with EXTREME CAUTION Do NOT delete the Base Package without Innovative Systems Technical Support supervision Deleting other packages may cause various services and features in the APmax system to no longer function To delete a package from an APmax system click on the package in the list of installed packages in the Package Management window see Figure 16 2 and press the Remove button located below the list A delete confirmation prompt will be displayed see Figure 16 16 Contirm Deletion 4re you sure vou want to remove the selected package From the Ap Mitchell Figure 16 16 Delete Confirmation Prompt Document 715025 239 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 16 Package Management Press the Yes button to complete the removal of the selected package and all of files contained in the package from the APmax system Files that are shared with other packages that are installed on the system will not be deleted Once the deletion is complete the following message box Fig ure 16 17 will be displayed Remove Successful EN Package successfully removed Figure 16 17 Package Removal Complete Press the OK button to close the message box The deleted package will no longer be displayed in the list of installed packages in the Package Management window 16 1 3 Package Properties The Package Properti
141. ail Voicemail UniversalCallManager TerminatingcallManagement Voicemail UniversalCallManager 605 555 1022 Platinurn 605 555 1050 Platinum 605 555 1021 605 555 1090 605 555 1090 605 555 1011 605 555 1011 605 555 1011 Platinum Platinurn Platinurn Platinum Platinurn Flatinum Current Page No 1 Total Page Mo 1 Zoom Factor 100 Figure 17 25 Report Viewer Print Preview The preview screen contains the standard print preview functions that allow the contents of the window to be printed exported or e mailed The File menu at the top of the screen provides access to these functions The File Export Document command illustrated in Figure 17 26 allows the report to be saved in a variety of document formats PDF HTML MHT RTF XLS XLSX CSV Text Image LO Previews View Background D Pages PIATA G Print p 2 Print H Print LI EEGEN AN PDF File HTML File 8 Exit WIHT File e TF File Ryan Tu i XLS File Gene Vo XLSX File John Ce CEM File TestSub Text File Bob Jon 605 5 Image File F Jonest 605 5 Figure 17 26 Export Document Menu The File Send E mail menu command illustrated in Figure 17 27 allows the report to be emailed as a document attachment Document 715025 259 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer LO Previews View Background GF Print ca Pri
142. an and discard Note If for some reason the wire does not want to pull free with reasonable force it will not cause any problems 1f it is left in place Simply cut off the old wire that is visible and leave the rest Document 715025 197 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 13 Hardware Maintenance L F move tape Leo Kee e Ae 2005 TI BURJ di ttt H am sr ech FRE aiiai Figure 13 5 d Use a long nose locking plier or other small plier to hold a locking nut while using a 1 Phillips screwdriver to remove the corresponding screw from the outside of the unit Repeat to remove remaining screws ELTTI d a EA Ch E ka Figure 13 6 Document 715025 198 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 13 Hardware Maintenance Figure 13 7 e Save and collect hardware from the fan so that you can reuse it with the new fan This includes the outside fan filter assembly These will be used with the new fans Note Once removed this would be a good time to blow out clean the fan filter f Replace single fan or desired number of fans Note It is highly recommended that when a unit is taken out of service in order to replace a faulty fan that all four fans be replaced in the unit If fans were also shipped for the mate unit they may be replaced at your convenience or when that unit
143. anagement Subscriber Management SE Press F1 For help Figure 26 4 Subscriber Management Tab The Subscriber Management interface 1s partitioned into the Subscribers section see Section 26 1 1 and three tabs General Info see Section 26 1 2 Address Info see Section 26 1 3 and Internet see Section 26 1 4 Each section is discussed below 26 1 1 Subscribers Section The Subscribers section Figure 26 5 is located on the left hand side of the Subscriber Manage ment interface The top portion of this section displays a list of the subscribers that have been retrieved using the Find button as described in Section 26 1 1 1 Gathering Subscriber Informa tion The Subscribers list has four tiers of subscriber related items The first tier indicated by icons represents subscriber names The second tier indicated by icons represents one or more bill ing service addresses associated with the subscriber The third tier contains a list of services and service groups vs that have been added to a billing service address The fourth tier is a list of ser vices that have been added to a service group Icons can be double clicked to hide or show the tiers below them Right clicking on any subscriber name billing service address service group or service icon will result in a popup menu with commands related to the selected icon These commands are described in Section 26 1 1 2 Subscribers List Commands Figure 26 5 ill
144. annel Stats cannot be scheduled at this time 1 A common database location must be configured in your APmax UI installation so that APmax backup databases are retrieved from a server other than the APmax system See Section 3 3 4 2 Advanced Settings for information on setting up the APmax Central Reporting Service Address 2 Open the Report Viewer tool if it is not already open 3 Press the Schedule button in the lower right hand corner of the Report Viewer window Figure 17 3 to display the Scheduled Reports window Figure 17 35 The Schedule button is only available if the APmax Central Reporting Service Address has been config ured as indicated in Step 1 Document 715025 263 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer Scheduled Reports j Repot Name Repot Schedule Schedule Report Name Internet Users AttachmentType csv Internet Users VoicemailReport Report Frequency Monthly Day Of Month 1 Email Addresses admin innovsys com reports innovsys com d m ES Figure 17 35 Scheduled Reports Window 4 The Report Name list on the left hand side of the Scheduled Reports window displays all of the reports that are configured for scheduled emails Press the Add button below the list to begin adding areport This will display a standard file selection window that will allow you to choose the RVF Report Viewer File file that you wish to use 5 A
145. anual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 3 4 User Preferences The APmax UI Preferences interface allows users to change options that affect the display and usage of the Command Center and also to configure the Central Reporting Server address To access the APmax UI Preferences interface right click on the APmax UI icon K to invoke a popup menu and select the User Preferences command as illustrated in Figure 3 18 The APmax UI Preferences window see Figure 3 19 will be displayed APmax Ul APmax System Definition eo Subscriber System Map Si User Administration User Preferences Figure 3 18 User Preferences Menu Command APmax UI Preferences Quick Launch Display Hide Subscriber Management Display gt Hide Subscriber Management Location 4 Docked Hosting Maximized Figure 3 19 APmax UI Preferences General Tab The APmax UI window 1s partitioned into three tabs General Advanced and Reporting Server The General tab is displayed by default when the window is opened The configuration settings available in each of these tabs are described in the following sections e Section 3 3 4 1 General Settings e Section 3 3 4 2 Advanced Settings e Section 3 3 4 3 Reporting Server Settings Document 715025 41 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 3 4 1 General Settings The General tab Figure
146. applies Consumer Name The name of the service or feature that utilizes this license Resource Name The name of the resource that is being licensed for the associ ated consumer Examples of resources are channels ports additional capabilities subscribers etc Expiration Date The date on which this license will no longer be in effect An Expiration Date of Never indicates the license will not expire Maximum The greatest number of the associated resource that is allowed by this license Document 715025 235 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 16 Package Management The Announcements tab is divided into three tabs Announcement Sets Announcements and Fragments These tabs are described below General Info Dependencies Contents Tables Files Licenses Announcements Addons Description 1 Yoicemail Figure 16 10 Annoucements Sets Tab The Announcements Sets tab Figure 16 10 contains a list of the sets of announcements found in the package The following properties of each announcement set are displayed in the list SetiD The unique ID of this set of announcements Description A short description of the type of announcements contained in this set General Info Dependencies Contents Tables Files Licenses Announcements Addons Announcement Sets GUID Version Annc Text Description dof ees7 Fad4 454c party you have di Defa
147. apter 11 Network Configuration Ethernet Configuration Section 4 1 VLAN Configuration Section 4 2 Phone Number Format Chapter 12 Serial Configuration Chapter 6 Service Configuration Section 8 7 SIP Registration Chapter 10 SS7 Configuration Chapter 8 System Time Manager Chapter 5 Trunks Digital Carrier Configuration Chapter 7 Trunk Configuration Chapter 9 System Maintenance Part 3 Announcement Manager Chapter 14 FTP Transfer Service Chapter 15 Package Management Chapter 16 Report Viewer Chapter 17 System Upgrade Manager Chapter 18 System Surveillance Part 4 Alarm Status Chapter 19 Digital Carrier Status Chapter 20 Ethernet Switch Information Chapter 21 Log Reader Chapter 22 SS7 Status Chapter 23 Document 715025 35 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started Services Icon This icon represents the licensing and system wide service data e g Voice Mail Administration of all APmax systems being administered by the APmax UI System specific service settings are found in the menus under the appropriate system icon E The menu options listed below are found under the Services icon in all installations of the APmax UI Additional menu options may be displayed as other services are installed on APmax systems The interfaces for additional services are not discussed in the APmax User Manual Documentation for each additio
148. art 1 Introduction to APmax 1 Chapter 1 Hardware Installation 00 3 1 1 General Information 3 Bn WW Ge E EE EE 3 Tl SPCCIIGAIONS EE ET 4 BE ae e ME ele 5 EE el Dien Le EE 6 1 1 5 System Requirements ug A fea voae kites Aerer ge Aere e 6 1 1 6 Network Configuration 6 Vets EES A r re tnd e de eR Ee eee Peed Sas Se eat 6 1 2 Proced re EEGEN 7 Chapter 2 Installing the APmax Ul a 13 2 1 Installation Procedure 13 2 2 Upgrade Procedure EEN 20 23 APmax UL Update EE 23 2o TAOMAN Ree EE 23 2 3 2 On Demand WM eier 25 Chapter 3 Getting Started 0 0 cee 27 3 1 Logging Into the APmax UI 27 3 2 User Administration 28 E WE ee ie tg E 29 En tute ER EE 30 3 2 9 Deleting a ER 30 3 2 4 User Access Rights Details 30 3 3 The Command Center 32 3 3 1 Command Center Overview 33 3 3 2 Command Center Items amp Commands 34 3 3 38 Menu Bar Commands cassera eran aa een eens 37 310 4 User PrEIEreN CES eet See tee ae din ae ee CEA Oh eR 4 SE ee EE HE din Te EE 42 3 39 42 Advanced SCHINOS tac deeds Be yu eee oe 8 ORs EEE eae 43 3 3 4 3 Reporting Server Settings 44 3 4 APmax System Administration 45 34 1 System EIDA ed ee dee 46 3 4 1 1 Adding a System Region 46 3 4 1 2 Editing a System Region Name 47 3 4 1 3 Deleting a System Region 47 3 4 1 4 System Regions in the Command Center 48 3 4 2 System Management 49 3 4 2 1 Adding E EE 49
149. ary 26 2015 Maintenance added 4 3 09 DCR 58970 Daily Log Analysis Tool added Fan Replacement procedure July 02 2015 added Web Portal settings updated 4 3 10 DCR 60382 FTP Client Backup added Log Reader updated October 27 2015 Acknowledgements Windows 7 Windows 8 and Excel are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation Silverlight is a tradermark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Intel and Intel Core are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U S and or other countries Google and Google Maps are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc Facebook is a registered trademark of Facebook Inc iPhone is a registered trademark of Apple Inc The following trademarks are owned by the United States Postal Service CASS CASS Certified United States Postal Service and ZIP Code 2013 2015 Innovative Systems L L C All rights reserved Printed in United States of America Information subject to change without notice Innovative Systems is a trademark of Innovative Systems L L C Document 715025 i Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Preface Preface Throughout this manual the term APmax will be used in reference to the Innovative Systems APmax product including one or more physical APmax units and systems The term APmax UI will be used in reference to the APmax User Interface software that is use
150. as deployed to the APmax system The list of announcements can be sorted by clicking on any of the column headings described above The functions of the Add Edit Copy and Original buttons located at the bottom of the Announcements tab are described in the following sections e Section 14 1 1 Adding Announcements e Section 14 1 2 Editing Announcements Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 204 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager e Section 14 1 3 Copying Announcements e Section 14 1 6 Restoring Original Announcements 14 1 1 Adding Announcements The Announcement Manager provides an interface for creating new announcements by concate nating phrases see Section 14 1 4 1 Phrase Components and information components see Section 14 1 4 3 Information Components New announcements can only be added to switch announcement sets Follow these steps to create an announcement l Select the switch announcement set row e g Std Class in the Announcements tab and press the Add button The Add Announcement window Figure 14 3 will be displayed Add Announcement General Announcement Informatian Announcement Description Your 4Pmax service is now on Announcement Text Parsed Announcement Information Phrase Inflection Language Voice k service is now on None english Female ae ee Figure 14 3 Add Announcement Window Enter text into the
151. at To add a new default subscriber address length to the system press the Add button in the Sub scriber Settings tab An entry form similar to Figure 12 6 will be displayed Enter a number of digits from 5 to 10 and press the OK button to complete the entry Add Subscriber Address Length Address Length EH ok Cancel Figure 12 6 Add Subscriber Address Length Document 715025 190 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Part 3 System Maintenance Overview Part 3 provides instructions for maintaining the APmax hardware and using the system mainte nance functions that are included in the APmax UI software The following chapters are found in System Maintenance e Chapter 13 Hardware Maintenance e Chapter 14 Announcement Manager e Chapter 15 FTP Transfer Service e Chapter 16 Package Management e Chapter 17 Report Viewer e Chapter 18 System Upgrade Manager WARNING The functions described below allow direct manipulation of the APmax through access to APmax commands and through access to files stored on the APmax s disk These func tions should not be used except under the direction of vendor technical support personnel Before using these functions you must completely understand what actions to perform and the conse quences of those actions Any mistakes made using these functions could have serious ramifica tions If there is an APmax UI function a
152. b see Fig ure 16 22 and Annoucements tab which is divided into three tabs see Figure 16 23 Figure 16 24 and Figure 16 25 The columns in all tabs may be sorted by clicking on the column headings The Files tab Figure 16 19 contains the following two columns of information for each file in the package Name The location and name of the file on the system Build The build number of the file on the system Files Dependencies Licenses Tables Announcements Name fap bin DistributionManagerd fap bin PrintHiwRey fap bin admin_proxyd fap binfalarrnd fap bin alarrns fap binfap_discoveryd fap binfarnd fap bin display_packet fap binfidocrmd fap bin flash_matecpu Figure 16 19 Files Tab The Dependencies tab Figure 16 20 contains the following three columns of information for each package that is required for this package GUID The unique ID of a package that is required for the currently selected package Document 715025 241 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 16 Package Management Version The version number of the required package that is combined with the Operator to determine which version s of the required package are necessary for the selected package Operator The logical operator used to indicate if the version of the required package must be less than the selected package greater than the selected package et al Files Dependencies Licens
153. be filled out before the new port can be saved The VRRP Address field in the Port IP Settings section is available only if the port is ADMIN Eth and is not required If the port is External Port 1 6 or Tag Outbound Packets is set to No then the fields in the Port IP Settings section will be disabled The Enable Port Down Alarm field will only be enabled for External Ports 1 and 3 6 Repeat this step to add additional VLAN ports Ports can also be deleted by selecting them in the Defined VLANs section and pressing the Delete button below the section Ze F IYLAN Configuration mag 9511 Defined VLANs Selected Item Settings Ze DEFAULT ID 1 General Port Settings Init All Port CPROC Eth APmax Unit nit All Port ADMIN EthO nit All Port Ext 1 Port Port DSP 1 nit All Port DSP 2 nit All Port DSP 3 Tag Outbound Packets Yes ff Unit All Port DSP 4 Se TIELINE ID 2 Port Description ADMIN Dh nit All Port DSF 1 Direction nit All Port DSP 2 nit All Port DSP 3 nit All Port DSP 4 Port IP Settings IP address Ze INTER CPU ID 3 Subnet Mask Ta Video Head End ID 4 Pas Gateway VRRP Address Sree ss Figure 4 21 VLAN Port Settings Document 715025 80 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration 4 3 Elation Messenger Configuration The Elation Messenger Configuration interface is used to set
154. ber used by the billing system for this sub Number scriber This field is read only and can only be edited when the subscriber record is selected See Section 26 1 2 Billing Service This field is typically a postal address but may be another loca Address tion The CASS button next to the Billing Service Address field is an optional feature that uses the CASS system to improve the accuracy of the billing address by verifying it with the United States Postal Service To certify an address follow these steps 1 Enter a postal address address city state and zip code into the Billing Service Address field Document 715025 328 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management 2 Press the CASS button If the entered address matches the certified address then nothing will happen If the entered address does not match the certified address then an Address Change window similar to Figure 26 24 will be displayed showing the originally entered address and the certified address Press Yes in the Address Change window if displayed to update the Billing Service Address field with the certified address Address Change E m The address returned during CASS certification is different than the WS listed address Would you like to update the address with the values returned during CASS certification Original 1000 Innovative Dr Mitchell 5D 57301 CASS
155. bs4 1FcoeFadadb External Address WIM managemny phone com apmaxinternetaccess Support Address want innovsys com company 4PSupport asp Support E Mail Address support innoysys com Leila Administrator E Mail Address admin managemyphone com Default From Address info imanagemnyphone com SMTP Server mail managemyphone com Figure 11 2 General Tab The General tab contains the following properties Service Provider ID External Address Service Provider Name Support Address Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 erated automatically by the system The IP address or domain name that someone on the Internet would use to access this service provider A description of the service provider Technical support URL that will be displayed in iPhone applica tions 162 The unique ID assigned to this service provider This ID is gen Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings Support E Mail Technical support e mail address that will be displayed in Address iPhone applications Administrator E Mail The e mail address that will receive administrative messages Address Multiple addresses separated by a semi colon may be entered into this field Default From Address The e mail address that will be displayed as the source for any SMTP Server e mail messages leaving the system The SMTP server address Thi
156. ce Addresses 327 26 1 1 6 Deleting Billing Service Addresses 329 26 1 1 7 Adding Service Groupe eet AEN NEE see NEE NEEN 330 26 1 1 8 Deleting Service Groupe 332 26 1 1 9 Adding Subscriber Services 0 eee 332 26 1 1 10 Deleting Subscriber Services 0 0 ccc ee 333 26 Le GeneralinC uviceuuscewss aceasta wens Re eae ee hete isan denne ks 333 20 is AOOISSS IMO EE 336 26 1 3 1 Adding Addresses EE 336 26 1 3 2 Deleting Addresses 337 26 1 4 Subscriber Internet Access Settings 338 26 1 4 1 Internet Access Setup 339 26 1 4 2 Web Portal Setup 1 eee eens 340 Document 715025 viii Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Part 1 Introduction to APmax General Description The APmax is a next generation IP Multimedia Subsystem IMS Application Server AS cre ated to provide advanced TDM and IP telephony features It acts as a Service Control Point SCP in the SS7 Network and meets North American Public Switching Telephone Network PSTN industry standards for operations and reliability This manual is intended to provide the general information needed to setup and operate the APmax New users of this product should review most of the contents of Part 1 Introduction to APmax Part provides instructions for installing the APmax hardware see Chapter Hardware Instal lation the APmax UI software Chapter 2 Installing the APmax UI and an
157. ce login page is accessible by navigating directly to the External Address or http lt External Address gt Portal Por talPage html This is the recommended option for allowing subscribers easy access to the Web Portal Service login page StreamingTV The StreamingTV Service web page is the default web page This option requires the following minimum package versions to be installed on the APmax system Web Portal 6 0 8 and StreamingTV 2 0 14 See the StreamingTV Service Description for more information 163 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings 11 2 1 Silverlight The Silverlight tab is used to configure the Call History setting described below Figure 11 3 and to manage the portals configured for this APmax system Each portal has its own branding and HTML Wa IS l Internet Access settings amp Priax 9511 ka a fee General Web Fortal Password Management SSL Setup Administrative Users External DSP Addresses Video Builder Configuration APmax Root Web Address Fortal Silverlight HTML Call History Disabled Portal Name Portal ManageMy Phone InnovativeSystems Edt Delete Figure 11 3 Web Portal Silverlight Tab The following setting is found at the top of the Silverlight tab Call History Set to Enabled to log call information for integrated Web Portal
158. ceived in the SS7 message that requires Global Title Translation The valid range is 1 254 Document 715025 116 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration Subsystem Number The value to place in the called party subsystem number field if Alter SSN is one of the actions specified in the Function Selec tor field The valid range is 0 254 Subsystem number 0 should not be used if the Function Selector is set to Final Translation amp Alter SSN Also subsystem number 1 is reserved and cannot be used in this field Map Number The Map Number is a number from 0 19 The value in this field corresponds to map numbers in the Global Title Table sec tion This map number indicates how the Global Address should be translated for SS7 messages containing this Transla tion Type value The value of this field is set by clicking in the Map Number cell and selecting a map number from the drop down list as illus trated in Figure 8 16 The values available in the drop down list are the map numbers that have been defined for GTT entries in the Global Title Table section Translation Type T able Translation Type Subsystem Number Map Number Expansion Route Figure 8 16 Selecting a Map Number Expansion Route The expansion 9 digit SS7 physical network address The SS7 message is forwarded to this SS7 address if no Global Address in the corresponding map entries in the Global Tit
159. cel Figure 10 8 Add SIP Server Realm Member Document 715025 159 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 10 SIP Registration 3 Enter the username typically a phone number into the User field 4 Enter the Password associated with the new member This field may be left blank but for security reasons a blank password is not recommended 5 Press the OK button to complete the addition of the realm member The username of the new member will be displayed in the Realm Members section along with the following columns of information Address IP address or domain of the device Port Port of the SIP device This value will be displayed if it is set to a value other than 5060 Expires When the device registration expires To delete a realm member select the member and press the Delete button below the Realm Mem bers section A delete confirmation prompt will be displayed Choose Yes to complete the dele tion Document 715025 160 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings APmax systems provide the ability for end user subscribers to control and configure enhanced services provided by Innovative Systems over the Internet This chapter describes how to config ure administrative Internet Access Settings e g service provider settings e mail server settings password r
160. cement Manager Menu Command The Announcement Manager window is partitioned into two tabs Announcements Figure 14 2 and Phrases Figure 14 21 The settings and functions in these tabs are described in the follow ing sections e Section 14 1 Announcements e Section 14 2 Phrase Management 14 1 Announcements The Announcements tab Figure 14 2 1s displayed by default when the Announcement Manager interface is accessed This tab contains a table of the announcement sets that are currently deployed to this APmax system On the left hand side of each announcement set row is a tree symbol that can be clicked to display or hide the announcements in the set For example in Figure 14 2 the Std Class announcement set is expanded to display all of the STD CLASS announcements on the system A vertical scrollbar will be displayed on the right hand side of the window if the announcement sets and announcements create a table longer than can be shown in the Announcement Manager window Document 715025 203 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager E Announcement Manager APmax Mitchell KEk Announcements Phrases Announcement Set Notify service announcements On Demand Conference Service BR dass 5 Er T T 1 2 3 4 5 6 Z 5 H Language Voice Version Announcement Usage Custom english Female CLASS announcement 1 False english F
161. ces Trunk groups are logical entities that provide an interface for telephone calls to be originated from or terminated to the APmax system Each trunk group 1s associated with a specific protocol that indicates the mechanism that is used to signal the control of calls on the trunk group Some of these protocols control circuit switched calls e g MF and ISUP protocols and some protocols control packet based VoIP calls e g SIP Circuit switched trunk groups also require associated physical hardware devices to carry the call audio In these cases the trunk group logically groups the hardware devices into members of the trunk group In the APmax system the hardware devices used to carry circuit switched audio are T1 channels To access the Trunk Configuration interface in the APmax UI right click on the system s icon 2 in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Config uration Trunks Trunk Configuration command as illustrated in Figure 9 1 The name of the system for which you are configuring ports will be displayed at the top of the Trunk Configura tion window Figure 9 2 Digital Carrier Configuration Ka Trunk Configuration A3 System Configuration je System Maintenance 3 System Time Manager System Surveillance t 12 Ethernet Configuration Za Internet Access Settings Serial Configuration Service Access Map H SIP Registration 957
162. count has been manually unlocked see Section 26 1 4 Subscriber Internet Access Settings or the Failed Login Lockout Time has been reached Uncheck this box to disable the lockout feature for this system This box is unchecked by default Maximum Failed Number of failed login attempts a user is allowed before the Login Attempts associated Internet Access account is locked for the specified Failed Login Lockout Time or until it is manually unlocked see Section 26 1 4 Subscriber Internet Access Settings Failed Login Lockout The time in minutes an account will remain locked once the Time min specified Maximum Failed Login Attempts value has been reached Max Account Inactiv The maximum number of days that may pass without the sub ity Time days scriber logging in before the account will be locked because of inactivity The account will remain locked until it is manually unlocked by a customer service representative See Section 26 1 4 Subscriber Internet Access Settings The default value is 0 which indicates this feature is disabled and no subscribers will be locked out because of inactivity Close the Internet Access Settings window to save any changes to the properties 11 4 SSL Setup Some data transfers between the APmax and other servers or applications may require Secure Sockets Layer SSL communications This mechanism will require that a certificate be pur chased and installed on the APmax system This ce
163. criteria for this report and continue to the next step 6 The draw control in the center of the Report Viewer window should now display all of the columns and criteria you have specified The criteria list will be attached to the Subscriber icon as illustrated in Figure 17 16 Mew Search Columns H ame Default Phone Number Serice List i Subscriber Default Phone Number Like 605555 Service List Include TerminatingCallM anagement UniversalCallM anager Voicemail Figure 17 16 Draw Control with Criteria Document 715025 253 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer To view the current contents of the report press the Results button in the lower right hand corner of the Report Viewer window A results screen similar to Figure 17 17 will be dis played The report will have columns for each database field that was checked in the Col umns tab For more information on the results screen see Section 17 2 Viewing Reports Close the results screen and save the report see Section 17 3 1 Saving Reports or make any other desired changes For information on including database fields from enhanced services in the report continue to the next step Hew Search Drag a column header here to group by that column Name Default Phone Number Service List Jane Jones 605 555 1011 UniversalCallManager Jane Jones 605 555 1007 voicemail Jim 605 555
164. ction Incoming k Far end Hame Foute 1 Ve Kl Weg Tee Figure 9 10 Enter ISUP Trunk Group Info The first four trunk group properties displayed in the Enter Trunk Group Info window are described in Section 9 1 2 Enter the new trunk group number in the Trunk Group field The trunk group number must be unique and if it is not an error will be shown 3 Select ISUP in the Signaling Type drop down menu The Far end Name field will appear at the bottom of the window 4 Enter the Trunk Group Name This field is optional Select the direction of call setup for this trunk group 6 From the pre defined list in the Far end Name drop down menu select the linkset or link set route this trunk group uses to connect to the network element normally a switch at the immediate far end of the trunks in the trunk group Since an ISUP trunk group can contain trunks that terminate at only one end point this field identifies that far end network ele ment If the linkset or route needed for this trunk group is not available in the drop down menu it can be added by pressing the l button to the right of the Far end Name field which will display the Add New Route window see Figure 9 11 Document 715025 140 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration Add New Route Far End Point Code 10 20 30 Route Description Route 1 ET Figure 9 11 Add New Route The Add N
165. d which will result in decreased startup times in the future Document 715025 43 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started Quick Launch The Quick Launch bar described in Section 3 3 2 Command Center Items amp Commands tracks the most frequently used interfaces in the APmax UI Pressing the Reset button in the Advanced tab of the APmax UI Preferences window will clear the contents of the Quick Launch bar and reset all of the interface counters to zero 3 3 4 3 Reporting Server Settings The Reporting Server tab Figure 3 22 in the APmax UI Preferences window contains the fol lowing functions APmax UI Preferences General Advanced Reporting Server Address APMAXSERVICES 7219 Version Install 1 0 11 WefQoEService 1 0 0 38 l Ok Canca Figure 3 22 APmax UI Preferences Reporting Server Tab Address Version Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 This optional field is used to set the address of a server that will be used as a common database repository for the APmax system This allows APmax Ul features such as Report Viewer see Chapter 17 to retrieve APmax data base records from a server other than the APmax system For more informa tion about this feature see the Central Reporting Server Service Description
166. d corner of the Trunk Configuration window Figure 9 2 An Enter Trunk Group Info window similar to Figure 9 5 will be displayed Enter Trunk Group Into Trunk Group 1 Trunk Group Name MF 1 aT Figure 9 5 Enter MF Trunk Group Info The four trunk group properties displayed in the Enter Trunk Group Info window are described in Section 9 1 2 Enter the new trunk group number in the Trunk Group field The trunk group number must be unique and if it is not an error will be shown Select MF in the Signaling Type drop down menu Enter the Trunk Group Name This field is optional Select the direction of call setup for this trunk group Se E Press the OK button to add the new MF trunk group to the list of trunk groups on the left hand side of the Trunk Configuration window Document 715025 136 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration 7 Configure additional settings see Section 9 2 2 and trunk members see Section 9 2 3 for the new MF trunk group 9 2 2 MF Trunk Group Settings This section contains information on configuring settings specific to MF trunk groups These set tings are displayed in the General Settings tab of the Trunk Configuration window when an MF trunk group is selected in the list on the left hand side of the window The four settings at the top of the General Settings tab are common to all types of trunk groups and are de
167. d indicates the type of parity checking used in the data transmission The valid values are listed in the drop down control Even Mark None Odd and Space The default value is no parity None Data Bits The Data Bits field specifies the number of bits that represent a single character transmitted over the serial link The valid val ues are listed in the drop down control 5 6 7 or 8 bits The default value is 8 data bits Document 715025 92 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 6 Serial Configuration Stop Bits The Stop Bits field specifies the number of stop bits used to indicate the end of a transmitted character The valid values are listed in the drop down control 0 1 or 2 bits The default value is 1 stop bit Baud Rate The Baud Rate specifies the signaling speed in bits per sec onds bps The valid values are listed in the drop down con trol 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps The default value is 9600bps Closing the Serial Port Configuration window will save any changes to the serial port settings To apply any changes to a serial port s settings to the APmax system without closing the window press the Save button in the Selected Serial Port Settings section of the window Document 715025 93 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 6 Serial Configuration Document 715025 94 Innovative Systems L L
168. d select the System Config uration Network Configuration VLAN Configuration command as illustrated in Figure 4 14 The VLAN Configuration window Figure 4 15 will be displayed The name of the system you are configuring will be displayed at the top of the VLAN Configuration window 3511 g System Configuration 8 Call Lagging Portal Settings System Maintenance S Calling Names System Surveillance a j DSF Configuration a FireBar P Internet Access Settings F Large Scale Conferencing Ethernet Configuration d Notification Center Management LAN Configuration Notify Configuration Serial Configuration a Service Access Map TE SIF Registration S 557 Configuration 557 Monitor Configuration mm Switch InterFace Configuration 3 System Time Manager Trunks Figure 4 14 VLAN Configuration Menu Command Document 715025 76 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration to VLAN Configuration APmax Mitchell Defined WYLAN Selected ltem Settings Te DEFAULT ID 1 e Unie Al Pore CPROCEWI VLAN Description DEFAULT Ea Unit All Port ADMIN E en Unit All Port Ext 1 Intemal VLAN ID 0 ExtemalVLANID 1 Ea Unit Al Port DSP 1 Ea Unit Al Pork DSF 2 Ea Unit Al Port DSF 3 Ea Unit Al Pork DSF 4 Te TIELINE ID 2 Ea Unit Al Port ADMIN E Ea Unit Al Port DSP 1 Ea Unit Al Pork DSF 2 Ea Un
169. d the APmax UI cannot calculate its strength The minimum strength required for new passwords Is configured on a per system basis in the Internet Access Set tings interface see Section 11 3 Password Management Password strength is determined by number of characters type of characters uppercase lowercase numbers symbols and whether or not the password includes common words found in the internal dictionary The four levels of password strength are described below e Weak Any password that is not Medium Strong or Best e Medium Any password with 8 or more characters that has at least two different types of characters and does not directly match words in the internal dictionary e Strong Any password with 8 or more characters that has at least three different types of characters and does not match any variation of a word in the internal dictionary e Best Any password with 14 or more characters that has at least three different types of characters and does not match any variation of a word in the internal dictionary Press the OK button in the Internet Access Settings window to save any changes to the account settings 26 1 4 2 Web Portal Setup Press the Web Portal button in the Internet tab of the Subscriber Management interface to view the Web Portal Configuration interface see Figure 26 42 for this subscriber The Web Portal Configuration interface provides shortcuts to the enhanced service settings that are re
170. d to administer the APmax systems See Part Introduction to APmax in this manual for more information on these terms The following sections describe the sources provided for Innovative Systems APmax product information in addition to the APmax User Manual Online Help The APmax UI software comes with extensive online help The online help can be accessed by pressing the F1 key when the focus is on any interface within the APmax UI software Screenshots The appearance of some of your APmax UI windows including common control windows e g Printer Setup Message Boxes File Selection may differ from the samples included in this man ual and the APmax online help due to software updates hardware updates and local PC differ ences in Windows or other third party software versions Innovative Systems Technical Support If you have a question or problem concerning APmax that is not answered in this document please contact our APmax Technical Support department using one of the following methods Phone Monday Friday 8 00 am 5 00 pm CST CDT 605 995 6120 After Hours Emergency Support 605 333 4609 Email support innovsys com Online Support _http www innovsys com innovsys apapmax support Mail APmax Support Innovative Systems L L C 1000 Innovative Drive Mitchell SD 57301 Document 715025 ii Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Table of Contents Table of Contents P
171. dd button located at the bottom of the Static Routes tab filling out the settings in the Add Static Route window see Figure 4 7 and pressing the OK button The settings in the Add Static Route window are described below Figure 4 7 Document 715025 70 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration Add Static Route Unit Interface Administration IF Address 192 168 5 240 Subnet 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 5 2 Description Screen Pop O ETE Cancel Figure 4 7 Add Static Route Table 4 Static Route Settings DSP 1 4 Unit Select which units on the currently selected APmax system will be configured with the new static route Interface Select the network interface from which the static route originates Options include Call Processing Administration All DSPs DSP 1 DSP 2 DSP 3 and DSP 4 IP Address The IP address of the static route The IP address must be in dotted notation i e 172 23 11 79 and must be in the subnet Subnet The subnet mask for the selected network interface The Subnet can be any valid subnet mask in dotted notation i e 255 255 248 0 Gateway The IP address of the gateway to be used by this static route The gateway is used when the system needs to send an IP message to a destination that is not on the local network The Gateway can be any valid IP address in dotted notation i e 172 23 8 1 and does not need to be in
172. de of the window all of the currently defined trunk members under the selected group will be shown in this tab see Figure 9 21 Figure 9 21 Generic Trunk Members The list in the Trunk Members tab shows the APmax Unit T1 and channel of each trunk To delete trunk members from a trunk group select the trunks you wish to remove in the list and press the Delete button at the bottom of the Trunk Members tab A delete confirmation prompt will be displayed see Figure 9 22 Press the Yes button in the prompt to complete the deletion Confirm Delete 4re you sure you want to delete the selected trunk member s Figure 9 22 Delete Confirmation Prompt New trunk members can be added to the selected trunk group by pressing the Add button at the bottom of the Trunk Members tab A window similar to Figure 9 23 will be displayed Document 715025 151 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration Select Trunk Member s to Add Available Trunks Channel 5 6 H 5 J E E 10 11 Figure 9 23 Add Generic Trunk Members The Select Trunk Member s to Add window contains two lists Available Trunks and Selected Trunks The Available Trunks list on the left side shows the T1 channels that are contained in DS1 DS3s that have been enabled within the Digital Carrier Configuration interface see Chapter 7 Digital Carrier Configuration but have not been assigned
173. ding Custom Phrases 221 14 2 2 Deleting Custom Phrases 223 Document 715025 Vi Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Table of Contents Chapter 15 FTP Transfer Service 0000000 00 225 15 1 FTP Transfer S 6viCe EE 225 Ee NR ChentU BackUp EE 228 Chapter 16 Package Management 229 16 1 Package Management Interface 229 16 1 1 Deploying a Package 1 cette nee 230 16 1 2 Deleting a Package 239 16 1 3 Package Properties 0 0 ccc ence eens 240 1 631321 AUGIIING aPaCkKaGe EE 245 Chapter 17 Report Viewer 000 0 00 eee 247 V A Creating a Report 02525244 heseuirilieasdihewddaddnared vapedwaeeawe 249 17 2 Viewing E rn CN 257 17 2 1 Printing and Exporting Reports 0 cece eens 258 17 2 2 Copying Report Data to the Clipboard 260 17 3 Report Management Operations 261 Re OR ele RODOS tn deen dee wees hho od Pals nw aie ete ae ee ce 261 ee ACNaMING REPOS EEN 262 17 3 3 Password Protecting Reports 262 17 34 DEICING REPOS mierea dates Leu ed eet Coes boas ee Rees 263 17 3 5 Scheduling Report Emails 0 0 0 es 263 Chapter 18 System Upgrade Manager 267 Part 4 System Surveillance 273 Chapter 19 Alarm Status l eee 275 19 1 Monitoring System Alarms 275 RER Nd n ee Le EE 277 Chapter 20 Digital Carrier Status 281 20 1 Monitoring DS Po
174. ding digits should be stripped off Enter the exact digits including if neces sary to be removed in the Strip Off field and then press the OK button to complete the addition To delete an entry from the S P Strip Off Digits list select the entry and press the Delete button Close the SIP Registration window to save any changes to the properties 10 3 SIP Server Management The Server tab see Figure 10 6 in the SIP Registration interface is used to manage SIP devices that can register locally with the APmax Calls made to and from these devices will be handled directly by the APmax EA SP Registration Pmax F020 L ps Server Realm Realm Members Realm Mame Address Pork Expires Customer Service Z 6055551010 6055551011 6055551012 6055551013 6055551014 6055551015 6055551016 6055551017 E Add KI Delete E Add Delete Figure 10 6 SIP Registration Server Management Document 715025 158 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 10 SIP Registration The Server tab is divided into two sections Realms and Realm Members The Realms section on the left hand side of the tab is used to create realms groups for SIP devices and assign a SIP trunk group to each realm Selecting a realm on the left hand side will display the devices in that realm in the Realm Members section on the right hand side of the tab Instructions for adding and deleting rea
175. display the DS2 1 to DS2 7 settings DS3 Status Select whether the DS3 should be Enabled or Disabled DS3 Framing Specify the framing format that should be used for the DS3 Options include Cbit and M13 DS2 1 Framing to Specify the framing for each of the DS2 1 to DS2 7 ports for the DS2 7 Framing DS3 Options include D2 and G747 When any of the DS3 1 to DS3 28 ports are selected in the left hand pane of the Digital Carrier Setup tab see Figure 7 5 the settings for the selected port will be displayed in the right hand pane These settings are described below Figure 7 5 Document 715025 99 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 7 Digital Carrier Configuration Digital Carrier Configuration APmax Mitchell Digital Carrier Setup PRI Setup Digital Signal Carriers Settings for 053 1 on Unit 1 O57 Statue Disabled k T1 Framing DA w e D5311 Figure 7 5 DS3 1 to DS3 28 Settings DS1 Status Select whether the port should be Enabled or Disabled T1 Framing Specify the T1 framing format that the switch should be using Options include D4 and ESF Extended Superframe Format ESF is less susceptible to false Yellow alarms caused by repet itive patterns in audio channels 7 2 PRI Setup Select the PRI Setup tab Figure 7 6 in the Digital Carrier Configuration window to view a list of PRI ports which have been configured for the APmax system Document 71502
176. displays a fan alarm 7 Install the new fan a With the Cofan fan label visible from the inside of the unit and with fan wires exit ing from either the right side or left side of the fan depending on which fan is being replaced see Figure 13 6 place the new fan so that the screw holes align with holes in enclosure b Next align the fan filter assembly on the outside of the enclosure and insert the 4 screws make sure the filter retainer 1s facing outward Secure the 4 nylon lock nuts to the screws Do not overtighten d Connect fan wires to board see Figure 13 8 e Loop fan wires and secure with cable tie single fan or two adjacent fans See Figure 13 8 and Figure 13 9 Document 715025 199 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 d ZEIT w WHE im E KL wi iE ZS Z ap 7 weer TLL La IA wu RT i WK wtf ven an ee Chapter 13 Hardware Maintenance Fan 1 Figure 13 8 N34Ou8 WO O3A0K34 SI MJAIS 138Y1 ANY 4I GIOA A UNN gg S2L2E00SNEH Ned J TOTIVSLS0 WddOG el Hda 3799 DE Y1IYS PHI adil BEEN TIOSOZZLYNH vugal AZT YuUQSt AS Q3LWA ND 04 USYUZUGUS SLINPSidg abeio TYESEST SHO 40193 Pas SC we W3ELd OM a9 aes Ai Tova wu UA W INT pm vm NAA AE wos ysbiyse yiy ann JHOWLIH Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 Figure 13 9 200 Innovative Systems L L C Fan 2 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 13
177. e 1 1 2 Specifications The specifications listed in Table 1 1 Specifications are per APmax unit Table 1 1 Specifications Physical Size width x depth x 1 75 H x 17 W x 14 25 D height wei ws ooo Physical Location Install in the Central Office CO Brackets available for mounting in 19 23 and 26 racks 1 U space above and below the APmax system is strongly rec ommended Environmental Operating Temperature Range 65 to 110 F 18 to 43 C Relative Humidity 10 90 non condensing Power Requirement Voltage 42 to 56 VDC Current 2 0A Recommended External Fuse 3 0A Front Panel LEDs Indicators Power Minor alarm Major alarm Critical alarm Document 715025 4 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 1 Hardware Installation Connections Power and Alarm Position Terminal Block Serial Ports Two 25 Pin Female D sub Connectors RS232 RS449 V 35 capable Ethernet Six RJ 45 Connectors TI One 37 Pin Female Connector Provid ing Eight DS 1 s Two BNC Connectors one Tx and one Rx Providing One DS 3 NOTE For power and alarms connections 18 AWG wire which meets UL 60950 1 requirements should be used Belden 8899 or equivalent For wire terminations ring or spade terminals such as AMP 34144 of AMP 320665 should be used WARNING The intra building port s of the equipment or subassembly is suitable for connec tion to intrab
178. e indicating an alarm will never be set for this license or a percentage of license usage from 5 to 100 The default Alarm Threshold value is None Edit Alarm Threshold ez Alarm Threshold OU Le wmd Cancel Figure 25 3 Edit Alarm Threshold 313 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 25 License Viewer Document 715025 314 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management Chapter 26 Subscriber Management 26 1 Subscriber Management Interface The Subscriber Management interface is used manage the advanced service subscribers for all APmax systems being administered by the APmax UI The term subscribers in this chapter refers to end users that are subscribed to advanced services e g APmax Voice Mail The terms user and subscriber are used interchangeably This section provides an overview and general information about managing users of APmax advanced services The Service Description documents associated with a specific service will provide more details on managing APmax subscribers for that particular service Subscribers will typically need to be inserted into the APmax system using the Subscriber Management interface before they can be subscribed to an advanced service The presentation of the Subscriber Management interface depends on the options selected in the User Preferences section of
179. e TET Figure 14 24 Adding a New Language Choose the voice of the new phrase in the Voice selection box The options in the Voice selection box will depend on the voices that have already been defined for the selected language If the desired voice is not available for the selected language it may be added by pressing the GC button next to Voice selection box which will display an Add window similar to Figure 14 25 Enter the new voice into the Add window and press the OK but ton to continue Voce male Bie 28 Figure 14 25 Adding a New Voice 4 Press the folder button next to the WAV File field to open a standard file selection win dow Use the file selection window to locate and select the wav audio file that will be used in the new phrase and press the Open button The path to the selected wav file will be displayed in the WAV File field Document 715025 222 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager 5 Enter into the Text field descriptive text that will help identify the phrase in the APmax UI This text would typically be the word s that will be spoken when the phrase is played in an announcement 6 If the phrase has an ending inflection then choose Ending in the Inflection selection box otherwise leave the value as None 7 Press the OK button The specified wav audio file will be transferred to the APmax and the new phrase will n
180. e should be decremented This action is only useful on incoming trunk groups and only when the APmax is an intermediate point not the final destination of a call That is if an incoming call is to be switched through the APmax to an outgoing trunk then the decrement hop count action is applicable Options include Decrement and Don t Decrement with Don t Decrement being the default value Document 715025 143 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Continuity Rate Guard Time Glare Control Confusion Message In Receive Tone Out Receive Tone Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration This field indicates the number of calls that should be allowed between continuity checks on outbound calls This field is only applicable to outgoing and 2 way trunk groups Options include None Every and different increment values from 5 to 100 Selecting None indicates that continuity is not to be performed on outbound calls Selecting Every indicates that continuity is to be performed on every outbound call The default value is Every This value specified in milliseconds is the time interval that an individual trunk must be idle before it can be selected for use on another call This field is only applicable to outgoing and 2 way trunk groups The default value is 768ms lf the direction of call setup for this trunk group is set to 2 way then this field is used to
181. e APmax UI is being used to manage an InnoStream Server See the InnoStream Server User Manual for more information e Service Provisioning See Part 5 Services e APmax UI See sub sections in Chapter 3 Getting Started e GIS This category is only applicable if the Innovative Systems GIS Geographic Informa tion System application is installed on the computer running the APmax UI software See the Innovative Systems GIS support documentation for more information These categories and the functions in each category are shown in a tree structure in the User Access Rights window Branch items in the tree items that have sub items are indicated by a symbol Clicking on this symbol alternately expands and contracts the sub item list Each APmax UI category and function in the tree will have one of the following graphic symbols indicating the user access status for that function e indicates the user does not have read or write access to the associated function Document 715025 31 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started e amp indicates the user has read only access to the function e S indicates the user has read and write access to the function Below the tree of functions are the Read and Write boxes Selecting a function and checking the Read box will enable read access to that function Similarily checking the Write box will enable write access to
182. e Client ID Application type Web application Accessed by web browsers over a network Service account 8 ogle APIs on behalf of your application instead of an end user Learn more Installed application Runs on a desktop computer or handheld device like Android or iPhone Authorized JavaScript origins annot contain a wildcard http example com or a path Lain A Wilde Authorized redirect URIs Jne URI per line Weeds to have a protocol no URL fragments and no relative paths a public IP Address https iptv innovsys com oauth2callback Create Client ID Cancel Figure 11 13 Enter Origin URL 8 Enter the origin URL into the Authorized JavaScript origins field of the Create Client ID screen and press the Create Client ID button 9 The Google API needs to be enabled If it is already enabled then go to Step 11 To locate the Google API click on the APIs amp auth category to expand it select the APIs option as illustrated in Figure 11 14 and find the Google API link Figure 11 14 shows the Google API link under the Social APIs section of the Popular APIs Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 171 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 10 Click the Google API link to show the Enable API button see Figure 11 15 and press ee 0 de Overview Permissions APls amp auth APls Credentials Consent screen Push Monitoring source Code Deploy amp Manage Co
183. e an independent configuration interface To access the Service Configuration interface right click on the system s icon 2 in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Configuration Service Configuration command as illustrated in Figure 8 28 The name of the system for which you are configuring service settings will be displayed at the top of the Service Configuration window Figure 8 29 Document 715025 128 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration Se T Et Stem Configuration ACD Configuration TE Systern Maintenance FL Announcements Call Lagging Portal Settings be Systern Surveillance i R E Calling Name b Diagnostic Settings Configuration DSF Configuration T FireBar a Internet Access Settings eq IPTV k Local Number Portability Network Configuration i Phone Number Format g serial Configuration ei service Access Map teen 7 Single Number i e SIF ACS i Figure 8 28 Service Configuration Menu Command The Service Configuration window Figure 8 33 is partitioned into tabs e g Default Trigger Screen List Edit that represent the APmax applications supported by this interface The Add and Delete buttons at the bottom of each tab will be disabled if the associated application is not installed on this APmax system The following
184. e existing account will be dis played when the OK button is pressed see Figure 26 11 Choosing Yes in the Merge Bill ing Account prompt will add the selected billing service address and all of its associated Document 715025 321 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management services as a new billing service address underneath the subscriber with the account number entered in the Move Billing Service Address window Figure 26 9 The pre existing bill ing addresses and services underneath the subscriber will not be replaced during the merge Merge Billing Account BS Would you like to merge with the specified Billing Account SS Figure 26 11 Merge Billing Account Prompt s If the entered account number does not exist a prompt to create a new billing account will be displayed see Figure 26 12 when the OK button is pressed Choosing Yes in the Create New Billing Account prompt Figure 26 12 will effectively change the Billing Account Number of the selected billing service address to the account number entered in the Move Billing Service Address window Figure 26 9 If the selected billing service address is the only address defined for the subscriber then the subscriber record will remain the same with the exception of having the newly entered Billing Account Number If the subscriber has multiple billing service addresses then the selected address will be remov
185. e linkset select up to eight channels from the Available Channels list and press the Add button in the middle of the window The selected channels will be moved to the Channels In the Linkset list To remove channels that have been assigned to the linkset during this Add Links session select the channels in the Channels In the Linkset list and press the Remove button in the middle of the window The selected channels will be moved to the bottom of the Available Channels list The SLC for each channel must be specified before exiting the Add Links window To specify an SLC for a channel click in the SLC cell as illustrated in Figure 8 8 and enter a number between 0 and 15 that is not already in use by channels assigned to this linkset Channels In the Linkset Figure 8 8 Changing the SLC for a Link The data rate for each channel can also be specified before exiting the Add Links window To specify the data rate for a channel click in the Data Rate cell as illustrated in Figure 8 9 and select either 56k or 64k in the drop down menu Channels In the Linkset 1 D51 1 5 Figure 8 9 Changing the Data Rate for a Link The SLC and data rate for channels cannot be changed once the OK button is pressed unless they are deleted and re added to the linkset Document 715025 109 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration A maximum of eight channels can exist in a single
186. e of the following forms 3 digit NPA 6 digit NPA NXX or 10 digit directory number After the number has been entered press the lt Enter gt key to accept the number This action will terminate the edit mode for the current number and the number will then be formatted and dis played In addition a new entry will be shown with the New Called Number prompt If you have additional numbers to enter simply type the next number at this prompt and press lt Enter gt to accept the number When you have finished entering new numbers simply press the lt Enter gt key without entering any numbers at the New Called Number prompt This behavior facilitates rapid data entry when multiple numbers need to be entered Called numbers D DUD d uv Called numbers Called numbers DT DUD d uv DT DUD d uv DUD DO40I vu a GUDD NN 271 DU HO NN B DUU wu vuwu SES 21 DD wu vu D D DAD vu D DUD OOD vun BUD DO0 vuuuu SENTIER Z HI duu NNN HU vu NNN DUD DO40I vu D DUD OOD vun D DUD OO wun D DUU vw BIS D NNN Di DD vu ANN El eu Called Number le 27 GUDDEN vu sg wanbe gt Figure 8 25 Entering a New Called Number Document 715025 123 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration Assigning Called Numbers to Called Areas Each Called Number should eventually be assigned to one and
187. e same point code Document 715025 111 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration Ki wl ssi Configuration Prax 9511 Routes Default Route set Disable Far End Point Code Linkset Description Lt Linkset 1 Route 1 1 8 1 Linkset 2 Route 3 LA Linkset 4 Route 4 L6 1 Linkset 3 Route 2 Figure 8 11 Routing Tab The Routes list in the Routing tab displays a list of far end point codes that have been defined and the linkset that will be used to reach each far end point code The APmax cannot send an SS7 message to a point code until that point code is added to this list and is assigned to a linkset If the specified linkset is part of a combined linkset then message routing to the point code can use either linkset in the combined linkset Routes can be added using the Add button see Section 8 4 2 or removed by selecting the route in the Routes list and pressing the Delete button 8 4 1 Default Routing The default route is used when no specific route is found for a given point code Using a default route allows multiple switches to use a linkset without requiring each switch s point code to be entered into the route table A default route can be designated by using the Default Route Linkset selection box see Figure 8 12 to choose the route and then pressing the Set button Pressing the Disable
188. ect Port 4 on each unit to the VoIP network NOTE The VoIP network must be physically separate from the OAM amp P network 8 Connect one T1 cable to the 37 pin connector on unit 1 Figure 1 5 DS1 Connector Reference Table 1 2 T1 Pin Out Table for 600632 Rev A when wiring to the APmax with T1 cable part number 600632 Rev A or if using T1 cable part number 600632 Rev AO or 600634 Rev AO then reference Table 1 3 T1 Pin Out Table for 600632 600634 Revs AO and Al Repeat connecting another T1 cable to unit 2 Con necting one T1 cable to each unit and configuring them appropriately will ensure redun dancy Figure 1 5 DS1 Connector Table 1 2 T1 Pin Out Table for 600632 Rev A DS1 SIGNAL NAME DSI 1 RECEIVE RING DS1 1 TRANSMIT RING DS1 1 RECEIVE TIP DS1 1 TRANSMIT TIP DS1 2 RECEIVE RING DS1 2 TRANSMIT RING DS1 2 RECEIVE TIP DS1 2 TRANSMIT TIP DS1 3 RECEIVE RING DS1 3 TRANSMIT RING DS1 3 RECEIVE TIP DS1 3 TRANSMIT TIP DS1 4 RECEIVE TIP Document 715025 9 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 1 Hardware Installation DS1 4 TRANSMIT TIP DS1 4 RECEIVE RING DS1 4 12 TRANSMIT RING DS1 5 RECEIVE RING DS1 5 TRANSMIT RING Dss 9 REDSLT RECHIVE TIP Dss s REDIBRN TRANSMIT TIP Dss 6 ORG BLK RECEIVE TIP Sp TRANSMIT TIP DS1 6 RECEIVE RING DS1 6 TRANSMIT RING DS1 7 RECEIVE RING DS1 7 TRANSMIT RING DS1 7 RECEIVE
189. ect either Complete or Custom and click the Next button to continue the installation 7 The next window will give you the option of reviewing or changing your installation set tings before the installation begins This is illustrated in Figure 2 10 Press the Install button to confirm the installation i APmax InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation Click Install to begin the installation IF vou want bo review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard i Cancel Figure 2 10 Ready to Install Screen 8 The installation will now copy the program files to the appropriate locations on the target computer The status of the installation will be illustrated by the progress bar displayed in Figure 2 11 Document 715025 18 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 2 Installing the APmax UI ig APmax InstallShield Wizard E led Installing 4Pmax The program features you selected are being installed Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard installs 4Prmax This may take several minutes Status Figure 2 11 Installation Progress Screen 9 Now that the APmax UI and NET Framework installations are complete the screen in Figure 2 12 will be displayed If you wish to automatically start the APmax UI after the installation procedure is completed check the
190. ected by the NTP synch master will be broadcasted to all units in the system This includes any changes made from the UI Please note if NTP is not utilized and a time synch alarm is not desired on the system then the NTP server on each unit may be set to DISABLED 3 Add or delete NTP servers from the list using the corresponding buttons To add an NTP server select any unit in the NTP Servers list and click the Add button An Add NTP Server window similar to Figure 5 7 will be displayed Document 715025 89 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 5 System Time Manager Add NTP Server Server Address time nist gov Unit f wmd weng l Cancel Figure 5 7 Add an NTP Server In the Server Address field enter a host name Oe time nist gov or an IP address e 192 43 244 18 of an NTP server select a unit on the APmax system and press the OK button System Time Manager will attempt to resolve the supplied address and a warning will appear 1f the resolution fails To exit the Add NTP Server window without entering a new server press the Cancel button To delete an NTP server select the time server address beneath its unit node in the NTP Configuration tab and press the Delete button located below the list of servers When setting up a multi unit system Unit 1 should be configured as an NTP server for each additional unit in the APmax system configuration The IP to specif
191. ed No longer attempts to generate an initial action list if the WirelessOTAAdmin_ V1 Version 1 0 0 4 Disable fields within the UI to prevent them from accidently being changed or data bemg erroneously bemg changed cancel Figure 2 20 Update s Available Choosing Cancel in the prompt will display a warning message Figure 2 21 prompting once again to update the APmax UI Install Update s It is Strongly advised you install these updates failure to install these ES updates may disrupt the ability to configure services on the APmax system Do you want to update now Sales Figure 2 21 Update Warning Agreeing to either of the above prompts will display a Downloading and Installing Updates prog ress window similar to Figure 2 22 The window will remain open until all updates are down loaded and installed and then it will close allowing the APmax UI to resume startup Document 715025 24 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 2 Installing the APmax UI Downloading and Installing Updates Assembly Name Current Status Completion Reportviewer Installing update ConferenceBilling Installing update SerialConfiguration Installing update DspConfig Installing update License Viewer Installing update SipRegistration Installing update InternetAccessSettings Installing update SubscriberManagement Downloading update 32 761 KB No
192. ed address 325 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management Address Change a ES 7 The address returned during CASS certification is different than the WS listed address Would you like to update the address with the values returned during CASS certification Original 1000 Innovative Dr Mitchell 5D 57301 CASS 1000 Innovative Dr Mitchell SD 57301 5516 Figure 26 19 Address Change for CASS Certification Service Select a default service e g Terminating Call Management Voice Mail to be configured for this subscriber This field is optional and may be left blank If a default service is selected then an additional service config uration window may be displayed when this subscriber is added The service description for the selected service will contain more information about any additional service configu ration needed for this subscriber Press the OK button in the Add New Subscriber window The new subscriber e will be displayed in the Subscribers list and will have a default billing service address of Location 1 as illus trated in Figure 26 20 The billing service address can be edited in the General Info tab see Sec tion 26 1 2 Advanced services may now be added to the subscriber see Section 26 1 1 9 j James Jones gt Location 1 Figure 26 20 New Subscriber Record 26 1 1 4 Deleting Subscribers To delete a subscriber select the subscrib
193. ed from the subscriber and will be displayed as a new subscriber record in the Subscribers list The new subscriber record will have the newly entered Billing Account Number but will retain the Name of the original subscriber record Create New Billing Account ES Would you like to create a new Billing Account using this Billing Account Humber SS Figure 26 12 Create New Billing Account Prompt Service Group Menu Commands Right clicking on a service group icon will display a popup menu as seen in Figure 26 13 Document 715025 322 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management Dei subscriber Management Subscribers Gener Phone Number 605555101 4 Find Ge Jane Jones 1 983756293 7123 John Jones 1 238394994 7342 Jack Jones 1 134532344 71 24 JonesCo 001 598234 2345 Jim Jones 1 103988534 71 23 F 1000 Innovative Dr 6055557010 hi 1501 Main Ave 6055551110 amp Voice Mail Bes BEM Tw M o Ve ove Service Groupe Jim Detach Service Group Figure 26 13 Service Group Right Click Menu The following commands are available in the service group popup menu e Move Service Group This command is used to reassign the service group to a different billing service address within the same subscriber account Selecting this command will display a Move Service Group window Figure 26 14 populated with a drop dow
194. ed to identify the new announcement and press the OK button The new announcement will now be listed in the switch announce ment set 14 1 4 Announcement Components Announcements are comprised of one or more of the following types of components Phrase Parameter Information and Built In These components are concatenated together to form the announcement Descriptions of each type of announcement component are given below e Section 14 1 4 1 Phrase Components e Section 14 1 4 2 Parameter Components e Section 14 1 4 3 Information Components Document 715025 209 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager e Section 14 1 4 4 Built In Components 14 1 4 1 Phrase Components Announcement phrase components are pre recorded audio clips that voice pre defined letters numbers words tones or silence each time the announcement is played These phrases may be simple one word phrases such as and or they may be multi word phrases such as the number you have dialed Some phrases are periods of silence which can be used to create pauses result ing in a more natural sounding announcement See Section 14 2 Phrase Management for information on creating new phrases An announcement with multiple phrase components is shown in Figure 14 11 Edit Announcement General Announcement Informatian Announcement Description Message_003 Announcemen
195. edure Upgrade APmax Ul 1 Locate the APmax Ul installation CD that contains the most current version of the APmax UI application 2 Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive The CD contains an Autorun file which will automatically invoke a prompt to upgrade the APmax UI see Figure 2 14 when the CD is inserted into the CD ROM drive To ensure that the Autorun file is activated you should be logged into Windows before you insert the CD APmax 2 This setup will perform an upgrade of APmaxs Do you want to continue Figure 2 14 APmax UI Upgrade Prompt If you already have the CD inserted in your CD ROM drive or the Autorun feature does not activate press the Start button in the lower left corner of the screen and select the Run command A dialog box will appear Enter the following path in the dialog box and click the OK button to begin loading the software onto the PC lt CD drive letter gt APmax setup exe Press the Yes button when you are ready to begin the upgrade process Document 715025 20 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 2 Installing the APmax UI 3 The APmax UI has been developed using Microsoft NET technology and therefore the NET Framework version 4 5 must be installed on the computer If the appropriate run time environment is not available on the computer then a prompt to install the correct NEI Framework will be displayed see Figure 2 1 If this pr
196. email Must Have Yoice Mail Figure 17 18 Draw Control with Two Databases Clicking on any icon in the draw control will display the fields for the associated database in the Columns and Criteria tabs allowing fields and filters for each database to be included or excluded in the report By default icons that are added to the draw control have a Must Have link relationship with the previously added icon see Figure 17 18 and Figure 17 19 A Must Have link indicates that records must satisfy the criteria specified for both icons before they will be included in the report This link relationship can be changed to May Have by right clicking on the first icon to invoke a popup menu and selecting the Link Type May Have command as illustrated in Figure 17 19 A May Have link indicates that records do not need to satisfy the criteria specified for the second icon to be included in the report T Subscriber WEE een 6059949999 AND B059 Detatch Create Or Must H Preview Link Type l Must Have K Voice Mail Figure 17 19 Link Type Command In the example shown in Figure 17 20 the Voice Mail Configuration icon S has been added to the draw control and criteria has been specified for each database The criteria for each database is listed under the name of the associated icon For example Mailbox Type Include Single Normal is listed under Voice Mail This indicates that only sub scribers who have a Single Nor
197. emale To reject the last calling party ver 5 eng False english Female To turn this service on off ver 9 fenglish False english Female Your calls will be Forwarded to ver 15 ten False english Female Please dial the telephone number to which False english Female The number you have dialed is not permmith False english Female We re sorry the number you have dialed i False english Female We re sorry the digits dialed are not a vali False english Female We re sorry You have dialed too Few digit False english Female We re sorry You have dialed too many dig False english Female Service is now off ver 11 Cenglish False english Female Service is now on ver 11 english False english Female To turn on this service you must add anu False Figure 14 2 Announcements Tab The following columns of information about each announcement will be displayed when a set row 1s expanded Number Language Voice Version Description Custom The announcement number This number is unique within this announce ment set The language e g English Spanish TTY that is used to voice the announcement The voice used in the announcement e g female female_2 The version number of the announcement Descriptive text used to help identify the announcement Is this a custom announcement True or False Custom announcements are announcements that have been added or edited after the announcement set w
198. ement will be displayed see Figure 14 7 Document 715025 207 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager Save Announcement k Close window and save changes to announcement Cancel Figure 14 7 Save Announcement Prompt 6 Press OK in the Save Announcement prompt to confirm the save 14 1 3 Copying Announcements Any announcement in a switch announcement set e g Std Class can be copied to create a new announcement based on the existing announcement Follow these steps to copy an announce ment 1 In the Announcements tab expand the switch announcement set row containing the announcement to be copied 2 Select the announcement to copy and press the Copy button A Copy Announcement win dow similar to Figure 14 8 will be displayed The contents of the selected announcement will be shown in the window Copy Announcement General Announcement Informatian Announcement Description Service is now on Based On Version Announcement Text P1 service is now on Silence 450 me SER eee nelle sl st ale sence 300 me tone 400 Hz 300 ms Selected Phrase Properties Phrase Inflection Language Voice k Please continue dial O For instructions or hang up None english Female Figure 14 8 Copy Announcement Window 3 Make any desired changes Options include e Change the text in the Announcement Description field This text is used to help iden
199. ent 715025 Version 4 3 10 The IP address for the Admin istration CPU network inter face In a multiunit system if Unit 1 s Administration Address is being used as the NTP server for the additional units then any changes to Unit 1 s Administration Address must also be reflected in the NTP server settings for those additional units See Chapter 5 2 Network Time Protocol for more information The subnet mask for the Administration CPU network interface The IP address of the gateway to be used by the Administra tion CPU network interface 67 internet Administration Call Processing The IP address for the Call Processing CPU network interface The subnet mask for the Call Processing CPU network interface The IP address of the gateway to be used by the Call Processing CPU network interface Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration 4 1 1 2 DSP Settings The DSP tab Figure 4 4 is used to view and edit network settings for the DSPs on each APmax unit The fields in the DSP tab are described in the table below Figure 4 4 Ethernet Configuration APmax Mitchell BHA DSP 1 172 235 1179 Zb Zb 2400 1 2 25 8 1 DSP 1 1 72 25 12 105 Zb Zb 290 1 2 25 8 1 DSP 2 172 25 11 60 Zb 200 2 48 0 172 235 6 1 DSP 2 1 2 25 12 106 Zb 200 2480 172 25 60 1 DSP 3 172 23 11 55 Zon Zb 290 172 23 81 DSF 3 172 23 12 1
200. er 9 Trunk Configu ration When the Trunks tab is first selected the APmax UI will look at the trunk groups that are defined for the current APmax system and begin to query the status of the DS channels in those trunk groups As the status of the channels in each trunk group is retrieved the trunk groups will be dis played as rows in the Trunks tab Figure 20 4 shows an example of what the Trunks tab may look like initially _ Digital Carrier Status APmax 7020 show MME DI Channel Status oe Ta Name Unit DS Channel Admin State CP State Aux State Ze Ta 4 El TG Name MEI 1 Dei EST Ta 155 Ta 156 Ta 157 Figure 20 4 Trunks Tab Collapsed View Document 715025 283 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 20 Digital Carrier Status On the left hand side of each trunk group TG row is a tree symbol that can be clicked to dis play the status of all DS channels in the trunk group Figure 20 5 shows what the Trunks tab might look like when a trunk group with several channels is displayed A vertical scrollbar will be displayed see the right hand side of the window in Figure 20 5 if the trunk groups and chan nels create a list longer than can be shown in the Digital Carrier Status window o Digital Carrier Status APmax 7020 Show MMB Dis os Trunks SIP Summary Channel Status TG KG Ta Name Unit DS Channel Admin State CP State El T
201. er Overview Document 715025 32 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started e Section 3 3 2 Command Center Items amp Commands e Section 3 3 3 Menu Bar Commands e Section 3 3 4 User Preferences 3 3 1 Command Center Overview The Command Center window is intended to provide a visual representation of the APmax UI and the systems it administers The Command Center window is automatically displayed when the APmax UL is started The following figure depicts an example of the APmax UI Command Cen ter window after APmax systems have been defined Initially the only icon in the Command Center window will be the APmax Ul icon See Section 3 4 2 1 Adding a System for more information on defining new systems Pa APmax File Window Help Region lt Default Region gt E Voice Mail Ve Administrati Services Command Center Region lt Default Region gt iPass UI Report Viewer Z Mitchell Woonsocket Ln z OCM Mt Vernon E Mitchell Configurati Alpena Zi Figure 3 8 APmax UI Command Center The Command Center window can be sized and positioned just like any other Windows display In addition the icons within the Command Center window can be independently positioned To move an icon in the Command Center 1 Move the mouse cursor onto the item to be moved 2 Press down and hold down the left hand mouse button 3 Drag the item to
202. er a string of numbers 1 to 7 digits in length that will be used in conjunction with the incoming point code to match incoming numbers with an NPA If this value is set to all zeros then the APmax will only use the point code to find an NPA for the incoming number Point Code Enter the point code of the switch that will be sending the trig ger to the APmax NPA Enter the 3 digit NPA that will be used to expand incoming 7 digit numbers that match the entered NXX XXXX and point code 8 6 2 Destination Addresses The Destination Address tab Figure 8 21 is used to manage the AIN destination addresses on the selected APmax system A destination address is the 10 digit Directory Number DN of the Intelligent Peripheral IP that is to be used when doing AIN play and collect operations The IP plays voice prompts and collects digits for menus in AIN applications and services Document 715025 120 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration SST Configuration APmax 9511 General Linksets IL Combined Linksets Routing Global Title Translation AIN Seven To Ten Mapping Destination Address lz Tell Destination Address NF M Point Code Destination Address Figure 8 21 Destination Address Tab To create a new destination address entry press the Add button in the Destination Address section An Add Destination Address window see Figure 8 22 will be d
203. er name ke in the list on the left hand side of the Sub scriber Management interface and press the Delete button located below the list A delete confir mation prompt will be displayed see Figure 26 21 Press the Yes button in the prompt to remove the subscriber and all addresses services and other settings associated with the subscriber Press the No button to cancel the deletion Document 715025 326 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management Delete 4re you sure you wish to delete this subscriber Figure 26 21 Delete Subscriber Prompt 26 1 1 5 Adding Billing Service Addresses Each subscriber on an APmax system has a default billing service address which is created when the subscriber is added to the system It is typically a postal address but it may be some other location If a subscriber has services at more than one location they may need additional billing service addresses To add a billing service address to a subscriber select the subscriber in the Subscribers list Fig ure 26 5 press the Add button located below the list and choose the Add New Billing Service Address menu command see Figure 26 22 A window similar to Figure 26 23 will be dis played a Add New Subscriber Add New Billing Service Address Name System Phone Number eege geg cass Service x Figure 26 23 Add New Billing Service Address Window Docume
204. er whose settings are being dis played and modified This setting can only be changed when a trunk group is being created Signaling Type The signaling type of the trunk group MF ISUP SIP Generic MGCP or PRI This setting can only be changed when a trunk group is being created Trunk Group Name An optional descriptive name for the trunk group Administra tors can use this name to help identify the use and or destina tion of this trunk group Direction This field indicates the direction of call setup for this trunk group Incoming Outgoing or 2 way Incoming trunk groups accept call origination from the switch at the far end of the trunks Outgoing trunks can originate calls to the switch at the far end of the trunk Trunk groups set to 2 way may accept and originate calls with the switch at the far end of the trunk Document 715025 135 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration See the following sections to configure additional settings and trunk members for specific trunk group signaling types e Section 9 2 MF Trunk Groups e Section 9 3 ISUP Trunk Groups e Section 9 4 SIP Trunk Groups e Section 9 5 MGCP Trunk Groups e Section 9 6 Generic Trunk Groups e Section 9 7 PRI Trunk Groups 9 2 MF Trunk Groups 9 2 1 Adding an MF Trunk Group To add an MF trunk group follow these steps 1 Press the Add button in the lower left han
205. eral SS7 Settings EE 105 8 2 Linkset Configuration 0 0 0 0 00 000 cee ene 105 E ele We ie E HEEN 107 6 272 Doe A LNK EE 107 8 2 3 Adding a Link to a LinksSet rocinas drus eo cee eens 108 8 2 4 Deleting a Link from a Linkset 110 8 3 Combined Linksets 110 8 4 Linkset Route Management 111 8 4 1 Default Ee d e EE 112 8 4 2 Adding a Route EE 113 Document 715025 iv Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Table of Contents 8 5 Global Title Translation 113 Bro FDEN E REH H WEE 114 8 5 2 Defining a Translation Type 116 8 5 3 GTT Advanced Settings 118 8 6 AIN Settings ee e Ee 119 8 6 1 Seven To Ten Mapping 0 cc eect nee 119 8 6 2 Destination Addresses 2 6 cette n eens 120 8 6 3 Toll Call Management 122 8 6 3 1 Called Numbers 1 ee eee ene eens 122 8 0 0 2 Called Areas EE EN aaa dee We 126 06 33 GallinG RV Mi le TEEN 127 8 7 Service Configuration 128 SEN RRE EIER Tigger EE 129 EE scsi bene cee Perea pane ew eu e Cae eee AA AE 130 8 3 Basic GONIErENGING 22232 hs3 4h4 o8 aes Eeer woolen Fok erte 131 Ee NEEN 132 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration 00 133 9 1 Trunk Group General Settings 135 9 2 MF Trunk Groups EE 136 9 2 1 Adding an MF Trunk Group 136 9 2 2 MF Trunk Group Settings 137 92 3 IME HUNK El e 137 9 3 ISUP Trunk Groups 140 9 3 1 Adding an ISUP Trunk Group 140 9 3 2 ISUP T
206. erface see Section 3 3 4 2 Initializing Command Center Master Mode OFF Status Bar The status bar is located along the bottom of the APmax UI window and provides information such as the initial ization status of add ons and the current Master Mode of the APmax which will display ON if a master APmax is being used see Section 3 4 3 Master APmax Management or OFF if a master APmax is not being used 3 3 3 Menu Bar Commands The menu bar Figure 3 9 at the top of the APmax UI window contains drop down menus which provide access to a variety of functions such as displaying help documentation managing user preferences or updating the user interface SC APmax File Window Hep Region isen v Command Center Region South Dakota Figure 3 9 APmax UI Menu Bar The commands found in the menu bar are described below mn Tran Som Save Current Saves settings in the selected win Window dow Typically settings in the APmax UI are saved when a win dow is closed This command allows settings to be saved without closing the window User Preferences Opens the APmax UI Preferences interface described in Section 3 3 4 Figure 3 10 File Menu Closes the APmax UI Document 715025 37 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started wes Tran rm Window Displays a list of windows that are open in the APmax UI Selecting a
207. ernet Access Settings interface Open the APmax System Administration interface Section 3 4 Select the Single Web Portal tab Use the Host System selection box to choose the Single Web Portal host ee Press the Send Data button This will send a message to all APmax systems in the APmax UI and set their Single Web Portal to the selected Host System When this step is complete a confirmation message similar to Figure 3 43 will be displayed Success System 9511 has successfully been set as the internet access master APmax Commencing service record update Figure 3 43 Internet Access Master Set 8 Press the OK button to close the confirmation message Figure 3 43 This will begin the process of sending all subscribers on all listed systems to the Single Web Portal host sys tem A progress window similar to Figure 3 44 will be displayed while the subscriber records are being transferred The Close button in the Service Record Updates window may be pressed at any time and if records are still be transferred then a prompt to continue transferring in the background will be displayed Document 715025 56 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started service Record Updates System Name System ID Service Record Status Finished Transfering Subscriber Records OO 21 of 1000 Sent 2 1 Complete Clase Figure 3 44 Service Record Update Status 3 5 Subscr
208. ersion 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration 57 Configuration APmax Mitchell General Linksets Combined Linksets Routing Global Title Translation AlN Linksets Combined Linksets Description Far End Point Code Link Count Combined Linkset b Linkset 3 1 2 1 0 Linkset 1 Linkset 2 Combined Linkset Lk set 4 Linkset 5 Figure 8 10 Combined Linksets Tab The list on the left hand side of the Combined Linksets tab displays all of the defined linksets cur rently not combined The list on the right hand side of the tab displays any existing combined linksets To create a combined linkset select two linksets from the list on the left and press the Combine button The selected linksets will be removed from the left hand list and will be displayed as a combined linkset in the right hand list To remove a combined linkset select the combined linkset from the list on the right and press the Uncombine button The linksets that were combined will be separated and moved to the list on the left hand side of the tab where they can be assigned to new combined linksets 8 4 Linkset Route Management If linksets are being used assigning point codes to linksets or combined linksets is necessary for the APmax system to determine the SS7 link to use when transmitting SS7 messages The Rout ing tab see Figure 8 11 1s used to assign point codes to linksets collections of SS7 data links that may use th
209. es Tables Announcements Version Operator Figure 16 20 Dependencies Tab The Licenses tab Figure 16 21 contains the following five columns of information for each license included in this package Consumer Name The name of the service or feature that utilizes this license Resource Name The name of the resource that is being licensed for the associ ated consumer Examples of resources are channels ports additional capabilities subscribers etc Scope The system unit s to which this license applies If the Scope is System Wide then the license applies to all units on the sys tem If the license is for a specific unit then the value will be Unit vi where x is the number of the unit to which the license applies Expiration Date The date on which this license will no longer be in effect An Expiration Date of Never indicates the license will not expire Maximum The greatest number of the associated resource that is allowed by this license Document 715025 242 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 16 Package Management Consumer Mame Resource Name Scope Expiration Date Maximum CONSUMER VOICEMAIL ele e E Figure 16 21 Licenses Tab The Tables tab Figure 16 22 contains the following two columns of information for each table included in this package Name A short descriptive name of the table Version The version number of the
210. es window see Figure 16 18 1s used to display the contents of a package that has already been deployed to the APmax system To view the contents of a package select the package from the list of installed packages in the Package Management window see Figure 16 2 and press the Properties button located below the list A Package Properties window con taining the details of the selected package will be displayed Gi Package Properties Sele Name GUID Versions Description Base package containing software common to all Fma loads Files Dependencies Licenses Tables Announcements Name fap bin DistributionManagerd fap bin GetTielinelp fap bin MateConfig fap bin PrintHiwRey fap bin ScheduleManagerd fap bin Tieline Transfer fap binfadmin_proxyd fap binfalarrnd fap binfalarrns fap binfap_discoveryd Figure 16 18 Package Properties Window Document 715025 240 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 16 Package Management The top portion of the Package Properties window contains the following fields Name A short descriptive name of the package GUID The unique package ID Version The version number of this package Description A paragraph describing the purpose of this package The bottom portion of the Package Properties window is partitioned into the Files tab see Figure 16 19 Dependencies tab see Figure 16 20 Licenses tab see Figure 16 21 Tables ta
211. estrictions for APmax systems End user subscriber access to enhanced services is provided by the web browser based Web Por tal Service Before they can manage enhanced services with the Web Portal Service subscribers must be assigned a User ID and Password See Section 26 1 4 Subscriber Internet Access Set tings for information on enabling subscribers for Internet Access Instructions for configuring Web Portal Service administrative settings are found in Section 11 2 of this chapter The Web Portal Service is an enhanced APmax service that must be installed sep arately on APmax systems For more information on the Web Portal Service see the documenta tion that is packaged with the service Some data transfers between the APmax and other servers or applications may require Secure Sockets Layer SSL communications Instructions for requesting and installing an SSL certifi cate on the APmax are given in Section 11 4 of this chapter To access the Internet Access Settings interface right click on the system s icon 2 in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Configuration Internet Access Settings command as illustrated in Figure 11 1 The name of the system for which you are configuring settings will be displayed at the top of the Internet Access Settings window Fig ure 11 2 Mitchell System Time Manager PF Ethernet Configuration Vi Internet Access Settings A Serial Co
212. evice Full Duplex This box will be checked if the duplex of the port is full duplex If the duplex of the port is half duplex this box will be unchecked This setting is typically determined by the con nected to device 21 1 Switch Port Statistics The right hand side of the Ethernet Switch Information window contains two tabs that are used to display the statistics of the port that is currently selected in the Switch Ports list on the left hand side of the window In the lower right hand corner of the Ethernet Switch Information window are two buttons Refresh and Clear Pressing the Refresh button will re query the APmax system for the current Ethernet switch statistics and will update the statistics display accordingly Pressing the Clear button will reset the Ethernet switch counters to zero This operation immediately updates the APmax system there is no save concept in this interface After the clear operation is complete on the APmax the statistics are re queried and statistics display is updated The Statistics tab see Figure 21 3 in the Ethernet Switch Information interface contains a list of common statistics for the selected Ethernet switch port Document 715025 290 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmaAx User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 21 Ethernet Switch Information Name Value Bytes Sent 3 118 020 103 Bytes Received 652 654 459 Frames Sent 29 508 252 Frames Received 6 845 958 Multicast Frames
213. ew Route window has the following three fields Far End Point Code Enter the SS7 address signaling point code of the switch at the far end this route will be used to reach Route Description Enter a short description of the route Linkset To Use Select the linkset that will be used to reach this far end point code from the drop down list of linksets that have been defined in the SS7 Configuration interface see Chapter 8 SS7 Con figuration Linksets can only be added within the SS7 Config uration interface see Section 8 2 1 Pressing the OK button in the Add New Route window will add the route and return you to the Enter Trunk Group Info window The newly added route will now be available in the Far end Name drop down menu and will also be listed in the Routes tab of the SS7 Con figuration interface see Section 8 4 Linkset Route Management 7 Press the OK button in the Enter Trunk Group window to add the new ISUP trunk group to the list of trunk groups on the left hand side of the Trunk Configuration window 8 Configure additional settings see Section 9 3 2 and trunk members see Section 9 3 3 for the new ISUP trunk group 9 3 2 ISUP Trunk Group Settings This section contains information on configuring settings specific to ISUP trunk groups These settings are displayed in the General Settings tab of the Trunk Configuration window when an ISUP trunk group is selected in the list on the left hand side of the window
214. f the announcement WE Files Dependencies Licenses Tables Announcements GUID Version Text Description a k 0389d6c6 337b 4 Please enter your ma Enter Mailbox J 047 17F80 3893 4 your password must b Password_must_be_c O95cbSef 576b 47 Od4a41 7c 5042 4 Od Febb 6467 4 To play your greeting Play_greeting_menu Please record your cu Record custom_greeting 2 1 O6b16dde 2e3e 4 2 Mailbox P1 Mailbox 1 1 1 Compose vM_1498 Figure 16 24 Announcements Tab The Fragments tab Figure 16 25 contains a list of the fragments found in the package The following properties of each fragment are displayed in the list Language The language of the fragment English or Spanish Voice The gender voicing this fragment female or male File Name The name of the audio file that plays this fragment Document 715025 244 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 16 Package Management Frag Text The text that will be voiced when this fragment is played GUID The unique ID of this fragment Default This box is checked if the fragment is part of the default set of fragments Inflection The location of the inflection voiced in the fragment Ending or None Version The version number of the fragment WEEN Files Dependencies Licenses Tables Announcements Pr GUID Version Language Voice File Mame Tex
215. firmation Prompt Document 715025 145 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration New trunk members can be added to the selected trunk group by pressing the Add button at the bottom of the Trunk Members tab A window similar to Figure 9 15 will be displayed Select Trunk Member s to Add Available Trunks Selected Trunks Channel Unit Ti Channel 1 O51 1 Stee e 1 D51 1 1 O51 2 1 O51 2 1 O51 2 1 051 2 1 D53 1 1 O53 1 1 O53 1 1 O53 1 2 051 1 2 051 1 2 051 1 2 051 1 2 051 1 2 051 1 ox 7 o m Figure 9 15 Add ISUP Trunk Members oo TA mm on w le OO The Select Trunk Member s to Add window contains two lists Available Trunks and Selected Trunks The Available Trunks list on the left side shows the T1 channels that are contained in DS1 DS3s that have been enabled within the Digital Carrier Configuration interface see Chapter 7 Digital Carrier Configuration but have not been assigned to other trunk groups or services e g used as an SS7 link The Selected Trunks list shows the T1 channels that will be assigned to the selected trunk group when the OK button is pressed Trunk members can be moved from the Available Trunks list to the Selected Trunks list by first selecting one or more available trunks and then press the Add gt gt button between the lists A unique CIC number unique within all trunk groups w
216. fter selecting an RVF file as indicated in the previous step press the Open button in the file selection window to display the Report Schedule window Figure 17 36 Report Schedule Report Name Internet Users Attatchment Type CSV Le Report Frequency Monthly a p _DayofMonth PA E Figure 17 36 Report Schedule Entry 6 The Report Schedule window contains the settings listed below Select a value for each setting and press the OK button Report Name Name of the report being scheduled Attachment Document format in which the report results will be saved Type CSV Excel PDF The resulting file will be attached to the report email Report Fre How frequently the report will be generated and emailed quency Options include Daily Weekly and Monthly Document 715025 264 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer Day of Week The specific day of the week or day of the month on which Month the report will be generated and emailed This option is only available if Report Frequency is set to Weekly or Monthly 7 Select the newly scheduled report in the Report Name list The settings for the selected report will be displayed in the Schedule tab These settings can be adjusted at any time 8 Enter an email address to which the selected report should be sent by pressing the Add but ton below the Email Addresses list This will display an Add Email entry form Figure 1
217. g fields System ID A unique number that identifies this system The number entered here must be the ID assigned to the system hardware on the local network See your system administrator for help finding this number The System ID number should be found on a label on the left side at the rear of the APmax unit System Name Enter the desired name for the system in this field Each sys tem is typically identified by a site name This name will be dis played with the associated system icon in the Command Center window and in the captions of any configuration win dows that are associated specifically with this system This name defaults to the system ID If you know the ID of the system you wish to add then enter it in the System ID field the System Name field is optional and press the OK button The System Information window will attempt to find the entered System ID on the network If it is not found a warning will be displayed and the system will not be added Document 715025 50 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started Immediately after a system is successfully added a system icon 2 representing the new system will appear in the Command Center window If you do not know the ID of the system you wish to add you can use the Find and Advanced buttons to locate the system Pressing the Find button while the System ID field is empty will display all of the systems found
218. g of this linkset on startup or No to disable testing This is the only linkset property that can be changed after the linkset is created 8 2 2 Deleting a Linkset To remove a linkset from the SS7 interface select the linkset to delete in the list on the left hand side of the Linksets tab see Figure 8 3 and press the Delete button located below the list If links are assigned to the linkset you are attempting to delete a warning see Figure 8 6 will be displayed and you will have to delete all of the links see Section 8 2 4 Deleting a Link from a Linkset from the linkset before it can be deleted Document 715025 107 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration Figure 8 6 Unable To Remove Linkset Warning If the linkset you are attempting to delete is part of a combined linkset you will have to uncom bine it before it can be deleted see Section 8 3 Combined Linksets 8 2 3 Adding a Link to a Linkset To add one or more links to a linkset select the linkset in the list on the left hand side of the Link sets tab see Figure 8 3 and press the Add button in the Links section lower right corner of the tab The Add Links window see Figure 8 7 below will be displayed Add Links Available Channels Channels In the Linkset Ti 2 051 2 2 051 2 2 051 2 2 051 2 2 051 2 2 051 2 2 051 2 2 051 2 2 051 2 2 051 2 2 051 2 2 051 2 2 051 2 2 051 2 2 051
219. g steps 1 Right click on the system s icon 2 in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Configuration System Time Manager command as illustrated in Figure 5 1 The System Time Manager window Figure 5 2 will be dis played The name of the system for which you are managing time will be displayed at the top of the System Time Manager window Document 715025 85 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 5 System Time Manager Mitchell z SE System Configuration System Maintenance System Surveillance Ethernet Configuration Internet Access Settings Serial Configuration Service Access Map SIP Registration 557 Configuration system Time NTP Configuration Current Times Local Time Friday April 13 2012 8 40 46 4M Unit System Time Time Zone 1 Friday April 13 2012 6 40 41 4M U5 Central Friday April 13 2012 6 40 41 AM Us Central Select System Time one Time Zone U5 Cerntral h Time Zone Time Friday April 13 2012 8 40 42 Atl Figure 5 2 System Time Manager Window The System Time Manager window contains the following information Local Time This shows the APmax UI PC s current time Unit List Between the Local Time and Time Zone fields is a list of the units in this system and the current time read from each unit Time Zone This setting allows you t
220. gateway to be The IP address of the The IP address of the used by this system The gateway gateway to be used by gateway to be used by is used when the system needs to the Administration CPU the Call Processing send an IP message to a destina network interface CPU network interface tion that is not on the local net work The Gateway can be any valid IP address in dotted notation i e 192 168 5 2 4 1 1 4 Static Routes The Static Routes tab Figure 4 6 is used to specify a route to a destination that it outside of the subnet without going to the default route or gateway This is useful when it is necessary to map IP addresses to go out of a specific Ethernet interface and not go to the gateway device Nor mally when a device has to send a message to an address that is not in its subnet it looks to see if there is a route specified for that address If a route has not been specified it sends the message to the gateway for handling If there is a static route specified then the device sends the message out on the Ethernet interface specified by the route Ethernet Configuration APmax Mitchell General DSP VARP Static Routes Tie Line Interface IP Address Subnet Gateway Description Administration 192 168 5 240 255 255 255 0 192 168 5 2 All 192 166 5241 255 255255 0 192 168 5 2 All DSPs d J 2X Delete Figure 4 6 Static Routes Tab Static routes can be configured for the APmax system by pressing the A
221. gement in this manual or the appropriate Service Description document included with each enhanced service To access the Report Viewer interface right click on the system s icon _ in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Maintenance Report Viewer com mand as illustrated in Figure 17 1 _ Announcement Manager Command Line SI File Viewer Package Management il Process viewer m Reboot Utility Report Viewer Figure 17 1 Report Viewer Menu Command A progress window similar to Figure 17 2 will be displayed while the most recent backup data bases are downloaded from the APmax and stored on your local PC The databases will only be downloaded from the APmax if there are more recent backup files available APmax database backups occur daily at approximately 3 A M Note If an APmax Central Reporting Service Address has been configured see Section 3 3 4 2 in your APmax UI installation then the APmax backup databases will be retrieved from an alter nate server instead of the APmax system Working Retrieving Databases from 4Pmax Figure 17 2 Database Retrieval Progress Once the database retrieval process is complete a Report Viewer window similar to Figure 17 3 will be displayed The name of the system for which you are creating and viewing reports will be displayed at the top of the Report Viewer window Figure 17 3 A list of the APmax databases that a
222. ght hand side of the window will display a list of the fields found in the Subscriber database 4 Select the Columns tab see Figure 17 7 Notice each field has a checkbox next to it Check the box next to each field that should be included in the report In the example below the Default Phone Number Name and Service List fields are checked Criteria Columns 1 Subscriber Record Billing Account Number D Billing Environment Code Billing Service Address Default Phone Nurrber Dial By Name Digits Last Updated By Latitude Longitude Name Placement Type Subscriber Last Update Time Time Zone 2 Address List Address Type Subscriber Address 3 Service List Billing Service ID D D Service List System ID 4 Group Membership Autobttendant Group 4 Recorded Names Recording Description OO WO RICK WO OI Recording File Figure 17 7 Columns Tab for Subscriber Records 5 Select the Criteria tab To the right of each field in the tab is a cell that contains the user specified criteria for that field Figure 17 8 illustrates a Criteria tab where records included in the database report must have 605555 in the Default Phone Number field and must also be subscribed to one of the following three enhanced services Terminating Call Management Universal Call Management or Voice Mail Document 715025 250 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chap
223. gle Developer Console 1 Go to https console developers google com to open the Google Developer Console and to begin creating a project If you are not logged in to a Google Account then the Google login page will be dis played Login to continue If a Google Account needs to be created then use the Create an account link in the login page to create an account and then press the Get started button in the welcome 2 Start creating a project by selecting the Create a project menu command shown in Figure 11 8 or by clicking the Create an empty project option or the Create Project button The New Project screen Figure 11 9 will be displayed Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 167 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings Getting started x Ka CG D bhtpsiicopnsoledeveloperzgooglecom ztart Google Select a project Getting started Getting started Manage all projects First steps Create a project Figure 11 8 Create a Project New Project Project name streaming TM Your project ID will be streamingty 994 Edit Show advanced options vi agree that my use of any services and related APIs is subject to my compliance with the applicable Terms of Service Cancel Figure 11 9 New Project 3 Complete the New Project screen Figure 11 9 and press the Create button The Google Developers Console will take a few moments to create the pr
224. guration e Section 4 2 VLAN Configuration e Section 4 3 Elation Messenger Configuration e Section 4 4 Test DSP Access 4 1 Ethernet Configuration To configure communications for an APmax system right click on the system s icon E in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Configuration Net work Configuration Ethernet Configuration command as illustrated in Figure 4 2 The Ether net Configuration window Figure 4 3 will be displayed The name of the system for which you are configuring communications will be displayed at the top of the Ethernet Configuration win dow J511 ha System Configuration t a Call Logging Portal Settings i System Maintenance 2 Calling Names System Surveillance S DSF Configuration ce FireBar d Internet Access Settings H Large Scale Conferencing Network Configuration Ethernet Configuration Notification Center Management s LAN Configuration Notify Configuration Serial Configuration Service Access Map SIF Registration S 4 557 Configuration 557 Monitor Configuration Switch Interface Configuration 3 System Time Manager Figure 4 2 Ethernet Configuration Menu Command Document 715025 65 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration If this is the first time communications have been configured for this system
225. h the 3rd 6th and 10th digits having an ending inflection the remaining digits being voiced normally and the dashes resulting in two inter digit pauses Add Number Format Display Format ddd ddd Figure 12 3 Add Number Format Selecting a phone number length in the left hand list of the Format Settings tab will show the Dis play Format and Trunk Routing Configuration Numbers of the selected length in the right hand side of the tab The Display Format field described above Figure 12 3 allows the initially defined format of the selected phone number length to be edited The Trunk Routing Configuration Numbers list is used to set up a priority queue for matching phone numbers that come in on a trunk Entries in this list are referred to as routing numbers and indicate the number of digits from 1 to 10 that need to be matched before routing occurs Document 715025 188 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 12 Phone Number Format For example if the routing numbers 7 6 and 3 are in the list then routing will occur on the first 7 digits of the incoming phone number if a match is found However if a match is not found then an attempt will be made to route on the first 6 digits and if a match is still not found an attempt will be made to route on the first 3 digits To add a routing number press the Add button below the Trunk Routing Configuration Numbers list A window
226. he Document 715025 51 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started system you are trying to add is listed here select it and press the OK button You will be returned to the System Information window where the System ID and System Name fields will be populated with the values from the selected system similar to Figure 3 36 System Information System Name Mitchell NEE Figure 3 36 System Information Window Press the OK button in the System Information window to finish adding the system 5 Configure the communications settings for the new system The APmax UI PC must be connected directly to the system through a Local Area Network using IP based protocols See Chapter 4 Network Configuration for information about configuring communica tion settings 6 Set the time and time zone for the new system See Chapter 5 System Time Manager for information about configuring time settings 3 4 2 2 Editing a System Name To change the name associated with a system follow these steps 1 Right click on the APmax UI icon zi in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the APmax System Definition command as illustrated in Figure 3 23 The APmax System Administration window see Figure 3 24 will be displayed 2 In the left hand pane of the Defined APmax s tab select the region of the system you wish to edit 3 Click on the system you wi
227. he Regis tration tab is for managing SIP registration entries and the Settings tab is for configuring system wide SIP registration properties The Server tab is used to manage the devices that are allowed to register locally with the APmax The functions available in these tabs are described in the following sections e Registration tab Section 10 1 SIP Client Registration Management e Settings tab Section 10 2 SIP Client Registration Settings e Server tab Section 10 3 SIP Server Management 10 1 SIP Client Registration Management When the SIP Registration interface is opened the Registration tab 1s displayed by default see Figure 10 2 The left hand side of the Registration tab contains a list of the SIP registrations that have already been defined Selecting a registration entry in the left hand list will display the details of that entry in the SIP Registration Info on the right hand side of the tab To edit an existing registration entry select that entry in the S P Registrations list click the prop erty you wish to edit in the SIP Registration Info section and enter the new value To add a new SIP registration press the Add button located below the SIP Registrations list in the Registration tab of the SIP Registration window A window similar to Figure 10 3 will be dis played Add New SIP Registration User userl Registrar innoveys corm Port 5060 Password 123abe Expires 86400 OF Cancel OK
228. he Subscriber Management interface see Section 26 1 agement Location will be displayed in the APmax UI window Options include Docked The Subscriber Management panel will be docked to the bot tom of the APmax UI window Floating The Subscriber Management interface will be displayed as a free standing window and may be resized closed and opened using the menu command described above Figure 3 20 This option is selected by default Maximized The Subscriber Management interface will fill the entire APmax UI window by default when the APmax UI is started Changes to this setting will not take effect until the APmax UI is restarted After selecting the desired options press the OK button to save any changes to the APmax UI Preferences To exit the APmax UI Preferences window without saving any changes press the Cancel button 3 3 4 2 Advanced Settings The Advanced tab Figure 3 21 in the APmax UI Preferences window contains the following functions APmax UI Preferences General Advanced Reporting Server 8 APmax Addon Cache Quick Launch Lok Cancel Figure 3 21 APmax UI Preferences Advanced Tab APmax Addon The purpose of the addon cache is to decrease the startup time of the Cache APmax UI Over time new services and service upgrades may increase the startup time Clearing the addon cache by pressing the Clear button will force the cache to be recreated the next time the APmax UI is starte
229. he country where the APmax is located For example CA for Canada or US for the United States of America State or Province Input the full name of the state or province where the APmax is located Do not abbreviate the state or province name Locality Input the full name of the city where the APmax is located Do not abbreviate the city or locality name Organization Name Input the name under which your organization or company is legally registered Organization Unit Input your organizational unit or department such as Tele phony Operations or IT If applicable you can enter the DBA doing business as name in this field Common Name Enter the fully qualified domain name that resolves to the APmax e g www myinnovsysapmax com Do not include the http or httos prefixes E Mail Address Enter the e mail address of the person responsible for this certificate or APmax system This is usually how the Certifi cate Authority contacts you Document 715025 180 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings 6 Press the Save button at the bottom of the Certificate Signing Request form A standard Save As window will be displayed Enter the file name and press the Save button to create the CSR request file After it is saved the file will be opened and the contents will be dis played as show in Figure 11 26 Certificate Signing Request Please
230. he list A delete confirmation prompt see Figure 26 39 will be displayed Press the Yes button in the prompt to complete the deletion or press the No button to cancel the deletion Document 715025 337 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management 4re you sure you wish to delete this entry Figure 26 39 Delete Address Prompt NOTE The last phone number address cannot be deleted if the subscriber has a service that requires a phone number 26 1 4 Subscriber Internet Access Settings The Internet tab see Figure 26 40 is used to configure the Internet Access account settings for the billing service address or service group currently selected in the Subscribers list of the Sub scriber Management interface General Info Address Info Intemet Intemet Access Setup No Setup G Web Fortal Unlock Kb Password Change Figure 26 40 Internet Tab The top of the Internet Access Setup section contains the following settings Username The username of this Internet Access account This name must be unique among subscribers associated with the same Internet Access service provider and is used by the end user subscriber to log into the Web Portal Service user interface see the Web Portal Service Description for more information The Username can be created or changed by pressing the Setup button see Section 26 1 4 1 Docume
231. he proper connections 2 Connect one end of the chassis grounding wire to a ground bus Connect the other end to a two hole connector and then bolt one ground connection to each unit see Figure 1 2 Ground Connection below Document 715025 7 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 1 Hardware Installation H p H 7 Ai ee TH alo ZS WTA TE D Figure 1 2 Ground Connection 3 Connect the 48 VDC and RTN to the APmax using the appropriate terminals Figure 1 3 Terminal Connector NOTE Do not insert the fuse until installation is complete Figure 1 3 Terminal Connector 4 Connect the alarm wires to the terminal strips Figure 1 3 Terminal Connector 5 Connect the APmax to the OAM amp P network by connecting a LAN cable to Port 1 of each unit Figure 1 4 Ethernet Switch NOTE If the networks on which the APmax resides do not support the default IP ranges preconfigured before shipment then the sys tem IPs will need to be updated see Chapter 4 Network Configuration for more infor mation Figure 1 4 Ethernet Switch Document 715025 8 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 1 Hardware Installation 6 Connect the tielines from unit to unit 2 using the Ethernet cables provided in the kit Connect Port 5 of unit 1 to Port 5 of unit 2 Connect Port 6 of unit 1 to Port 6 of unit 2 7 If VoIP will be used conn
232. hirty C latb z None english Female ZU wa Goodbye 2769095 english Female Zd0 wa Plaasee Gaed6Fy Mone Mone english female Solway Please e 179029 None english Female 2o4 way Please e 480051 english Female 2072 wa Plaasetr e5cd7 4 Mone Mone Pooh ho bo Po o BA a G a B P Mone WOOO OO 0O AR english female 302 way The part Fa318fc8 Figure 16 12 Fragments Tab The Fragments tab Figure 16 12 contains a list of the fragments found in the package The following properties of each fragment are displayed m the list Language The language of the fragment English or Spanish Voice The gender voicing this fragment female or male File Name The name of the audio file that plays this fragment Frag Text The text that will be voiced when this fragment is played GUID The unique ID of this fragment Default This box is checked if the fragment is part of the default set of fragments Inflection The location of the inflection voiced in the fragment Ending or None Version The version number of the fragment Document 715025 n Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 16 Package Management General Info Dependencies Contents Tables Files Licenses Announcements File Name Version Figure 16 13 Addons Tab The Addons tab Figure 16 13 contains a list of the addons found in the package The fol lowing propert
233. his window is accessed for individual users by pressing the Access Rights button in the User Information window Figure 3 4 while adding or editing a user Document 715025 30 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started GV User Access Rights HA APmax Configuration 2 4 APmax Maintenance 2 APmax Surveillance InnoStream Server Configuration InnoStream Server Maintenance InnoStream Server Surveillance 1 Service Provisioning 2 APmax UI a i Environment Code Map S User Administration 1 GIS APmax System Administration Access Rights dl Read E Write Figure 3 5 User Access Rights Window There are several major categories of functions in the APmax UI Documentation for these cate gories is found in the following locations e APmax Configuration See Part 2 System Configuration e APmax Maintenance See Part 3 System Maintenance e APmax Surveillance See Part 4 System Surveillance e InnoStream Server Configuration This category is only applicable if the APmax UI is being used to manage an InnoStream Server See the InnoStream Server User Manual for more information e InnoStream Server Maintenance This category is only applicable if the APmax UI is being used to manage an InnoStream Server See the InnoStream Server User Manual for more information e InnoStream Server Surveillance This category is only applicable if th
234. iated with each advanced service in the Web Portal Configuration steps will provide more details on configuring and provisioning subscribers for that particular ser vice Document 715025 341 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management Document 715025 342 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Index Access Rights 30 Addon Cache 43 Administration 45 Adding a System 49 Deleting a System 53 Editing a System 52 Administrative Users 182 Advanced Services 309 AIN Point Code 105 AIN Translation Type 105 Alarm Notifications 277 Alarm Status 275 Announcement Manager 203 Announcements 203 Adding 205 Built In Components 209 Copying 208 Editing 206 Parameter Components 209 Phrase Components 209 Phrases 219 Restoring Original 218 Testing 216 Weather Components 209 Auditing Packages 245 C CLASS GTT 105 Combined Linksets 110 Command Center 32 Icon Definitions 34 Menu Commands 34 Command History 42 Command Line 72 76 191 Communications 65 Default Route 112 Default Subscriber Management 315 Deploying Packages 230 Destination Addresses 120 Document Number 715025 Version 4 3 10 Index 343 Index Digital Carrier Configuration 95 DS1 Settings 96 DS3 Settings 98 Sync Master 96 Digital Carrier Status 281 Document History 1 DS1 Configuration 95 DS1 Status 281 DSP Settings 68 DS
235. iber System Map Note The Subscriber System Map interface is only used for administering APmax systems with software releases less than version 4 0 The Subscriber System Map interface is used to define relationships between NPA NXXs ser vices and APmax systems Service management windows e g Voice Mail Mailbox Manage ment use this mapping to support enterprise wide service management Enterprise wide service management allows the APmax UI user to provision service subscribers without concern for the APmax location of the subscribers This mapping is how the service management win dows determine on which APmax system the service subscribers are located Users will not be able to add a subscriber to a service if the NPA NXX of the subscriber is not mapped to that ser vice within the Subscriber System Map window To access the Subscriber System Map interface right click on the APmax UI icon RK in the Command Center window see Section 3 3 for detailed information on using the Command Cen ter window to invoke a popup menu and select the Subscriber System Map command as illus trated in Figure 3 45 The Subscriber System Map window see Figure 3 46 will be displayed Document 715025 57 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 E APmax Ul ep ite User Preferences 4Prax System Definition we Subscriber System Map User Administration Chapter 3 Getting
236. ich you are managing time will be displayed at the top of the System Time Manager window Mitchell at System Configuration a System Maintenance i System Surveillance Ethernet Configuration Internet Access Settings Serial Configuration Service Access Map SIP Registration 557 Configuration Figure 5 5 System Time Manager Menu Command 2 Select the NTP Configuration tab see Figure 5 6 in the System Time Manager window Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 Synch Retry Attempts D at System Time Manager APmax 9511 NTP Configuration 88 Figure 5 6 System Time Manager NTP Configuration Tab Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 5 System Time Manager The NTP Configuration tab displays each unit in the system e g Unit 1 Unit 2 along with the host name e g isdc4 and or IP address of each time server configured for the unit The sync status and NTP IP address displayed next to each unit shows the status and IP of the time server that responded first The Refresh Status button can be pressed to retrieve the current NTP sync status On system startup each unit will send a broadcast query to the other units m the system once a second for five seconds Responses are used to synchronize the local time and elect a NTP sync master The NTP sync master is always the lowest numbered unit in the system The synch master w
237. ies of each addon are displayed in the list File Name The name of an addon DLL file in this package Version The version number of the addon DLL file 5 To confirm the deployment of the selected package to the APmax system press the nstall button at the bottom of the window The Select a Package to Deploy window will be closed and a Deploying Package s progress window similar to Figure 16 14 will be dis played while the package is being deployed Deployment Status Package installation successful Deployment Status Unit 7 Current Step 1 Transferring Files Ir 26 Web Portal 5 1 73 0 Pending Installation Figure 16 14 Package Deployment Progress Document 715025 238 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 16 Package Management Once the deployment is complete the Deploying Package s window will indicate the package was installed successfully as illustrated in Figure 16 15 Deploying Package s Package Name Deployment Status Package installation successful Package installation successful i Package installation successful Package installation successful Frogress Package installation successful Progress Figure 16 15 Package Deployment Complete Press the Close button to exit the Deploying Package s window The newly deployed package will be displayed in the list of installed packages in the Package Man
238. ification fields described below are only available if APmax Release 4 5 17 or greater is installed on the system hosting the subscriber record The SMTP Server and SMTP Port fields are used to enter the address and port of the SMTP server that will send alarm notification emails The From Address is the email address that will be dis played as the source of any notification emails The FQDN field is used to enter the fully quali fied domain name to send in the HELO command The Notification Address field for each alarm level is used to enter an email address that will receive email notifications when an alarm of the associated level occurs Alarms must be stable for two minutes before a notification email will be sent Email notifica tions will be continue to be sent once per hour Figure 19 6 provides an example of a notification email for a major alarm on System 123544 where the description of the alarm is Test Document 715025 278 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 19 Alarm Status From Alarms alarmd restarttv innsys com Sent Tue 10 29 2013 1 05 PM Ta Rune Torgersen Cc Subject System 123544 Alarm set severity Major Alarm Test Figure 19 6 Example Notification Email The Audio selection box for each alarm level in the Options window contains the following three options None Default Custom No notification sound will be played for alarms of this leve
239. ighted release the left hand mouse button to drop the Called Area s into the Calling Number 2 Add to Calling Numbers button a Select one or more area names in the Called Areas list using the same actions explained in step in the Drag and Drop section above b Select one or more areas in the Calling Numbers list using the same selection actions as explained in step in the Drag and Drop section above Document 715025 126 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration c Press the Add to Calling Numbers button gt between the Called Areas and Calling Numbers list Note that the advantage of using the Add To Calling Numbers button is that multiple Calling Numbers targets can be selected and populated at one time When the assignment is performed the selected Called Areas will be displayed below the target Calling Number s illustrating that these areas can be called toll free from the calling number Calling Numbers c LEI CN Woonsocket CN Mitchell ir DUU Murnbers H wei B05 995 xexe H wei PU ZO vu Ey PUP D4AD vu CN Woonsocket ir Alpena ir DUU Murnbers Toll free destinations for any origination from a DN in the 605 996 exchange Figure 8 27 Area Assignments for Calling Numbers Deleting Called Areas Areas can be deleted from the Called Areas list by selecting one or more area names and perform ing the normal delete actions pre
240. igure 26 25 Delete Subscriber Warning 26 1 1 7 Adding Service Groups If more than one subscriber exists at the same location then a service group may be added to the billing service address Advanced services can be added and managed independently for each service group at a billing service address but the primary subscriber account and all service groups attached to the subscriber will share the same billing account number Service groups that have already been added to a billing service address are shown below the associated billing ser vice address icon in the Subscribers list of the Subscriber Management interface illustrated in Figure 26 5 To add a service group to a billing service address select the address and press the Add button at the bottom of the Subscribers list A drop down list see Figure 26 26 will be displayed Select the Add New Service Group menu command in the drop down list An Add New Service Group window similar to Figure 26 27 will be displayed E Clear ee Add i Delete oe Add New Subscriber 6 Add New Service Group Add 4CD Call Center Add Notify Plus Add Originating Call Management a Add SIP Intercom Add Switch services Add Terminating Call Management 7 Add Universal Call Managernent Figure 26 26 Add New Service Group Menu Command Add New Service Group System 9511 x Phone Number Billing Account Number 1 103956534 7124 Billing Serice Address 1000 Innovative Dr
241. igure 3 4 will be displayed User Information Login ID administrator Description AFPmas System Admin o ee Figure 3 4 User Information Window 2 Populate the following fields in the User Information window Login ID Enter the new user name The Login ID may consist of up to 30 characters The case of the characters does not matter When logging on the Login ID is not case sensitive Description Enter a short description of the user to help identify the purpose of the user in the User Administration list This field is not required Password Enter the user password The password may consist of up to 30 characters The case of the characters does matter When logging on the Password is case sensitive Confirm Password Enter the password again 3 Press the Access Rights button in the User Information window to display the User Access Rights window see Figure 3 5 See Section 3 2 4 User Access Rights Details for detailed information on selecting the appropriate access rights for this user If there are currently no other users defined in the User Information window it is recommended that you define an administrator user with access privileges to all functions 4 Once the access rights have been selected for the new user press the OK button in the User Access Rights window to return to the User Information window 5 Press the OK button in the User Information window The new user has now been suc cessfully c
242. ill by default sound an audible alarm at the PC for the most urgent alarm present in the APmax system To disable audible notifications for all of the alarms currently listed in the Alarm Status window press the Silence Audible button below the list If a new alarm appears on the list after the Silence Audible button has been pressed the audible notification will be re enabled To change the audio file associated with each level of alarm or to configure email notifications of alarms press the Options button in the Alarm Status window to display the Options window see Figure 19 5 Document 715025 277 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 19 Alarm Status Options E Mail Notification SMTP Server smtp innovesys com SMTP Port z5 From Address alarme innovsys com FODN apmas innovsys COM Minor Alarms Audio Hone Notification Address admin innovsys cam Major Alarms Audio Default C Play Notification Address admintinnoyvsys cam Critical Alarms Audio Custom p gt Play File Path Ms Aringin way Notification Address admin innovsys cam God Figure 19 5 Audible Alarm Options The Options window displays each of the three alarm levels Minor Major Critical an Audio selection box for changing the sound associated with each alarm level and a Play button for play ing the sound associated with each alarm level Note E Mail Not
243. ill send a broadcast query to each configured time server once every five seconds Once an NTP server responds to the request with a valid time subsequent requests for time are sent to the time server that responded at a rate of once every five seconds For every suc cessful reply the time lengthens by five seconds not to exceed a request interval of five minutes Each failed reply reduces the request interval by half with a minimum request interval of five seconds A timeout on a query resets the time to five seconds and results in a broadcast query to all configured time servers Loss of the connection to a time server after time has been set will result in a major alarm Systems actively running APmax Release 4 0 or greater will write the current time to a sync file every five minutes On startup the system will wait for a response a maximum of 240 seconds before timing out If a timeout occurs or NTP is disabled or not found then the system will throw a critical alarm and the system time will be set to 30 seconds later than the time in the sync file If a startup timeout occurs on a system with an APmax release less than 4 0 then startup will be halted until the time is set If this occurs the time may be set by either a successful synch to a configured NTP server or by setting the time manually from the UI using Sys tem Time Manager see Section 5 1 Once the time has been set the system will resume Startup Any major time change det
244. in dotted notation i e 192 168 5 2 The VRRP address for the system s WAN interface Press the Next button to advance to the next screen in the wizard Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 73 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration 2 The second screen Figure 4 10 of the Ethernet Configuration Wizard contains settings pertaining to the APmax s Administration CPU network interface Ethernet Configuration Wizard Administration Ethemet Configuration Enter the Ethernet information for the Administrative network Internet Address Adnitnisinition 172 23 11 78 Call Processing 172 23 12 104 DSP Subnet 255 255 248 0 Gateway 172 23 8 1 WRAP 192 168 5 237 Figure 4 10 Administration Settings Screen The Address Subnet Gateway and VRRP fields in the screen above provide the same function for the Administration CPU network as the fields in Step 1 provide for the Inter net subnetwork Enter IP address values into the fields and press the Next button to con tinue 3 The third screen Figure 4 11 of the Ethernet Configuration Wizard contains settings per taining to the APmax s Call Processing CPU network interface Ethernet Configuration Wizard Call Processing Ethemet Configuration Enter the Ethernet information for the Call Processing network Internet Address Administration 172 23 11 77 Call Processing 172 23 12 103 DSP Subnet
245. ion 3 0 0 28 Fix a problem that the UI would not always save data VMailSubMemt V4 Version 4 4 0 52 Fixed No longer attempts to generate an initial action list d the default VMailSubMemt V5 Version 5 4 0 63 Fired No longer attempts to generate an initial action list d the default WirelessOTAAdmin V1 Version 1 0 0 4 Disable fields within the UI to prevent them from accidently being changed or data being erroneously being changed There are currently 10 update s available for the APmax UI Do you want to restart the APmax UI to install them now Figure 2 25 Restart Prompt No Updates Found a 1 No updates were found at this time Figure 2 26 No Updates Found Document 715025 26 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 1 Logging Into the APmax UI At this point the APmax UI software should be installed Run the program by clicking on the Start button in the lower left corner of the screen selecting Programs selecting the Innovative Systems group and clicking on the 4Pmax command If desired a shortcut may be placed on the Windows desktop to allow quicker access to the software The following figure depicts the login window for the APmax UI software AO APmax sign In Em Login ID MASTER Password oeeee Wii Innovative Systems Tanca H Advanced Master APmax No Master Amay
246. ion on defining new users with access to more functions 3 2 User Administration The User Administration interface is used to add users delete users and define the login ID pass word and access privileges for each user The access privileges define what APmax UI functions the user will be allowed to access and perform To access the User Administration interface right click on the APmax UI icon Ki in the Command Center window see Section 3 3 for detailed information on using the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the User Administration command as illustrated in Figure 3 2 The User Administration win dow see Figure 3 3 will be displayed EN APmax System Definition Subscriber System Map al User Administration User Preferences Figure 3 2 User Administration Menu Command P User Administration E B EN Login ID Description amp administrator APmax System Admin 2 readonly Read Only Access Figure 3 3 User Administration Window A list of currently defined users will be displayed in the User Administration window If no users have been defined the list will be blank Document 715025 28 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 2 1 Adding a User To define a new APmax UI user follow these steps 1 Press the Add button in the User Administration window see Figure 3 3 The User Infor mation window F
247. is Internet Access account This name must be unique among subscribers associated with the same Internet Access service provider and is used by the end user subscriber to log into the Web Portal Service user interface see the Web Portal Service Description for more information The Sign In Name text is not case sensitive and may contain any combination of letters numbers and the following symbols period hyphen underscore at sign The minimum length of the Sign In Name is 1 and the maximum length is unlimited Document 715025 339 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management Password The password of this Internet Access account This password is used in conjunction with the Sign In Name to allow the sub scriber to log into Internet Access user interfaces The Pass word text is case sensitive and may contain letters numbers and the following symbols hyphen underscore The minimum length of the Password is determined by the Password Strength setting The maximum length is 20 characters Verify Password New or changed passwords must be entered into this field along with the Password field to verify the password has been typed correctly Password Strength This meter is used to indicate the strength of a new password Passwords for previously configured accounts will always indi cate a Password Strength of Weak since the password is encrypted on the APmax an
248. is based on T1 and channel number For exam ple channel 1 on T1 0 is lower than channel 1 on T1 1 Chan nel 24 on T1 0 is lower than channel 1 on T1 1 Searches will span the T1 circuits to find an available trunk but will not span units Sequential searches will wrap to the appropriate T1 when upper or lower bounds have been reached The options available for this field are listed below e Low Starting with the lowest trunk in the trunk group the first available trunk will be selected e High Starting with the highest trunk in the trunk group the first available trunk will be selected e Seq Low Low Sequential The last trunk used is stored Selection begins with the next highest trunk until an avail able trunk is found The search wraps to the lowest trunk in the trunk group e Seq High High Sequential The last trunk used is stored Selection begins with the next lowest trunk until an available trunk is found The search wraps to the highest trunk in the trunk group e Least Recent When a trunk is used in a call a time stamp is created when the call is started This option will select the trunk that has not been used in a call for the longest time e Most Recent When a trunk is used in a call a time stamp is created on call start This option will select the trunk that was most recently used in a call Hop Counter This field indicates whether the Hop Count parameter if present in an ISUP messag
249. isplayed Add Destination Address NPA Net 605 555 Paint Code 1 3 1 Destination Address 605 555 9000 Cc Cancel Figure 8 22 Add Destination Address Window Populate the following fields in the Add Destination Address window and press the OK button to save the new entry NPA NXX Enter the incoming 6 digit NPA NXX that will be used for this new address Point Code Enter the incoming point code Destination Enter the 10 digit destination address Address Document 715025 121 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration 8 6 3 Toll Call Management The Toll Call Management tab Figure 8 23 is used to define a set of local toll free called numbers and assign those numbers to call originators Any number called from an originator that is not on their list of local numbers will be treated as a toll call 57 Configuration APmax 9511 General Linksets Combined Linksets Routing Global Title Translation AN Seven To Ten Mapping Destination Address Toll Call Management Called numbers Calling Numbers CN 2 DUU aux auNu CN 800 Numbers H S DUD DAC vun BE DD vu MNNM CN Mitchell H A DUD 20 vun B D duu MNNM CN Woonsocket DUD 20E wu ES OC Alpena A wei DU O vu CN Mitchell PUP DAD vuvu 3 wei DU ZOE vu DT DUU vw uNu OC Mitchell d wei DU D4AD vu CN B00 Numberz B PUP DO vuvu CN B00 Numberz H B DD vu vuM M DUD
250. istory of alarms select the History tab Figure 19 4 at the top of the Alarm Sta tus window The APmax UI will retrieve error log files from the APmax and display log entries for recently set or cleared alarms Note Alarm History uses high soeed Command Link File Transfer to retrieve log files from the APmax and therefore requires the selected system to have a mini mum of APmax Release 4 2 and AudioSubsystem package version 4 3 33 d Alarm Status APmax 9511 Date CPU Alarm S Oct 25 12 48 37 Oct 25 12 52 27 Oct 25 12 54 12 Oct 25 12 57 46 Oct 25 15 34 28 Oct 25 15 34 28 Oct 25 15 34 28 Oct 25 15 34 28 Oct 25 15 34 33 Oct 25 15 34 33 Oct 25 15 34 35 Oct 25 15 Admin Setting Alarm Time not synchronized to NTP server to Major Admin Clearing Alarm Time not synchronized to NTP server Admin Setting Alarm Time not synchronized to NTP server to Major Admin Clearing Alarm Time not synchronized to NTP server Call Proc Clearing Alarm DS1 Port 1 SMB Call Proc Clearing Alarm DS 1 Port 2 SMB Proc Clearing Alarm DS 1 Port 1 SMB Proc Clearing Alarm DS1 Port 2 SMB Proc Setting Alarm DS 1 Port 1 SMB to Minor Proc Setting Alarm DS 1 Port 2 SMB to Minor Proc Setting Alarm DS 1 Port 1 SMB to Minor Proc Setting Alarm DS 1 Port 2 SMB to Minor i i 1 1 2 2 1 1 i i A 2 Figure 19 4 Alarm History 19 1 1 Alarm Notifications Alarm Status w
251. it Al Pork DSF 3 Ea Unit Al Port DSF 4 Te INTER CPU ID 3 Figure 4 15 VLAN Configuration Window The VLAN Configuration window is divided into two sections Defined VLANs and Selected Item Settings The Defined VLANs section on the left hand side of the window contains a treeview of all VLANs that are defined on the APmax system The first three VLANs DEFAULT TIELINE and INTER CPU are installed by default and are read only Each VLAN node in the Defined VLANs section can be double clicked to display and hide the ports that are associated with the VLAN NOTE When the APmax is configured with VLAN support the Port 3 adaptor is desig nated to provide IPTV services By default the APmax assigns IP addresses in the 192 168 100 xxx range which may conflict with other devices on the network The APmax default IP configuration may need to be changed during the installation process to avoid IP address conflicts The Selected Item Settings section on the right hand side of the VLAN Configuration window is used to view and edit settings for the VLAN or port node currently selected in the Defined VLANs treeview Settings that cannot be edited will be grayed out To define a custom VLAN and configure the routes and ports for the VLAN follow these steps 1 Press the Add button at the bottom of the Defined VLANs section The Add VLAN win dow see Figure 4 16 will be displayed Document 715025 77 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4
252. it value is All then the license applies to all units on this system Distribution Type Determines whether or not licenses used by resources e g sub scribers ports are maintained when the APmax system Is rebooted A value of Unit indicates the licensing is dynamic and that no resources e g ports trunks associated with this license will remain licensed after the system is rebooted A value of Sys tem indicates the licensing is persistent and the resources e g subscribers mail boxes associated with this license will remain licensed after a reboot Expiration Date The date on which this license will no longer be valid A value of Never indicates the license will not expire Document 715025 312 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmaAx User Manual Release 4 3 Alarm Threshold Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 Chapter 25 License Viewer The percentage of license usage at which an alarm will be set Alarms can be viewed using the Alarm Status tool Chapter 19 Alarm Status Note This function is only available for systems with APmax Release 4 4 or greater A value of NA indicates the licensed resource either belongs to a system that does not meet the minimum release requirement or the licensed resource is a one time license feature that will never run out To change the Alarm Threshold press the Edit button to open the Edit Alarm Threshold window Figure 25 3 and select either Non
253. ith the same far end point code must iden tify every trunk member assigned to an ISUP trunk group The CIC of each new ISUP trunk member can be assigned after they are moved to the Selected Trunks list by entering the CIC number into the trunk member s row under the CIC column To make this CIC assignment task easier the Trunk Configuration interface has an auto populate function After a number is entered in an empty CIC cell the APmax UI will populate all empty cells below the selected cell with CIC values incremented by one from the previously entered value For example if a CIC number of 100 is entered into the top row the subsequent empty rows will be assigned 101 102 etc Trunk members can be removed from the Selected Trunks list by selecting one or more trunks from the right hand list and then pressing the lt lt Remove button The removed trunk members will be placed at the bottom of the Available Trunks list Document 715025 146 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration After the desired trunk members have been moved to the Selected Trunks list press the OK button to insert those trunk members into the Trunk Members tab see Figure 9 7 Pressing the Cancel button will close the Select Trunk Member s to Add window without adding any trunk members to the trunk group 9 4 SIP Trunk Groups 9 4 1 Adding a SIP Trunk Group To add a SIP trunk group fol
254. ive Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 24 Daily Log Analysis Tool Temperatures Temperature of supervisor internal DSPs and Vreg Celsius and Fahr enheit Clock generator State of T1 clock synchronizer Current RPM of all four fans Packages Installed Package Name The name of the APmax package that is installed on the unit Version The version of the package that is installed on the unit Package Licenses Max Resources The total number of licenses for this resource Used Resources The number of used licenses for this resources used The percentage of total licenses that are in use Resource Name The resource being licensed e g Notify Subscribers SIP ACS Devices Voicemail Boxes PreStaged Packages Package Name The name of the APmax package that is pre staged for installation The version of the pre staged package File Modification The date this package was downloaded from Innovative Systems Time Document 715025 308 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Part 5 Services Overview Part 5 provides instructions for using the service management functions that are included in the APmax UI software The following chapters are found in Part 5 Services e Chapter 25 License Viewer e Chapter 26 Subscriber Management The Services icon in the APmax UI Command Center represents the licensing and system wide service
255. l The default notification sound will be played for alarms of this level A custom wav file will be played for alarms of this level Selecting this option will display a standard file selection window Use the file selection window to locate and select a wav audio file and press the Open button The path to the selected wav file will be displayed below the selection box for the associated alarm level When the alarm notification sounds and email addresses have been set press the OK button in the Options window to save the settings and close the window Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 279 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 19 Alarm Status Document 715025 280 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmaAx User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 20 Digital Carrier Status Chapter 20 Digital Carrier Status The Digital Carrier Status tool allows system administrators to monitor the status of trunks and digital signalling DS ports for the APmax system To access the Digital Carrier Status interface right click on the system s icon 2 in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Surveillance Digital Carrier Status command as illustrated in Fig ure 20 1 The name of the system for which you are viewing information will be displayed at the top of the Digital Carrier Status window which is partitioned into four tabs DS see Figure 20 2 in Section 20 1 T
256. l Center ra Call Logging Notify Plus 8 On Demand Conferencing A Originating Call Management w SIPACS Terminating Call Management amp Unive Ki Refresh service information Voice Figure 26 16 Service Right Click Menu 26 1 1 3 Adding Subscribers To create a new subscriber begin by pressing the Add button located below the Subscribers list in the Subscriber Management interface An Add New Subscriber window similar to Figure 26 18 will be displayed If there are subscribers in the Subscribers list then a drop down menu will be displayed see Figure 26 17 and the Add New Subscriber menu command must be selected before the Add New Subscriber window will be opened Figure 26 18 Add New Subscriber Window Document 715025 324 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management Enter the information of the new subscriber into the fields described below of the Add New Subscriber window Name System Phone Number Billing Account Number Billing Service Address Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 Enter the name or a short description of the subscriber The entered value does not have to be unique and is used in vari ous interfaces to help identify the subscriber Select the APmax system on which the new subscriber record will be located Enter the default 10 digit directory number associated with this subscriber The default subscriber phone nu
257. l Summary Tab Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 28 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 20 Digital Carrier Status Document 715025 288 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 21 Ethernet Switch Information Chapter 21 Ethernet Switch Information The Ethernet Switch Information interface allows system administrators to monitor statistics for all Ethernet switch ports on a given APmax system To access the Ethernet Switch Information interface right click on the system s icon E in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Surveillance Ethernet Switch Information command as illus trated in Figure 21 1 The name of the system for which you are viewing statistics will be dis played at the top of the Ethernet Switch Information window Figure 21 2 Mitchell System Configuration _ Gamm Status SS Digital Carrier Status Log Reader 557 Status Figure 21 1 Ethernet Switch Information Menu Command Ethernet Switch Information APmax Mitchell Switch Ports Selected Port Statistics Pork Connected To Enabled Linked Speed Full Duplex o Statistics Advanced Statistics 0 CPU1 E EE Name Value 1 CPU Ethi 100 Mbit Bytes Sent 93 269 437 CPU Eth A A pomi A Bytes Received 209 164 950 100 Mbit Frames Sent 1 260 461 SC RI45 3 L C rett Multicast Frames Sent
258. le Table sec tion matches the Global Title information in the received SS7 message The value of this field is set by clicking in the Expansion Route cell and selecting a destination point code from the drop down list as illustrated in Figure 8 17 The destination point codes available in the drop down list include the Far End Point Codes of the routes defined in the Routing tab see Section 8 4 of the SS7 Configuration window Translation Type T able Translation Type Subsystem Number Map Number Expansion Route R i ae emmmmmmmmemereremeremreemerruet zg i Description Point Code 0 0 0 0 0 0 Route 1 ISUF 10 1 1 Route 2 11 22 33 Figure 8 17 Selecting an Expansion Point Code Document 715025 117 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration 3 Click a location in the window other than the new row to save the new row 4 To delete a Translation Type entry select the row to remove and press the Delete button in the Translation Type Table section 8 5 3 GTT Advanced Settings The Advanced tab see Figure 8 18 allows the editing of map keys so that four global addresses of any length from 0 to 10 digits can be defined for a map number For example map number 2 could be configured to allow global addresses with 4 5 7 and 8 digit lengths This editing of map keys is not allowed if there are any existing GTT entries that use the map number If
259. leting Subscribers see Section 26 1 1 4 e Adding Billing Service Addresses see Section 26 1 1 5 e Deleting Billing Service Addresses see Section 26 1 1 6 e Adding Service Groups see Section 26 1 1 7 e Deleting Service Groups see Section 26 1 1 8 e Adding Services see Section 26 1 1 9 e Deleting Services see Section 26 1 1 10 Selecting a subscriber billing service address or service group icon in the Subscribers list will display information pertaining to the selected item in the tabs located on the right hand side of the interface See the following sections for more information on the subscriber settings that are man aged in each tab e Section 26 1 2 General Info e Section 26 1 3 Address Info e Section 26 1 4 Subscriber Internet Access Settings Document 715025 318 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management Selecting an advanced service icon in the Subscribers list will display settings for that service on the right hand side of the Subscriber Management interface The Service Description documents associated with a specific advanced service will provide more details on managing subscribers for that particular service 26 1 1 1 Gathering Subscriber Information To retrieve subscriber information from the APmax system follow these steps 1 Use the selection box in the upper left hand corner of the Subscriber Managemen
260. lines of the error file Note The Daily Log Analysis Tool requires the Log Analysis package to be installed on the selected system 24 1 1 Setting Administrator E mail Address To receive the daily log analysis files open the Internet Access Settings interface see Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings in the APmax UI and configure the Administrator E Mail Address Default From Address and SMTP Server settings within the General tab see Figure 24 1 Wa IS Internet Access Settings 4Pmax 9511 ka a kE T Administrative Users External DSP Addresses video Builder Provider Settings Servise ProviderID B85cf29f 23fd 44f2 bz16 fabazosdo62t OOO d External Address 172 23 12 81 Semice Provider Name Innovative Systems Support Address sUpporb managemytelco com Support E Mail Address supportemail managemytelco Com E Mail Settings Administrator E Mail Address admin managemytelco com Default From Address info managemytelco com SMTP Server mail managemytelca com Figure 24 1 Internet Access Settings Window Document 715025 303 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 24 Daily Log Analysis Tool 24 1 2 Example of Daily Log Analysis Report REENEN Log Analyzer April 17 2013 Wednesday H HEEEHEH HHH HF System ID 2552 Serial NOs ORMS3 2 LO01336 Eeer A Date Range Processed yesterday 4 16 2013 tt at at Ht He
261. lms and realm members are given in the following sections 10 3 1 Realm Management To add a SIP Registration realm press the Add button located below the Realms section in the Server tab An Add SIP Server Realm entry form similar to Figure 10 7 will be displayed Add SIP Server Realm Realm Hame Customer Service SIF Trunk Group TG 7 SIP OUT e Figure 10 7 Add SIP Server Realm Enter a description of the new realm in the Realm Name field select the outgoing SIP Trunk Group to use for calls for this realm and press the OK button Note that only outgoing or 2 way SIP trunk groups that have been previously configured in the Trunk Configuration interface see Section 9 4 SIP Trunk Groups for the current APmax system will be available in the Add SIP Server Realm entry form To delete a realm and its members select the realm and press the Delete button below the Realms section A delete confirmation prompt will be displayed Choose Yes to complete the deletion 10 3 2 Realm Member Management Follow these steps to add a SIP Registration realm member 1 Select in the Realms section on the left hand side of the Server tab the realm to which the new member should be added 2 Press the Add button located below the Realm Members section in the Server tab An Add SIP Server Realm Member entry form similar to Figure 10 8 will be displayed Add SIP Server Realm Member User 6059956170 Password 1234abec Lem Can
262. low these steps 1 Press the Add button in the lower left hand corner of the Trunk Configuration window Figure 9 2 An Enter Trunk Group Info window similar to Figure 9 16 will be dis played Enter Trunk Group Into Trunk Group 1 Trunk Group Name SIP 1 Figure 9 16 Enter SIP Trunk Group Info The four trunk group properties displayed in the Enter Trunk Group Info window are described in Section 9 1 2 Enter the new trunk group number in the Trunk Group field The trunk group number must be unique and if it is not an error will be shown Select SIP in the Signaling Type drop down menu 4 Enter the Trunk Group Name This field is optional Press the OK button to add the new SIP trunk group to the list of trunk groups on the left hand side of the Trunk Configuration window 6 Configure additional settings see Section 9 4 2 for the new SIP trunk group Document 715025 147 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration 9 4 2 SIP Trunk Group Settings This section contains information on configuring settings specific to SIP trunk groups These set tings are displayed in the General Settings tab of the Trunk Configuration window when a SIP trunk group is selected in the list on the left hand side of the window The four settings at the top of the General Settings tab are common to all types of trunk groups and are described in Section 9 1 Beneath the
263. ltaneously box unchecked by default to do a service outage upgrade Check the Require Upgrade Confirmation box checked by default to pause the process after the non upgrade steps and allow the upgrade to be continued at a later time For example checking this box would allow all necessary files to be trans ferred to the system during business hours but the actual upgrade could be paused until a specified service window Press the Prepare Upgrade button at the bottom of the System Upgrade Manager window to dis play a confirmation prompt and then press Yes in the prompt to begin the upgrade process The System Upgrade Manager screen will now display the steps required to finish the upgrade and the current status of each step illustrated in Figure 18 5 Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 269 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 18 System Upgrade Manager EN sstem Upgrade Manager amp Prmax 9511 1 Retieve Backup Databases SS Transfer TAR Files Downloading UpgradeFiles_43_unified tar File Go Complete Transfer and Install Prestage Package z P s Ka 4 Set up Email Updates i H J e Se p Upgrade System Figure 18 5 Upgrade Progress Screen If the Require Upgrade Confirmation box is checked then the Start Upgrade button shown in Fig ure 18 6 will be displayed allowing the upgrade to be resumed a
264. lues in the General tab fields will be saved immediately upon leaving the General tab It is recommended that a valid point code be entered before any linksets are created for this system 8 2 Linkset Configuration An SS7 linkset is a group of SS7 links that are all physically connected to the same far end device An SS7 link is an individual signaling path between the APmax and the specified far end device The Linksets tab see Figure 8 3 is where linksets are added see Section 8 2 1 or removed Section 8 2 2 from the system and where channels 1 e SS7 links are added see Sec tion 8 2 3 or removed see Section 8 2 4 from linksets Document 715025 105 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration SST Configuration APmax Mitchell General Linksets Combined Linksets Routing Global Title Translation AIN Linkgets Linkget Info a Linkset 1 Linkset ID 1 Linkset 2 Description Linkset 1 Linkset 3 Far End Point Code 1 1 1 Linkset 4 Test On Startup Yes Linkset 5 Figure 8 3 Linksets Tab The Linksets tab is partitioned into three sections Linksets Linkset Info and Links The Linksets section contains a list of the linksets that have been defined The Linkset Info section contains the properties of the currently selected linkset Linkset proper ties are described in Section 8 2 1 Adding a Linkset The only property that can be changed for a
265. mal type of Voice Mail Service mailbox will be included in the report Subscribers with other mailbox types such as Family Routing or Automated Attendant will be excluded Also the Options Package Description Include Platinum criteria is listed under Voice Mail Configuration This indicates that only Voice Mail Service Subscribers with the Platinum package will be included in the report Document 715025 255 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer Platinum Subscriber Report Columns H ame Default Phone Number Service List Mailbox Number Options Package List Description KZ Subscnber Default Phone Number Like 605555 Service List Include TerminatingCallM anagement Voicemail UniversalCallM anager K Voice Mail Mailbox Type Include Single Mormal Must Have Must Have d Voice Mail Configuration Options Package Description Include Platinum Figure 17 20 Draw Control with Three Databases Pressing the Results button in the lower right hand corner of the Report Viewer window will result in a report see Figure 17 21 with the same columns as those specified in the draw control seen in Figure 17 20 All of the records in the report will follow the restric tions of the criteria specified in the draw control Platinum subscriber Report Drag a column header here to group by that column Name Default Phone Mu Service List Mail Box Number
266. may be viewed by APmax unit or by trunk group by clicking the radio button next to the desired Display Mode at the top of the tab Each configured channel is represented by a circular button that indicates the status of the channel by its color A red button indicates the call processing state of the channel is out of service A yellow button indicates the channel is idle and a blue button indicates the chan nel is busy Clicking on a channel button will display the following details about the selected channel in a section on the right hand side of the tab Unit DS1 Channel CIC Admin State Call Processing State and Aux State Document 715025 286 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmaAx User Manual Release 4 3 _ Digital Carrier Status APmax 7020 show MME DI D5 Trunks SIP Summary Display Mode By Unit 1 Ce By Trunk Group Chapter 20 Digital Carrier Status Trunk Group MF1 Number 4 123 45 6 ZS 9 101l 12 13 14 15 16 i7 18 13 20 71 2 3 AA Trunk Group Barge In unit 1 Number 155 A A 5 6 ZS 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 23 24 Trunk Group Barge In Unit 2 Number 156 123 45 6 ZS 3 1077 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 3 AA ps121 OO Trunk Group Voie Mail Number 157 Unit DS1 Channel CIC Admin State Call Processing State Aux State Figure 20 7 Channe
267. mber can be changed by add ing a new 10 digit phone number in the Address Info tab see section 26 1 3 and then selecting that new number in the Default Phone Number field in the General Info tab see Sec tion 26 1 2 Shortened phone numbers ranging from 7 to 9 digits may be automatically added to the Address nfo tab depending on the settings in the Phone Number Format interface described in Section 12 2 Enter the account number used by the billing system for this subscriber This field is not constrained to be unique and there fore multiple subscribers may have the same billing account number This field is typically a postal address but may be another loca tion The CASS button next to the Billing Service Address field is an optional feature that uses the CASS system to improve the accuracy of the billing address by verifying it with the United States Postal Service To certify an address follow these steps 1 Enter a postal address address city state and zip code into the Billing Service Address field 2 Press the CASS button If the entered address matches the certified address then nothing will happen If the entered address does not match the certified address then an Address Change window similar to Figure 26 19 will be displayed showing the originally entered address and the certified address Press Yes in the Address Change window if displayed to update the Billing Service Address field with the certifi
268. mbers list area and select the Add New Number command from the popup menu The same edit mode behavior as Called Numbers is also exhibited where an editable prompt is displayed until you have completed entering the desired groups Valid Calling Numbers must be in one of the following forms 3 digit NPA 6 digit NPA NXX or 10 digit directory number Deleting Calling Numbers Areas Called Areas can be deleted from selected Calling Numbers This is done when a Calling Number can no longer call numbers in that area as toll free To delete Calling Number Areas select one or more area names in the Calling Numbers list and delete them using one of the delete mechanisms e g lt Delete gt key Delete button Delete Number popup menu command The user must confirm the delete request before the delete is performed The Calling Numbers list will be updated after the delete is confirmed Deleting Calling Numbers To delete Calling Numbers from the Calling Numbers list select one or more numbers in the list and delete them using one of the delete mechanisms e g lt Delete gt key Delete button Delete Number popup menu command The user must confirm the delete request before the delete is performed The Calling Numbers list will be updated after the delete is confirmed 8 Service Configuration The Service Configuration interface is used to manage service settings e g subsystem numbers access numbers of APmax applications that do not hav
269. me To change the name of a region click on the region name and press the Edit button below the Sys tem Regions section in the APmax System Administration window see Figure 3 25 An Edit Region window will be displayed with the current name of the region highlighted see Figure 3 27 Enter the name of the new region and press the OK button to accept the changed name Edit Region Region Name Meni seals Figure 3 27 Editing a Region Name 3 4 1 3 Deleting a System Region WARNING Use this command with EXTREME CAUTION Deleting an APmax system region will NOT affect the configuration on the systems in the region however the configuration for ALL systems in the deleted region will not be accessible from the APmax UI until the systems are re added To delete a system region first click on the region name m the System Regions section of the APmax System Administration window see Figure 3 24 Note that any systems displayed in System List section of the window will also be removed from the APmax UI if the selected region is deleted Next press the Delete button below the System Regions section If there are no systems in the selected region then a delete confirmation prompt similar to Figure 3 28 will be displayed If sys tems have been assigned to the selected region then a delete confirmation prompt similar to Fig ure 3 29 will be displayed Press the Yes button in either prompt to complete the deletion or press the No
270. me of the system for which you are managing packages will be displayed at the top of the Package Management window Figure 16 2 Mitchell 3 System Configuration Package Management APmax 9511 Lo E ez Installed Packages Hide License Only Packages Name ACD Announcement Service Interface BasicConferencing Call Logging Calling Name CiscoScreenPop 51500 Announcements Dedicated Announcements FileSystemVersion Firebar felelelelelelelele Firmware Figure 16 2 Package Management Window Document 715025 229 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 16 Package Management The Package Management window contains a list of installed packages and the current version of each installed package The Hide License Only Packages checkbox in the upper right hand corner of the window is checked by default to hide packages installed only to upgrade the number of service licenses The buttons located below the list are used to deploy packages to a system remove packages from a system and view the contents of deployed packages They are described below Install Press this button to begin the process of deploying a package See Section 16 1 1 for more information Remove Press this button to delete the selected package from the sys tem See Section 16 1 2 for more information Properties Press this button to view the content
271. ment or Edit Announcement windows see Figure 14 15 and press the Add button An Add Phrase window similar to Figure 14 16 will be displayed Add Phrase Type Information Language english Voce female Type Outside Temp Sub Type Fahrenheit Station Description OutsideTempi Figure 14 16 Add an Information Component The Add Phrase window for information components contains the following fields Type The type of component Phrase or Information that is being added to the of component announcement Select the Information option if it is not already selected Language The language e g English Spanish TTY that is used to voice the compo nent Voice The voice used in the component e g female female_2 Type The type of information component Options include Barometric Pressure of information Barometric Trend Daily Rain Dew Point Heat Index Inside Humidity Inside Temp Outside Humidity Outside Temp Total Rain UV Index Wind Chill Wind Direction Wind Gust Wind Speed Time and Date Sub Type The unit of measurement used for this information component Unit options may include Default the standard sub type for this type of information com ponent as defined by the announcement service Imperial and Metric units and also Time and Date formats when appropriate Station The number 1 to 8 of the logical weather station this information compo nent will use to find its value Document 715025 214
272. move install fans s 1 Phillips head screwdriver remove install fans 13 2 2 Fan Replacement Procedure When looking at the APmax from the Front View the fans are numbered from left to right The corresponding power connectors are shown in Figure 13 4 Figure 13 3 APmax Front Power down the unit that needs to be repaired Record and tag all cables and wires connected to the repair unit Disconnect cables and wires lk i Remove the unit from the rack a Remove the Hex screws that secure the APmax brackets to the rack 5 Bench the unit with the Front Panel facing technician a Loosen the screws that secure the brackets to the APmax 5 per bracket b Remove the two screws in the back on the unit to remove top cover c Slide the top cover towards the back of the unit Remove cover Document 715025 196 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 13 Hardware Maintenance UU Fan il Fan 2 Figure 13 4 6 Remove fan from unit a Remove the fan wiring from the motherboard by pulling upward on the corresponding brown connector b Clip off connector with as much wire as possible to ease the removal of the old wire C Note The fan wires are taped to the casing underneath the motherboard Use pre caution when pulling from under the board Pull horizontally not upward when removing old wires Once fan wires are free clip off remaining wire up to f
273. mpute Networking Storage Big Data the button Ge CO 0 ale Overview Permissions APls amp auth APls Credentials Consent screen Push Monitoring Source Code Deploy amp Manage Compute Networking Storage Big Data Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 StreamingIV e API Library Enabled AP ls 6 Popular APIs 9 Google Cloud APIs Compute Engine API BigQuery API Cloud Storage API Cloud Datastore API Cloud Deployment Manager API Cloud DNS API More Google Apps APls Drive API Calendar API Gmail API Google Apps Marketplace SDK Admin SDK Contacts API CalDAV API Social APIs Google API Blogger API Google Pages API Google Domains API StreamingIV da Enable API Google AFI Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings Figure 11 14 Find the Google API Sign u Google Ma Google Ma Google Ma Google Ma Google Ple Google Ple Google Ma More Mobile AP Cloud Mes Google Ple Google Ple Google Ple YouTube A YouTube C YouTube A The Google API enables developers to build on top of the Google platform Learn more Explore this API 172 Figure 11 15 Enable the Google API Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings 11 Click on the APIs amp auth category and select the Credentials option This will show the Client ID for the web application as illustrated in Figure 11 16 Google Streami
274. ms L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration This chapter primarily describes how to configure SS7 for APmax systems SS7 also known as Signaling System 7 is an out of band signaling system used to provide basic routing informa tion call set up and other call termination functions Signaling is removed from the voice chan nel itself and put on a separate data network The APmax uses the SS7 network to transfer data related to many of the services provided by the APmax The SS7 Configuration interface in the APmax UI allows for the configuration of local point code linksets combined linksets SS7 rout ing Global Title Translation GTT information and AIN settings This chapter also describes the Service Configuration interface see Section 8 7 which is used to service settings e g subsystem numbers access numbers of APmax applications that do not have an independent configuration interface To access the SS7 Configuration interface right click on the system s icon 2 in the Com mand Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Configuration SS7 Config uration command as illustrated in Figure 8 1 The name of the system for which you are configuring ports will be displayed at the top of the SS7 Configuration window Figure 8 2 Mitchell 3 System Configuration Trunks tes System Maintenance F l System Time Manager
275. n e In Band The APmax tells the far side that out of band tone events are not supported and to use in band only e Negotiate The APmax does what the far side indicates it can do If the far side indiates out of band then the APmax will look for out of band tones This is the default value Use Authentication Indicates whether or not the APmax will challenge the caller to authenticate when a call comes in on the trunk group Document 715025 148 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration 9 5 MGCP Trunk Groups 9 5 1 Adding an MGCP Trunk Group To add an MGCP trunk group follow these steps 1 Press the Add button in the lower left hand corner of the Trunk Configuration window Figure 9 2 An Enter Trunk Group Info window similar to Figure 9 18 will be dis played Enter Trunk Group Into Trunk Group 1 4 h Signaling Type MGCP k Trunk Group Name MGCP 1 Direction Zawa ka Figure 9 18 Enter MGCP Trunk Group Info The four trunk group properties displayed in the Enter Trunk Group Info window are described in Section 9 1 2 Enter the new trunk group number in the Trunk Group field The trunk group number must be unique and 1f it is not an error will be shown Select MGCP in the Signaling Type drop down menu Enter the Trunk Group Name This field is optional Select the direction of call setup for this trunk group Se a a
276. n Service Select a default service e g Terminating Call Management Voice Mail to be configured for this service group This field is optional and may be left blank If a default service is selected then an additional service config uration window may be displayed when this service group is added The service description for the selected service will contain more information about any additional service configu ration needed for this subscriber Press the OK button in the Add New Service Group window The new service group zs will be displayed in the Subscribers list Advanced services may now be added to the service group see Section 26 1 1 9 Document 715025 331 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management 26 1 1 8 Deleting Service Groups To delete a service group select the service group name in the list on the left hand side of the Subscriber Management interface and press the Delete button located below the list A delete confirmation prompt will be displayed see Figure 26 28 Press the Yes button in the prompt to remove the service group and all other settings associated with the service group Press the No button to cancel the deletion Delete BSA Are you sure you wish to delete this Service Group Figure 26 28 Delete Service Group Prompt 26 1 1 9 Adding Subscriber Services Subscribers in the APmax system have one or more billing service
277. n CPU Ports 1 3 and 4 must be shared if they are used as a tie line so that they will remain available for their original purposes OAM amp P IPTV SIP Ports 5 and 6 are the default tie line ports and should remain so unless special circumstances require one to be used for other purposes Only one port is allowed to be shared at a time so one of the two tie line ports must be port 5 or port 6 Tie line configuration changes will not take effect until the Call Processing CPU and Administra tion CPU on each APmax unit has been restarted Ethernet Configuration APmax 9511 General DSP YARP Static Routes Tie Line Tie Line Ports Eth Switch Port Is Shared Figure 4 8 Tie Line Tab To change a tie line port click in a cell in the Eth Switch Port column and select the new port from the drop down list If a tie line port is to be shared then click in the Zs Shared cell for the port and change the status to Yes Document 715025 72 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration 4 1 2 Ethernet Configuration Wizard The Ethernet Configuration Wizard see Figure 4 9 is a series of screens that provide step by step configuration of communications for the selected APmax system This interface is accessed by pressing the Wizard button at the bottom of the Ethernet Configuration window To advance to the next screen select the Next button To go back a screen a
278. n Sep 13 12 46 PM ap_error lo Ba Ba Thu Sep 10 12 48 PM 10 27 2015 3 44 49 PM 10 27 2015 3 44 49 PM Admin Admin alarmd alarmd Clearing Alarm mcastbootd Stopped Setting Alarm mcastbootd Stopped to Critical 1445978689 10 27 2015 3 45 02 PM Call Proc weatherd Error OPERATION _FAILED reference 92 WeatherCanada cpp has occurred create TCP tunnel call Failed Domain Name 32423423 logicalStation 1 rc 113 reason No route to host Contact support 10 27 2015 3 45 04 PM 10 27 2015 3 45 04 PM 10 27 2015 3 45 05 PM Admin Admin Admin alarmd alarmd watchd Clearing Alarm mcastbootd Stopped Setting Alarm mcastbootd Stopped to Major 1445978704 Process mcastbootd has stopped 10 27 2015 3 45 05 PM Admin alarmd Clearing Alarm mcastbootd Stopped 10 27 2015 3 45 05 PM 10 27 2015 3 45 20 PM Admin Admin alarmd alarmd Setting Alarm mcastbootd Stopped to Critical 1445978705 Clearing Alarm mecastbootd Stopped 10 27 2015 3 45 20 PM 10 27 2015 3 45 21 PM Admin Admin alarmd watchd Setting Alarm mcastbootd Stopped to Major 1445978720 Process mcastbootd has stopped 10 27 2015 3 45 21 PM Admin alarmd Clearing Alarm mcastbootd Stopped 10 27 2015 3 45 21 PM Admin alarmd Setting Alarm mcastbootd Stopped to Critical 1445978721 10 27 2015 3 45 22 PM 10 27 2015
279. n existing linkset is Test On Startup Clicking in this property will display a drop down menu as illustrated in Figure 8 4 below Linkset ID 1 Description Linkset 1 Far End Point Code 10 20 30 inks Ka Figure 8 4 Test On Startup Drop down Menu Select Yes or No in the drop down to enable or disable testing on startup The Links section contains a list of the SS7 links that have been defined for the selected linkset Link properties are described in Section 8 2 3 Adding a Link to a Linkset Document 715025 106 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration 8 2 1 Adding a Linkset To add a linkset to the SS7 interface press the Add button below the list of linksets on the left hand side of the SS7 Configuration window An Add Linkset window similar to Figure 8 5 will be displayed Add Linkset Linkset ID Description Linkset 25 Far End Point Code 010 020 025 Test On Startup es L oe 11 Ga Figure 8 5 Add Linkset Window Populate the following fields in the Add Linkset window and press the OK button to create the new linkset Linkset ID Select an ID number between 1 and 16 for the new linkset This number must be unique within this APmax system Description Enter a short description of this linkset Far End Point Code Enter a far end point code for this linkset that is unique within this system Test On Startup Select Yes to enable testin
280. n list of available billing addresses Choose an address and press the OK button to complete the move to the new address e Detach Service Group This command is used to remove the service group from the cur rent billing service address and create a new subscriber account with the settings and ser vices of the service group Selecting this command will display the Detach Service Group window Figure 26 15 Enter a unique Billing Account Number and press the OK button to complete the upgrade of the service group to a subscriber account Move Service Group Billing Service Address 1000 Innovative Cr 7 Canes Figure 26 14 Move Service Group Detach Service Group E Biling Account Number foo Ceci Figure 26 15 Detach Service Group Service Menu Commands Right clicking on an advanced service icon will display a popup menu see Figure 26 16 with the Refresh Service Information command which can be selected to re query the APmax system for the currently selected service s data Document 715025 323 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management g subscriber Management Subscribers Phone Number 605555101 _ Find oe Jane Jones 1 983756293 7123 oe John Jones 1 238394994 7342 Jack Jones 1 134532344 7124 JonesCo 001 598234 2345 Ge Jim Jones 1 103988534 71 23 gt 1000 Innovative Dr 605 555 1070 ACD Cal
281. nal service e g APmax Voice Mail is packaged with that service See Part 5 Services for more information about APmax services Licensing License Viewer wo Subscriber Voice Mail Services See Part 5 License Viewer See Chapter 25 Subscriber Management See Chapter 26 Note The availability of the Subscriber Management menu command depends on the APmax UI Preferences see Section 3 3 4 Quick Launch Intemet Access Settings 9511 a Quick Launch Bar The Quick Launch bar is located on the right hand side of the APmax UI window see Figure 3 8 It tracks the most frequently used interfaces and displays the icons that represent the interfaces Users can start the programs listed in the Quick Launch bar with a single left click on the appropriate icon Right clicking on an icon will display a popup menu with an Open option that will start the program and a Remove option that will reset the counter for the selected program to zero effectively removing it from the list until the pro gram is started again The Quick Launch bar can be turned on or off using the Command History Document 715025 36 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started setting in the User Preferences interface see Section 3 3 4 All of the counters for the most used interfaces can be cleared by pressing the Reset button in the Advanced tab of the User Preferences int
282. nd make changes use the Back but ton The wizard may be exited at any time by pressing the Cancel button at the bottom of the screen 1 The first screen Figure 4 9 of the Ethernet Configuration Wizard contains settings related to the Internet subnetwork As with other screens in the wizard the Internet set tings screen contains a list of units found in the selected APmax system The WAN IP address for each unit can be changed by clicking in the Address cell next to the unit s row and entering a valid IP address in dotted notation i e 192 168 5 100 Ethernet Configuration Wizard Internet Ethemet Configuration Enter the Ethernet information for the Internet subnetwork frierner Address Adiunistration 192 168 5 100 Call Processing 192 168 5 101 DSP Subnet 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 5 2 WRAP 192 168 5 236 j Cancel Figure 4 9 Internet Settings Screen Below the list of units are the following fields Subnet Gateway VRRP Enter the subnet mask for the selected network interface The subnet mask is used to determine what IP addresses are on the same local network as this system interface The Subnet can be any valid subnet mask in dotted notation i e 255 255 255 0 Enter the IP address of the gateway to be used by this sys tem The gateway is used when the system needs to send an IP message to a destination that is not on the local net work The Gateway can be any valid IP address
283. new item into the Subscriber System Map press the Add button A window similar to Figure 3 47 will be displayed Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 58 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started Add Hew Mapping Mapping Information NPO Nes 605 555 AP System Mitchell wi Service Default Subscriber Systern k Mapping Type NPA No ka ETO Figure 3 47 Add New Mapping Window Enter the 6 digit NPA NXX you wish to add select the APmax system being mapped select the service being mapped and press the OK button The new entry will be displayed in the Sub scriber System Map window Multiple items may be imported from a user created text file that contains a list of NPA NXXs with one NPA NXX per line The hyphens in the text file s NPA NXXs are optional To import a text file of NPA NXXs click the dropdown arrow on the Add button and select the Import menu command as illustrated in Figure 3 48 A standard file selection window will be displayed allowing you to choose the text file containing the list of NPA NXXs Figure 3 48 Import Menu Command Once the text file is chosen an Add New Mapping List window see Figure 3 49 will be dis played The fields in the Add New Mapping List window function the same as those described for the Add New Mapping window Figure 3 48 Select the APmax system being mapped select the service being mapped and press the OK button
284. nfiguration Service Access Map H SIP Registration w 557 Configuration Figure 11 1 Internet Access Settings Menu Command The Internet Access Settings window is partitioned into six tabs General Figure 11 2 Web Por tal Figure 11 3 Password Management Figure 11 22 SSL Setup Figure 11 23 Administra tive Users Figure 11 28 and External DSP Addresses Figure 11 31 The settings and functions in these tabs are described in the following sections e Section 11 1 General Internet Access Settings Document 715025 161 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 e Section 11 2 Web Portal e Section 11 3 Password Management e Section 11 4 SSL Setup e Section 11 5 Administrative Users e Section 11 6 External DSP Addresses Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings 11 1 General Internet Access Settings The General tab Figure 11 2 is displayed by default when the Internet Access Settings interface is accessed This tab contains the service provider settings and e mail server settings that must be configured before APmax features that use the Internet will function properly Wa IS Mnternet Access Settings 4Pmax 9511 General Web Portal Password Management SSL Setup Administrative Users Provider Settings Service Provider Name Innovative Systems E mail Settings Service Provider ID ac c596 916F 45bc a
285. ng Started To change the active region click in the Regions drop down box ssn to display a list of regions and select the region to activate from the list The positions of APmax system icons in the Command Center will be preserved when switching from region to region 3 4 2 System Management The Defined APmax s tab in the APmax System Administration window see Figure 3 31 1s used to manage APmax regions and systems The left hand pane of the Defined APmax s tab contains a list of system regions that have been added to the APmax UI see Section 3 4 1 Selecting a system region in the left hand pane will display in the right hand pane the systems that have been defined for that region The system list has two columns System Name and System ID The System Name column con tains a short description of each system and the System ID column contains the unique number assigned to the system Each item in this list will correspond to a System icon in the Command Center window with the same name If no systems have been defined in the selected region then the contents of both columns will be empty T APmax System Administration Defined APmax s Master APmax Setup Single web Portal System Regions System List ei lt Default Region gt System Mame System ID South Dakota East l Mitchell 9511 C South Dakota West 2 7020 7020 S Nebraska 3073 9073 g 10001 10004 ep 10002 10002
286. ngTV Sign up for a free trial D KA InnovativeSyster Overview OAuth Client ID for web application Permissions Client ID 743730592041 trsfsal po9 uqqar8j2neg8vecru 3ufd3 apps googleusercontent com APIs amp auth Email address 743730592041 trsfsal po9 uqqar8j2neg8vecru 3ufd3 developer gserviceaccount com APIs Client secret dLinhOylqV6AZaRFkEevaC3 H Credentials Redirect URIs https iptv innovsys com oauth2callback m Learn more E TE Consent screen Java Script origins https iptv innovsys com reate new Client ID l Se l Edit settings Reset secret Download JSON Delete Monitoring Source Code Deploy amp Manage Public API access No keys found Compute Networking Storage Big Data Learn more Figure 11 16 Get the Client ID 12 Select the Client ID value and copy it 13 Go to the Internet Access Settings interface Web Portal tab HTML tab Figure 11 7 and paste the Client ID value into the Login Provider Key cell next to Google Close the Inter net Access Settings interface to save the key value 11 2 2 2 Obtaining a Facebook Provider Key A personal developer account with Facebook is necessary to obtain a login provider key from Facebook If you have a non developer Facebook account that you wish to use for development purposes then it will have to be converted into a developer account This process is explained in the procedure Note Actual screens and interfaces may vary slightly from those shown in this pr
287. nhibit status will be removed from the selected link T1 The DS port that is being monitored Channel The channel on the DS port that is being monitored The Refresh button located at the bottom of the SS7 Status window can be pressed at any time to retrieve the current SS7 link states from the APmax system Document 715025 301 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 23 SS7 Status Document 715025 302 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 24 Daily Log Analysis Tool Chapter 24 Daily Log Analysis Tool 24 1 Daily Log Analysis Tool The Daily Log Analysis Tool processes the APmax error log files on a daily basis and summa rizes the results into an easy to read overview of the APmax performance The log analysis report is a condensed useful accounting of the error logs from the previous day and draws attention to the most critical issues pertaining to the APmax performance at the beginning of the log analysis file These results are delivered to a previously configured e mail address Each APmax unit will generate a daily analysis report which will be delivered in separate e mails Each log analysis e mail also contains the previous days ap_error log file for the applicable unit The compressed attachment file may be no larger than 100 KB In the event that the file size sur passes this limit the feature will only deliver the last 1 000
288. nnouncements tab see Section 14 1 6 Restor ing Original Announcements An announcement with a built in component is shown in Figure 14 17 Edit Announcement General Announcement Informatian Announcement Description CLA455 Announcement 1 Announcement Text custom announcement 1 Type Built In w b AC Delete Built In Properties Operation Type Farameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter A k Custom D D D D Figure 14 17 Built In Component Properties 14 1 5 Testing Announcements The Test Announcement interface see Figure 14 18 is used to listen to announcements through PC speakers to verify the components of the announcements are playing correctly The Test Announcement interface 1s accessed by pressing the Test button within the Add Announcement window see Section 14 1 1 Adding Announcements or Edit Announcement window see Section 14 1 2 Editing Announcements HE Test Announcement Announcement Input Values Input Value Annoucement 6059956120 Six Zero Five Silence 100 ms Nine Silence 100 ms Announcement Text our calls will be forwarded to Six ero Five Silence 100 me Nine Nine Five Silence 100 me Sit One Two Zera Silence 450 ms If this number is corect dial 1 If this number is not correct dial 0 Please dial now silence 300 me tone 400 Hz 300 ms Silence 100 ms Figure 14 18 Test Announcement Window Document 715025 216 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APma
289. novative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration To configure the SSN select the Screen List Edit tab and press the Add button An Add SSN win dow see Figure 8 32 will be displayed Enter an SSN value from 0 to 254 select an Event Type e g Tcap Response and press the OK button Add 33h Event Type Tcap Response MM wiem A Cancel Figure 8 32 Add Screen List Edit SSN To remove the SSN from the Screen List Edit tab select the SSN and press the Delete button at the bottom of the tab 8 7 3 Basic Conferencing The Basic Conferencing tab Figure 8 33 is used to manage the 7 or 10 digit designated access number that is dialed by Basic Conferencing Service users See the Basic Conferencing Service Description for more information about this service Ge service Configuration 4Priax 9511 Default Trigger Screen List Edit Basic Conferencing Remote IF Event Type 6055551010 Call Start 6055551011 Call Start E Add Delete Figure 8 33 Basic Conferencing Tab To configure the access number for this service press the Add button at the bottom of the Basic Conferencing tab An Add DN window see Figure 8 34 will be displayed Enter a 7 or 10 digit directory number select an Event Type e g Call Start and press the OK button Add DN Event Type Call Start Z a Cancel Figure 8 34 Add DN Document 715025
290. nslation Other options are available through the drop down menu e Final Translation no further Global Title Translation will need to be performed on the SS7 message after this trans lation Final Translation amp Alter SSN no further Global Title Translation will need to be performed on the SS7 message after this translation Set the called SSN in the message to the value specified in the Subsystem Number field from the Translation Type to Subsystem Number Translation table Intermediate Translation the translation performed here does not result in the final destination address of the mes sage Perform the translation specified in these tables and mark the SS7 message as requiring additional global title translations at the point code specified in the Primary Route field Document 715025 115 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration Primary Route The primary 9 digit SS7 physical network address This is the SS7 address to use when the associated Global Address is found in the SS7 message s Global Title information The value of this field is set by clicking in the Primary Route cell and selecting a destination point code from the drop down list as illustrated in Figure 8 15 The destination point codes avail able in the drop down list include the Local Point Code defined in the General tab see Section 8 1 of the SS7 Configuration window and the Fa
291. nstallation CD see Section 2 2 e Start the APmax UI which initiates an automatic check for updates Subsequent update checks will occur automatically every 24 hours after startup See Section 2 3 1 Automatic Updates for more information e Manually check for updates from within the APmax UI see Section 2 3 2 On Demand Updates Note The APmax UI must have access to the Internet to update without an installation CD 2 3 1 Automatic Updates Upon startup of the APmax UI the Innovative Systems FTP site is checked for updated APmax UI files If one or more updates are found then a prompt to download and install the updated files will be displayed see Figure 2 20 The prompt contains a list of the files that will be updated along with release notes for the new file versions Document 715025 23 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 2 Installing the APmax UI 10 APmax Ul Updates are Available Release Notes NotifyPlus_V5 Version 5 4 0 14 Fixed a problem where Carrier codes are only displayed as 3 digits f leading digit is 0 SubscriberManagement Version 4 1 0 9 Fired problem that would produce odd subscriber hierarchy when searching by Name TCMAdmm Version 3 0 0 28 Fix a problem that the UI would not always save data VMailSubMemt V4 Version 4 4 0 52 Fined No longer attempts to generate an initial action list f the VMailSubMemt_V3 Version 5 4 0 63 Fir
292. nt Lied Export Document me Send via E Mlail w PDE File Vi Exit MIHT File Eo GEESS RTF File Ryan Tu 605 5 SL File laene Vo 918 3 SL a File John Ce 605 5 CS File TestSub 605 5 Text File Bob Jon 605 5 Image File Jonesto 605 5 Figure 17 27 Send E mail Menu 17 2 2 Copying Report Data to the Clipboard Report Viewer data can be copied from the results table to the clipboard by following these steps 1 Open a report in Report Viewer 2 Press the Results button or use the Preview popup command to display the contents of the report 3 Do one of the following a To copy the contents of an individual cell right click on the cell and select the Copy command in the popup menu illustrated in Figure 17 28 Name Default Phone Mu Service List Mail Box Number Options Pacl k Jane Jones 605 555 1008 Platinurn Greg Goldammer 605 555 1021 605 555 1021 Platinurn Gene vold 605 555 1022 voicemail 605 555 1022 Platinurn Ryan Tupper 605 555 1026 Voicemail 605 555 1026 Platinurn John Cersosina 605 555 1027 voicemail 605 555 1027 Platinurn Becky Weier 605 555 1028 voicemail 605 555 1028 Platinum Figure 17 28 Copying a Cell b To copy the contents of one row right click on the row indicator box on the left hand side of the row and select the Copy command in the popup menu c To copy the contents of multiple rows hold the Shift or Ctrl key down while left click ing on the rows and then right click
293. nt 715025 193 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 13 Hardware Maintenance e Soe ae ja te as S 3 Kr 5 SeA Eer Figure 13 1 Remove Vent Cover 13 1 2 Remove Foam Padding Once the vent cover has been removed remove the foam padding behind it using the same instrument Pinch the padding and pull it back see Figure 13 2 Document 715025 194 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 13 Hardware Maintenance Figure 13 2 Remove Foam Padding 13 1 3 Remove Dust From Foam Padding Blow on the foam padding or use compressed air to remove any dust Reverse the steps to finish the process and then repeat these steps for the remaining air vents 13 2 Fan Replacement CAUTION The APmax contains sensitive electronic components that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Please follow Telephone Equipment ESD abatement procedures when handling equipment Document 715025 195 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 13 Hardware Maintenance 13 2 1 Recommended Tools e 2 Philips head screwdriver for power and alarm wiring loosen tighten brackets on chassis cover e 1 8 slot flat head screwdriver to remove install connectors on screwlocks e 5 16 socket nut driver to remove install APmax unit on rack s Small 4 or 6 long nose locking pliers re
294. nt 715025 327 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management Enter the information of the new billing service address into the fields described below of the Add New Billing Service Address window and press the OK button A new billing service address icon will be displayed in the Subscribers list below the subscriber record The billing service address can be edited in the General Info tab see Section 26 1 2 Advanced services may now be added to the new billing service address see Section 26 1 1 9 Name The name or short description of the subscriber that is used in various interfaces to help identify the subscriber This field is read only and can only be edited when the subscriber record is selected see Section 26 1 2 System Select the APmax system on which all services added to this address will be located Phone Number Enter the default 10 digit directory number associated with this billing address The default phone number can be changed by adding a new 10 digit phone number in the Address Info tab see Section 26 1 3 and then selecting that new number in the Default Phone Number field in the General Info tab see Section 26 1 2 Shortened phone numbers ranging from 7 to 9 digits may be automatically added to the Address Info tab depending on the settings in the Phone Number Format interface described in Section 12 2 Billing Account The account num
295. nt 715025 338 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management Active Whether or not this Internet Access account is active for this billing service address Select Yes or No The default value is No Password Change Set to Yes to force the user to change their password the next time they log into the Web Portal Service user interface The default value is No There are three buttons in the nternet tab Setup Web Portal and Unlock The Setup button is used to configure the username and password of the account and is described in Section 26 1 4 1 The Web Portal button is used to view the Web Portal Configuration interface see Section 26 1 4 2 Web Portal Setup for this subscriber The Unlock button is used to manually reset the failed login count for an Internet Access account to zero For more information on Internet Access account security see Section 11 3 Password Management 26 1 4 1 Internet Access Setup Press the Setup button in the Internet tab of the Subscriber Management interface to open the Internet Access Settings window Figure 26 41 which is used to create or modify the username and password of the selected account Internet Access Settings Password Strength ji Weak OK cancel e Figure 26 41 Internet Access Settings The account properties in the Internet Access Settings window are described below Sign In Name The username of th
296. nterface 1 Locate the APmax UI installation CD 2 Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive The CD contains an Autorun file which will automatically initiate the APmax UI installation procedure when the CD is inserted into the CD ROM drive To ensure that the Autorun file is activated you should be logged into Windows before you insert the CD If you already have the CD inserted in your CD ROM drive or the Autorun feature does not activate press the Start button in the lower left corner of the screen and select the Run command A dialog box will appear Enter the following path in the dialog box and click the OK button to begin loading the software onto the PC lt CD drive letter gt APmax setup exe 3 The APmax UI has been developed using Microsoft NET technology and therefore the NET Framework version 4 5 must be installed on the computer If the appropriate run time environment is not available on the computer then a prompt to install the correct NET Framework see Figure 2 1 will be displayed If the correct NEI Framework is already installed then the APmax UI installation Welcome screen see Figure 2 7 will be displayed If the APmax UI Welcome screen Figure 2 7 is displayed continue to the next step in this procedure Document 715025 13 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 2 Installing the APmax UI APmax InstallShield Wizard Sy AFmax requires the Following items
297. nts is shown in Figure 14 15 Add Announcement General Announcement Informatian Announcement Description Current weather conditions For logical weather station 1 Announcement Text lt i currently Outside empStationl silence 250 ms degrees Fahrenheit with OutsideHumidityS tation percent relative humidity silence 450 ms iwindDirectionStation1 at WindSpeedStation miles per hour silence 450 ms ARETE Selected Information Properties H Information Type Information Sub Type Logical Station Language Voice P TotalRain Default english female Language 0 Say Value english Female Figure 14 15 Information Component Properties Document 715025 213 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager Selecting an information component in the Announcement Text section of the Add Announcement window or Edit Announcement window illustrated in Figure 14 15 will display the details of the information component in the Selected Information Properties section of the window The prop erties shown in the Selected Information Properties section are described below Figure 14 16 Of these properties only the Information Sub Type and Logical Station values can be changed Information components can be added or deleted from new or existing announcements To add an information component to an announcement select Information in the Type selection box of the Add Announce
298. nuity tone to be viewed and adjusted The tone can be set to either 1780 Hz or 2010 Hz The default inbound transmit continuity tone is 2010 Hz Out Transmit Tone This field allows the outbound ISUP trunk transmit continuity tone to be viewed and adjusted The tone can be set to either 1780 Hz or 2010 Hz The default outbound transmit continuity tone is 1780 Hz 9 3 3 ISUP Trunk Members This section contains information on adding and removing trunk members trunks for ISUP trunk groups Trunk members are viewed added and deleted from within the Trunk Members tab of the Trunk Configuration window When an ISUP trunk group is selected in the list on the left hand side of the window all of the currently defined trunk members under the selected group will be shown in this tab see Figure 9 13 General Settings Trunk Members Channel CIC ee SF Ooms om on Be Bo Boe on Go PA p Eech Figure 9 13 ISUP Trunk Members The list in the Trunk Members tab shows each trunk and its APmax Unit T1 channel and assigned Circuit ID Code CIC To delete trunk members from a trunk group select the trunks you wish to remove in the list and press the Delete button at the bottom of the Trunk Members tab A delete confirmation prompt will be displayed see Figure 9 14 Press the Yes button in the prompt to complete the deletion Continm Delete 4re you sure you want to delete the selected trunk member s Figure 9 14 Delete Con
299. o select the time zone in which the sys tem resides Time Zone Time Time at the selected time zone This time is calculated based on the current computer time and the selected time zone The system time will be set to this time when the Set Time button is pressed Document 715025 86 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 5 System Time Manager If this is the first time you have used this function the Time Zone setting will default to the time zone currently set on the APmax UI PC If you have previously used this function to set the system time the Time Zone setting will show the time zone selected at the last use of this function 2 To select the time zone in which the system resides click the with the left mouse button to access the drop down menu Use the scroll bars on the right side of the drop down menu to examine the entire list of time zones CH System Time Manager amp Priax 9511 System Time NTF Configuration Curent Times Local Time Friday April 13 2012 8 42 49 4M Unit System Time Time Zone Friday April 13 2012 8 42 40 4M U5 Central Friday April 13 2012 6 42 40 4M U5 Central Select System Time one Time Zone U5 Centra Canada Atlantic Time Zone Time Canada New fourndland Canada Saskatchewan Facitic blidway US4lastka US Aleutian US 4nzona ERZ US Eastern US East Indiana US ZU avait US Indiana Starke US Michigan US AM oupntoam
300. ocedure depending on the browser used and changes made by Facebook to the developer interface 1 Go to https developers facebook com If you are logged in then continue to Step 2 e If you are not logged into a Facebook account or you need to create an account then click on Log In in the upper right hand corner of the Facebook developer page The login page will be displayed Log into an existing account or choose Sign up for Face book to create a Facebook account and then go back to https developers face book com Document 715025 173 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings 2 Move the mouse pointer over My Apps at the top of the screen to show one of the drop down menus seen in Figure 11 17 If the menu option says Register as a Developer then click on it complete the registration and continue to the next step If the menu option says Add a New App then click on it and continue EZ Facebook Developers x CG B https developers facebook com Fj Developers My Apps Products Docs Register ag Developer Fa Facebook Developers x CG D https developers facebook com Fi Developers My Apps Products Docs Add a lt i Facebook Analytics Facebook Analytics Figure 11 17 My Apps Menu Options 3 The Add a New App screen will be displayed Figure 11 18 Click the Website option to display the Quick
301. oice the parame ter Voice The voice used in the parameter e g female female_2 Document 715025 212 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager Phrase The phrase that will be voiced Only phrases that meet the selected Lan guage and Voice criteria will be available Click in this field to display a drop down list of available phrases and select the desired phrase The drop down list can be sorted by clicking on the Fragment heading Also typing while the drop down list is displayed will fil ter the list to show only phrases beginning with the entered text Press the OK button when all changes are completed to save the changes and close the Edit Announcement window 14 1 4 3 Information Components Announcement information components are used in conjunction with the APmax Weather Plus Service see the Weather Plus Service Description for more information to play current weather readings from weather stations or current date and time Consequently an information compo nent in an announcement may say different things each time the announcement is played For example if the OutsideTemp1 information component is supposed to give the outside tempera ture from logical weather station 1 then the OutsideTemp portion of the announcement will change depending on the current temperature at logical weather station 1 An announcement with multiple information compone
302. oject 4 Click on the APIs amp auth category to expand it and select the Credentials option as illus trated in Figure 11 10 Document 715025 168 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings Sg Credentials StreamingTy X NaS Ka CG D https console developers google com project streamingty 995 apiul credential Google StreamingIV e Overview OAuth No client IDs found Permissions OAuth 2 0 allows users to share specific data with you for example APls amp auth contact lists while keeping their usernames passwords and other information private APIs Learn more Credentials Consent screen Create new Client ID Fush Monitoring i Fublic API access No keys found Source Code i Use of this key does not require any user action or consent does not Deploy amp Manage grant access to any account information and is not used for Compute authorization Networking Learn more Storage a Create new Key Big Data Figure 11 10 Credentials 5 Press the Create new Client ID button to display the Create Client ID screen Figure 11 11 Create Client ID APPLICATION TYPE Web application Accessed by web browsers over a network Service account Calls Google APIs on behalf of your application instead of an end user Learn more Installed application Runs on a desktop computer or handheld device like Android or iPhone
303. ompt is displayed then fol low the instructions below Figure 2 1 in Section 2 1 Installation Procedure to complete the NET Framework installation and then continue with this upgrade procedure 4 The APmax UI setup program will now validate the existing installation and prepare for the upgrade process While this is in progress a screen similar to Figure 2 15 will be dis played InstallShield Wizard Preparing to Install CH APmax Setup is preparing the InstallShield Vizard which will guide you through the program setup process Please wat Cancel Figure 2 15 Installation Setup Screen When the installation is ready to begin the following screen will be displayed Press the Next button to continue the installation i APmax InstallShield Wizard Resuming the InstallShield Wizard for APmax The InstallShield R Wizard will complete the installation of 4Prax on your computer To continue click Mex Figure 2 16 Resume Installation Screen Document 715025 21 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 2 Installing the APmax UI 5 The installation will now copy the program files to the appropriate locations on the target computer The status of the installation will be illustrated by the progress bar displayed in Figure 2 17 i APmax InstallShield Wizard Installing 4Pmax The program features you selected are being installed Please wait while the
304. on 3 4 APmax System Administration and follow the instructions to add the APmax to the UI 12 Go to Chapter 5 System Time Manager and set the time in the APmax The time must be set for the system to complete boot up Allow 5 minutes for boot up 13 Go to Chapter 4 Network Configuration and follow the instructions to configure the ethernet interfaces on the APmax 14 Go to Chapter 7 Digital Carrier Configuration and configure the DS1s on the APmax 15 Hardware Installation is complete Document 715025 12 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 2 Installing the APmax UI Chapter 2 Installing the APmax UI 2 1 Installation Procedure NOTES e Before you begin the APmax UI User Interface software installation it is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs and disable any anti virus software for the duration of the installation Otherwise the APmax UI installation may fail s The full APmax UI software package consists of one CD ROM disc and requires one of the following operating systems Windows 7 Professional Windows 7 Enter prise Windows 7 Ultimate Windows 8 Pro or Windows 8 Enterprise This section contains step by step instructions for new installations of APmax UI on a single computer Instructions for upgrading an existing installation of the APmax UI can be found in Section 2 2 Upgrade Procedure Install APmax User I
305. on at the bottom of the window will be disabled if the system is up to date but will be enabled if local files are used for the upgrade see Advanced Settings below Base Package AudioSubSystem Package Unit 1 Version 4 3 1040 Unit 1 Version 4 5 30 Za Unit 2 Version 4 3 1040 Unit 2 Version 4 5 30 Available Version 4 3 104 Available Version 4 3 104 Figure 18 3 Packages Up to Date Advanced Settings The Advanced Settings section Figure 18 4 of the System Upgrade Manager interface can be expanded to customize the actions that take place during the upgrade process EN sstem Upgrade Manager 4Prax 9051 Eno Please read the following procedure prior to attempting to upgrade a system After reading please contact Innovative Systems technical support with any questions about the steps contained in the procedure This procedure will upgrade the Firmware Base QudioSubSystem and Telephony packages The upgrade by default will move traffic between units to ensure a non outage upgrade Note Thie procedure will take between 2 5 and 4 5 hours to complete Upgrade Procedure Documentation Base Package AudioSubSystem Package Unit 1 Version 4 3 64 t Unit 1 Yersion 4 3 64 t Unit 2 Version 4 3 64 t Unit 2 Version 4 3 64 t Available Yersion 4 3 104 Available Yersior 4 3 104 Advanced Settings Databases a Ferom Database Backup Upgrade Files w Download Automatically Specify Local Files TAR File Package P
306. on the network in the APmax Systems win dow see Figure 3 35 Pressing the Advanced button will display the Direct Unit Query window see Figure 3 34 Direct Unit Query Admin IP Address e add Unit Admin IF Address 172 23 12 59 172 235 1261 Figure 3 34 Direct Unit Query Window The Direct Unit Query window allows you to find a system by entering the IP address of the Admin CPU To do this fill out the Admin IP Address field press the Add button and then press the OK button The Direct Unit Query window will attempt to find the entered IP address on the network If a system is found that matches the entered IP address it will be displayed in the APmax Systems window see Figure 3 35 APmax Systems System ID 9 Unit Number Serial Number Call Processing CPU IF Address Admin CPU IP Address bi CEM440600052 172 23 12 59 1 2 25 12 60 2 CEM440600055 172 23 12 61 172 23 12 62 Figure 3 35 APmax Systems Window The APmax Systems window is displayed when systems are found on the network using the Find or Advanced button functions in the System Information window Systems found using these methods are displayed in a list within the window To the left of each system row is a tree symbol that can be clicked on to display more details about the system as illustrated in Figure 3 35 These details include the Unit Number Serial Number Call Processing CPU IP Address and Admin CPU IP Address of each unit in the system If t
307. on the row indicator box on the left hand side of a selected row and select the Copy command in the popup menu illustrated in Figure 17 29 Document 715025 260 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer Service List Mail Box Number Options Package List Description 605 555 1021 voicemail 605 555 1021 Gene vold 605 555 1022 voicemail 605 555 1022 Platinurn Ryan Tupper 605 555 1026 Voicemail 605 555 1026 Platinurn John Cersosina 605 555 1027 voicemail 605 555 1027 Platinurn Becky Weier 605 555 1026 voicemail 605 555 1028 Platinum Figure 17 29 Copying Multiple Rows 4 Paste the copied data into a document or spreadsheet 17 3 Report Management Operations The operations used to manage Report Viewer report files are found in the following sections e Section 17 3 1 Saving Reports e Section 17 3 2 Renaming Reports e Section 17 3 3 Password Protecting Reports e Section 17 3 4 Deleting Reports e Section 17 3 5 Scheduling Report Emails 17 3 1 Saving Reports Report configurations 1 e draw control contents columns criteria can be saved by pressing the Save button see Figure 17 30 located in the lower right hand corner of the Report Viewer win dow Ifthe report has not been saved previously a standard Save As window will be displayed Enter the file name and press the Save button in the Save As window to create the new report file Figure 17 3
308. only one Called Area To assign one or more Called Numbers to a Called Area use one of the following methods 1 Drag and Drop a C Select one or more numbers in the Called Numbers list The selection is accomplished via the normal Windows list selection mechanisms That is a single number is selected by clicking on that number in the list Multiple contiguous numbers are selected by holding the lt Shift gt key down while clicking on the last number in the range to be selected Multiple non contiguous numbers are selected by holding the lt Ctrl gt key down while selecting multiple desired numbers Click and hold down the left hand mouse button on one of the selected numbers While holding down the left hand mouse button drag the selection to one of the area names in the Called Areas list When the desired Called Area name is highlighted release the left hand mouse button to drop the Called Number s into the Called Area 2 Add to Area button a Select one or more numbers in the Called Numbers list using the same actions explained in the first step of the Drag and Drop instructions above Select one area name in the Called Areas list by clicking on the name with the left hand mouse button Press the Add to Area button ki between the Called Numbers and Called Areas list When the assignment is performed the selected Called Numbers will be displayed below the tar get Called Area illustrating that these n
309. ontrol Point SCP etc may use the same map number This map number is used in one or more Translation Type To Subsystem Number Translations table entries so that those types of messages are translated to the same addresses Global Address One through 10 digit Global Address number This is the Glo bal Title information in the SS7 message to convert to the SS7 address specified in the Primary Route This value is typically an NPA NPA NXX or 10 digit phone number Typically three different lengths 3 6 or 10 digits of Global Address entries may be made for each map number from within the Global Title Table section For example GT entries for map number 2 may contain the Global Addresses 605 605 995 605 996 605 995 6120 These entries would constitute the allowed 3 different lengths of Global Address 3 digit 6 digit and 10 digit Global Addresses A subsequent attempt to enter a Global Address that was not 3 6 or 10 digits will result in an error message However up to four different lengths from 0 to 10 digits of Global Address entries may be made for a map number if the map number is entered in the Advanced tab see Section 8 5 3 and set up with custom map key lengths prior to entering the map number in the Global Title Table sec tion Function Selector This field indicates what actions will be performed by this trans lation and in what state the SS7 message will be after transla tion The default action is Final Tra
310. opup menu e Network Time Protocol Section 5 2 Systems may use Network Time Protocol NTP to periodically synchronize the system time with the clocks of computers over the Internet In a multiunit configuration Unit 1 should be configured as an NTP server for each additional unit in the APmax system configuration Systems also use T1 synchronization to maintain accurate system time T1 synchronization occurs autonomously when one or more T1 s are connected to a system The system uses the very stable and accurate T1 signals to regulate its internal clock Therefore once the system time is set manually the system will continue to keep accurate time as long as the T1 s stay in ser vice NOTE If there are no T1 circuits connected to the system to provide clock synchroniza tion and the Network Time Protocol method is not being used to periodically update the system time then the time should be set manually see Section 5 1 on at least a weekly basis to ensure the system is keeping accurate time 5 1 Manually Setting the System Time Network Time Protocol see Section 5 2 is the recommended mechanism to update the system time If the system time is set manually and there are no T1 circuits connected to the system to provide clock synchronization then you should perform this function weekly to ensure the system is keeping accurate time To manually set the time of a system based on the current PC time complete the followin
311. or information components in the Announcement Input Values section The text in this section will be updated whenever an input value is changed Pressing the Play button at the bottom of the window will play the test announcement through your PC speakers if your PC has wave audio sound capabilities Pressing the Stop button or clos ing the Test Announcement window will discontinue the playing of the test announcement Table 14 1 Sample Test Input Value Formats Silence X tO XXXXX x to xxxxx depending on the maximum number on the maximum number of seconds specified in the parameter definition Day Current Day of the Week 0 6 Sunday Saturday ISO Date yyyymmdd Number x where x is 0 n and nis a max number value specified in the parameter definition Document 715025 217 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Item Type Digits Chapter 14 Announcement Manager x where x is a string of n digits and nis a num ber specified in the parameter definition Variable Digits x where x is a String of 0 to n digits and nis a ance specified in the parameter definition Directory Number String of 10 digits Time 12 hour Time 24 hour Timestamp12 Timestamp23 Inside Outside Temperature HHMM HH 00 23 AM phrase will be played if HH is ee than 12 and PM if HH is 12 or greater HHMM HH 00 23 AM and PM phrases will not be Ri yyyymmddHH
312. ot already selected The language e g English Spanish TTY that is used to voice the phrase The voice used in the phrase e g female female 21 The phrase that will be added to the announcement Only phrases that meet the selected Language and Voice criteria will be available Click in this field to display a drop down list of available phrases and select the desired phrase as illustrated in Figure 14 13 The drop down list can be sorted by clicking on the Phrase Text column heading Also typing while the drop down list is displayed will filter the list to show only phrases begin ning with the entered text Add Phrase Phrase Text Inflection We re sorry Che number you have dialed is incorrect None Your Selective Call Rejection None service is now off None Your Selective Call Acceptance None F Your Selective Call Forwarding Mone Your Simultaneous Ringing Mone Service is now on Mone t EJ Figure 14 13 Phrases Drop down List Populate the fields in the Add Phrase window and press the nsert button to add the phrase com ponent to the announcement To delete a phrase component from an announcement select the phrase in the Announcement Text section of the Add Announcement or Edit Announcement window and press the Delete button Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 211 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager 14 1 4 2 Parameter Components
313. overview of the APmax UI software see Chapter 3 Getting Started A more in depth discussion of configur ing communications time and other features for APmax systems is provided in Part 2 System Configuration System Requirements A personal computer PC is required for the APmax UI The APmax UI is used to manage one or more APmax systems The APmax UI PC should at a minimum meet the following require ments e Windows 7 Professional Windows 7 Enterprise Windows 7 Ultimate Windows 8 Pro or Windows 8 Enterprise e Microsoft NET Framework 4 5 s 1 5 GHz Intel Core 2 Duo or faster processor e 4 GB RAM e 40 GB free space on hard disk drive e Gigabit Network card e Internet connection In general a PC exceeding the above requirements in processor RAM and disk drive capacities is strongly recommended Increasing the capacity of any or all of these elements will result in faster APmax UI software response thereby increasing user productivity and satisfaction Document 715025 1 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 In addition to the above requirements the APmax UI PC must be able to connect to the net work s on which the APmax systems reside See Chapter 4 Network Configuration for more information on configuring communications with APmax systems The APmax UI has been developed using the latest Microsoft NET technology and must run under the Microsoft
314. ow e Section 12 1 Format Settings e Section 12 2 Subscriber Settings 12 1 Format Settings The Format Settings tab Figure 12 2 1s used to format the playback of phone numbers in announcements Document 715025 187 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 12 Phone Number Format Zi led Phone Number Format 4Pmax 9511 Format Settings Subscriber Settings Phone Number Length Settings Display Format ddd ddd dddd Trunk Routing Configuration Numbers A5 Add IN Deet add Delete Figure 12 2 Format Settings Tab The left hand side of the tab contains a list of the phone number lengths e g 7 digit 10 digit 11 digit which have already been formatted for this system Additional phone number lengths can be formatted by pressing the Add button below the list to display the Add Number Format win dow Figure 12 3 filling out the fields described below and pressing the OK button Digit Length Enter a phone number length from 5 to 24 digits Display Format Use the letter d indicating a digit and dashes to format the phone number Digits in the phone number are voiced with either a normal voice or an end ing inflection depending on where they are located in the format Dashes in the format will result in a pause in the phone number announcement For example if the Digit Length is 10 then a possible format would be ddd ddd dddd wit
315. ow be available to be added to announcements 14 2 2 Deleting Custom Phrases Custom phrases can be deleted from the APmax by selecting the phrase m the Phrases tab and pressing the Delete button at the bottom of the tab A delete confirmation prompt see Figure 14 26 will be displayed Press the Yes button in the prompt to continue the deletion or No to cancel the deletion Confirm Delete K 4re you sure you want to delete the selected fragment Figure 14 26 Delete Confirmation Prompt If the selected phrase is being used by one or more announcements an error message see Figure 14 27 will be displayed and the phrase will not be deleted The announcements using the phrase can be found by pressing the Find button at the bottom of the Phrases tab Error Deleting Figure 14 27 Phrase in Use Error Document 715025 223 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager Document 715025 224 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 15 FTP Transfer Service Chapter 15 FTP Transfer Service 15 1 FTP Transfer Service The APmax provides a common FTP service for archiving voice files logs and other files It supports a number of options and can be used to automatically archive files from the APmax to an FTP server The user interface described in this chapter is used to configure file transfer tasks on the APmax FTP se
316. ow to save the settings Port The eLation TCP server port number Document 715025 81 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 4 Network Configuration Address The eLation TCP IP address Setting this address to 0 0 0 0 will disable the service stop connection attempt error mes sage output and clear the connection alarm the next time it tries to connect 4 4 Test DSP Access The Test DSP Access tool is used to initiate a communication test with available DSPs using the echo server command link message To open the Test DSP Access interface right click on the system s icon E in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Configuration Network Configu ration Test DSP Access command as illustrated in Figure 4 24 The name of the system you are configuring will be displayed at the top of the Test DSP Access window Figure 4 25 gt System Configuration Si ACD Configuration fe System Maintenance GH Call Logging Portal Settings bat System Surveillance Diagnostic Settings Configuration DSP Configuration Za Internet Access Settings Network Configuration d i Notification Center Management Notify Configuration amp OCM Configuration Figure 4 24 Test DSP Access Menu Command Test DSP Access APmax 9511 DSP Echo Server 172 253 123 115 Test Size Bytes Figure 4 25 Test DSP Access
317. p The default value is the telephone keypad numbers corresponding to the first three letters in the sub scriber name that is entered when the subscriber or service group record is first created These digits will not be automati cally updated if the name is edited but may be manually changed to any string of digits up to nine digits in length The APmax system on which this billing service address or ser vice group record exists This field cannot be changed Any changes to these settings can be saved immediately by pressing the Save button Settings will be automatically saved when the Subscriber Management interface is closed another sub scriber is selected the Find button is used or the Clear button is used Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 335 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management In addition to managing the standard billing service address settings the General Info tab 1s also used to display Census Track and Block information and Innovative Systems GIS Geographic Information System location data for billing service addresses This data will only be available if the Innovative Systems GIS application is installed on the computer running the APmax UI soft ware See the Innovative Systems GIS support documentation for more information 26 1 3 Address Info The Address Info tab contains all of the phone numbers e mail addresses SIP addresses and Centrex extensions
318. press the OK button in the Web Portal HTML window to display a save prompt and then press the Yes button in the prompt to apply the changes or the No button to close the window and discard all changes When editing an existing portal configuration the factory default Portal HTML file that was installed with the APmax system can be restored by pressing the Restore button This will display a warning message Press the Yes button in the warning to overwrite the existing custom Portal HTML file with the default file or press the No button to cancel the restore 11 2 1 2 Editing a Portal The settings of the selected portal may be viewed or changed by pressing the Edit button which displays the Portal Configuration window shown in Figure 11 6 The portal settings in this win dow are described above in Section 11 2 1 1 PortalCantigForrm Top Banner PHG New Current Fortal HTML Edit Restore C K Cancel Figure 11 6 Portal Configuration Edit 11 2 1 3 Deleting a Portal To delete a portal configuration select the portal in the Portal Name list and press the Delete but ton below the list A delete confirmation prompt will be displayed Choose Yes in the prompt to remove the portal Note The default Portal entry cannot be deleted 11 2 2 HTML Tab The HTML tab Figure 11 7 is used to enter the generated keys that are required by service pro viders such as Facebook or Google to ve
319. pulated with the databases columns and criteria defined m that report Figure 17 22 Recent Report Selection Box To view a report that includes all of the databases columns and criteria in the draw control press the Results button in the lower right hand corner of the Report Viewer window A screen similar to Figure 17 23 will be displayed The report will have columns for each database field that was checked in the Columns tab of each icon in the draw control Flatinum subscriber Report Drag a column header here to group by that column Name Default Phone Mu Service List Mail Box Number Options Package List Description Jane Jones voicemail Greg Goldammer 605 555 1021 Voicemail 605 555 1021 Platinurn Gene vold 605 555 1022 voicemail 605 555 1022 Platinurn Ryan Tupper 605 555 1026 Voicemail 605 555 1026 Platinurn John Cersosina 605 555 1027 voicemail 605 555 1027 Platinurn Becky Weier 605 555 1026 voicemail 605 555 1028 Platinum Greg Goldammer 605 555 1054 TerminatingcallManagement 605 555 1054 Platinurn Count 21 ZS To Excel Preview Figure 17 23 Report with Multiple Databases Alternatively a report can be viewed that contains only the columns and criteria specified for one database icon This is accomplished by right clicking on a single icon in the draw control to invoke a popup menu and selecting the Preview command in the menu as illustrated in Figure 17 24 Document 715025 257 Innovative Systems
320. quired for this subscriber to have full access to the Web Portal Service user interfaces see the Integrated Web Portal Subscriber Management section in the Web Portal Service Description for more information Document 715025 340 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management NOTE Notify Plus Service subscribers should not be enabled for Integrated Web Portal features as they are incompatible See the Feature Interaction section of the Notify Plus Service Description for more information Web Portal Configuration Web Portal Configuration Steps 1 Configure Voicemail 2 Enable Internet Access For Voicemail 3 Configure Conferencing 4 Enable Internet Access For Conferencing 5 Enable Call Logging F You have 1 stepla left Click the button on the right side of each step to configure it Figure 26 42 Web Portal Configuration For each step listed in the Web Portal Configuration interface there will be either a L button to indicate the step has not been completed or a icon to indicate the step has been completed The subscriber illustrated in Figure 26 42 has been configured for the first five steps and has one step remaining Clicking on the L button next to a step may automatically configure the step or it may display a window with additional configuration options related to the selected service The Service Description documents assoc
321. r End Point Codes of the routes defined in the Routing tab see Section 8 4 of the SS7 Configuration win dow Global Titles amp Translation Types Advanced Global Title T able Map Number Global 4ddress Function Selector Primary Route Alternate Route E Final Translation amp Alter SN Local Point Code oe Description Point Code 0 0 0 0 0 0 Route 1 10 20 30 Route 2 11 22 55 qP Add A Delete Local Point Code 10 1 6 Figure 8 15 Selecting a Destination Point Code Alternate Route An optional secondary 9 digit SS7 physical network address If the Primary Route cannot be found the APmax will try the Alternate Route The value of this field is set by clicking in the Alternate Route cell and selecting a destination point code from the drop down list similar to the procedure described above for setting the Primary Route 3 Click a location in the window other than the new row to save the new row 4 To delete a GTT entry select the row to remove and press the Delete button in the Global Title Table section 8 5 2 Defining a Translation Type Complete the following steps to define a Translation Type for the selected APmax system 1 Press the Add button in the Translation Type Table section A new row with the default Translation Type values will be added to the table 2 Click in each of the following cells in the new row and enter the appropriate data Translation Type The Translation Type value re
322. r File Transfer Protocol to download logs Document 715025 294 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 22 Log Reader 22 1 2 View Log When viewing the contents of a log the right pane of the Log Reader window typically shows four columns of information for each record present in the log selected in the left pane Some logs e g DspError may only show the timestamp and error text These columns are described below Log Time The date and time this record was generated CPU The APmax CPU for which this record was generated Type The category of the log record Text A summary of the log record Each time a different log file is viewed by pressing the D button a tab with the name of the log file will be added along the top of the right pane Selecting a tab will display the contents of the associated log file To close a tab click the close button X on the tab To search the contents of a log file enter the search text into the box next to the search button q and press the button or the lt Enter gt key Any log entries matching the entered text will be listed in a search results box at the bottom of the right pane Clicking on a line in the search results will select the matching row in the log 22 1 3 Real Time View of Log Real time log viewing is initiated by pressing the EO button next to a log row in the left hand pane of the Log Reader window to show a setup screen similar to
323. ranslation Route 1 Route 2 anistation ICA Translation Type Table Translation Type Subsystem Number Map Number Expansion Route 167 167 E 0 0 0 172 172 5 Route 1 Figure 8 14 Global Titles amp Translation Types The Global Title Translation tab contains two sub tabs Global Titles amp Translation Types and Advanced The Global Titles amp Translation Types tab is used to manage GTTs see Section 8 5 1 and translation types see Section 8 5 2 The Advanced tab see Section 8 5 3 is used to custom ize the number of digits allowed in global addresses defined for a map number This customiza tion must take place in the Advanced tab prior to defining GTTs that will use the map number 8 5 1 Defining a GTT Complete the following steps to define a GTT for the selected APmax system 1 Press the Add button in the Global Title Table section A new row with the default GTT values will be added to the table Document 715025 114 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration 2 Click in each of the following cells in the new row and enter the appropriate data Map Number The Map Number is a number from 0 19 that associates trans lations of the same nature under one map number There may be multiple entries in this table that use the same map number All Global Title Values that translate to a destination of some type e g Service Switching Point SSP Service C
324. re available for reporting will be displayed on the left hand side of the window These data Document 715025 247 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer bases are grouped by service 1 e Subscriber Voicemail The Subscriber group is available in all APmax configurations The availability of other groups depends on which enhanced services are installed on the selected APmax system H l R g Report Viewer APmax 9511 Lonny mam RE el legen Jegen Jegen Criteria Columns Conferencing Firebar IPTV IPTV ALU Mediaroom A IPTV Mediaroom A Local Number Portability SIP ACS LA au aa CECE CECE a Subscriber KS Subscriber 1 Internet Users WI Trunk gt gt C Voicemail K Voice Mail ant i E ee X Voice Mail Configuration Report will only contain data prior to 5 14 AM on 1 31 13 Click Here To Get Latest EENS oes Figure 17 3 Report Viewer Window The timestamp of the most recent database backup is displayed at the bottom of the white draw control page in the middle of the Report Viewer window The Click Here To Get Latest link on the right hand side of the timestamp can be pressed to force the APmax to generate new backup databases which will be automatically downloaded providing Report Viewer with the most cur rent information A progress window similar to Figure 17 4 will be
325. re partitioned into three tabs that are described in the following sec tions e Section 8 6 1 Seven To Ten Mapping e Section 8 6 2 Destination Addresses e Section 8 6 3 Toll Call Management 8 6 1 Seven To Ten Mapping The Seven To Ten Mapping tab Figure 8 19 is used to define combinations of NX Xs point codes and NPAs that will be used by the APmax to expand 7 digit numbers received from a switch into 10 digit numbers that can be used in responses Sa F 1557 Configuration AF max 9511 General Linksets Combined Linksets Routing Global Title Translation AIN Seven To Ten Mapping Destination Address Toll Call Management Seven To Ten Mapping 555 1001 Add Delete Figure 8 19 Seven To Ten Mapping Tab Existing combinations are retrieved from the APmax by entering the point code of the combina tion into the Point Code field and then pressing the Find button To add a new AIN seven to ten mapping entry press the Add button in the Seven To Ten Mapping section An Add Seven To Ten window see Figure 8 20 will be displayed Document 715025 119 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration Add Seven To Ten NN an 555 1000 Paint Code 1 2 1 NPA 605 Figure 8 20 Add Seven To Ten Window Populate the following fields in the Add Seven To Ten window and press the OK button to save the new entry NXX XXXX Ent
326. read prior to attempting a system upgrade Below the warning is an Upgrade Procedure Documentation link that should be clicked to download a PDF containing detailed upgrade infor mation EN sstem Upgrade Manager amp Prmax 9051 co IG ee Please read the following procedure prior to attempting to upgrade a system Alter reading please contact Innovative Systemes technical support with any questions about the steps contained in the procedure This procedure will Upgrade the Firmware Base AudioSubSystem and Telephony packages The Upgrade by default will mowe traffic between units to ensure a non oubage Upgrade Note This procedure will take between 2 5 and 4 5 hours to complete Upgrade Procedure Documentation Base Package AudioSubSystem Package Unit 1 Version 4 3 64 1 Unit 1 Version 4 3 64 t Unit 2 Version 4 3 64 1 Unit 2 Version 4 3 64 t Available Version 4 3 104 Available Wersion 4 35 104 Advanced Settings Prepare Uparade Figure 18 2 System Upgrade Manager Window Document 715025 267 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 18 System Upgrade Manager The Base Package box and AudioSubSystem Package box in the System Upgrade Manager win dow indicate whether or not these packages are up to date on Unit and Unit 2 Figure 18 2 illustrates packages that need to be upgraded and Figure 18 3 illustrates packages that are up to date The Prepare Upgrade butt
327. reated and will be displayed in the list of users in the User Administration win dow Document 715025 29 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started Additional users may be added at this time or they can be added later by the system administrator or anyone else with the access privileges to add new users To login with the new user exit the APmax UI program and login using the Login ID and Pass word that you defined for the new user See Section 3 1 Logging Into the APmax UI for more information on logging in 3 2 2 Editing a User To modify the settings Login ID Description Password Access Rights of an existing APmax UI user select the user in the User Administration window see Figure 3 3 and press the Edit but ton A User Information window see Figure 3 4 populated with the current settings of the selected user will be displayed Make any desired changes to the settings and press the OK button in the User Information window to save the changes 3 2 3 Deleting a User To delete an APmax UI user select the user in the User Administration window see Figure 3 3 and press the Delete button A delete confirmation prompt will be displayed Select the Yes but ton to complete the deletion 3 2 4 User Access Rights Details The User Access Rights window see Figure 3 5 is used to define what APmax UI functions the user will be allowed to access and perform T
328. record was created 334 Innovative Systems L L C APmaAx User Manual Release 4 3 Time Zone Dial By Name Digits System Name Chapter 26 Subscriber Management All 10 digit phone numbers defined in the Address Info tab see Section 26 1 3 for this billing service address or service group will be listed in this selection box and may be selected to change the value of this field The currently selected phone number in this field cannot be deleted from within the Address Info tab This number cannot be changed to a 7 digit phone number or a phone number used by another billing service address or service group Changing this number will display a prompt Figure 26 32 which provides the option of updating the phone numbers of the services associated with this billing service address or service group subscriber Default Phone Number Change ES Would you like to automatically update all of the subscriber s services to match the new default phone number Figure 26 33 Prompt to Update Subscriber Services The time zone that will be used for all time related functions involving this billing service address This field is unique to each billing service address defined for this subscriber and therefore changing it will not alter the time zone for any other billing service addresses The digits used by features such as Automated Attendant mail box configurations in the Voice Mail Service to find this sub scriber in a grou
329. rify the login request is coming from the correct location The Login Provider column in the HTML tab lists the providers supported by the APmax and the Login Provider Key contains the text cells where the associated keys must be entered Document 715025 166 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings General Web Portal Password Management SSL Setup Administrative Users Extemal DSP Addresses Video 4 Configuration APmax Root Web Address Portal a Silverlight HTML Login Provider Login Provider Key p Google 266036 76 196 1 omipaertihgntucedess 290 apps googleusercontent com Facebook Figure 11 7 Web Portal HTML Tab Instructions for obtaining service provider keys are found in the following sections e Google Section 11 2 2 1 Obtaining a Google Provider Key e Facebook Section 11 2 2 2 Obtaining a Facebook Provider Key 11 2 2 1 Obtaining a Google Provider Key An account with Google is necessary to obtain a login provider key from Google If you have a Google Account for development purposes then please have the account login and password available prior to beginning this procedure If you do not have a Google Account then one can be created at the beginning of the procedure Note Actual screens and interfaces may vary slightly from those shown in this procedure depending on the browser used and changes made by Google to the Goo
330. ring an edited announcement that was deployed with an announcement set will remove all changes from the edited announcement and return it to its original non customized state Attempting to do this will result in the warning prompt shown in Figure 14 20 Pressing the Yes button in the prompt will revert the selected announcement Revert Figure 14 20 Revert Announcement Warning 14 2 Phrase Management Announcement phrases are wav audio files that can be used to create announcements for the APmax For more information on using phrases with announcements see the following sections e Section 14 1 1 Adding Announcements e Section 14 1 2 Editing Announcements e Section 14 1 4 1 Phrase Components The Phrases tab see Figure 14 21 allows you to manage custom phrases e phrases that you have created and to listen to all pre defined phrases that were deployed with announcement sets The following functions can be performed within the Phrases tab e Play all phrases on your PC speakers e Find all announcements that are using a phrase Document 715025 219 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager e Add custom phrases see Section 14 2 1 e Delete custom phrases see Section 14 2 2 E Announcement Manager APmax Mitchell Announcements Phrases Language Voice Inflection Wii File Phrase Text Custom noish emale None english female Ending
331. ring their SIP address Name Search for subscribers by entering their name Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management Additional types of identification may be used to find subscribers depending on the services that have been installed on the APmax system For example Mailbox Number may be used to find subscribers if the Voice Mail Service is installed and Conference ID may be used to find sub scribers if the On Demand Conferencing Service or Large Scale Conferencing Service are installed 26 1 1 2 Subscribers List Commands Items in the Subscribers list will display a popup menu when the right hand mouse button is clicked while the mouse pointer is positioned over the item The right click menu commands for subscriber billing service address service group and service icons are described below Subscriber Menu Commands Right clicking on a subscriber icon will display a popup menu see Figure 26 7 with the follow ing commands e Refresh Subscriber Select this command to re query the APmax system for the current data for the selected subscriber record e Clear Subscriber from Search Select this command to remove the selected subscriber from the Subscribers list q subscriber Management sede General Info I Phone Number ze 605555101 ve Find Name Billing Account Number Ge Jane Jones 1 989756293 71 23 oe John Jones 1 238394994 7342 03 Jack Jones 1 13453234
332. rogress Emails Send Progress Emails Email Server email innovsys innovsys com To jadmin innovsys corm From jinfot innovsys corm Upgrade Process E Upgrade Units Simultaneously MW Require Upgrade Confirmation Prepare Upgrade Figure 18 4 Advanced Settings Document 715025 268 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Databases Upgrade Files Progress Emails Upgrade Process Upgrade Process Chapter 18 System Upgrade Manager Table 18 1 Advanced Settings Check the Perform Database Backup box to backup the APmax databases and store them on the local PC s hard drive or uncheck to disable database backup This option is checked by default Choose the Download Automatically option selected by default to download the latest release packages from the Inno vative Systems FTP site or choose the Specify Local Files option and navigate to the TAR File or Package file that will be used instead of downloading from the FTP site Check the Send Progress Emails box unchecked by default to have several progress reports emailed from the specified Email Server throughout the upgrade process The Upgrade Unit 1 and Upgrade Unit 2 boxes can be checked upgrade or unchecked do not upgrade to upgrade units independently if necessary Both boxes are checked by default Check the Upgrade Units Simu
333. roperties table on the right hand side of the window New FTP tasks can be created by pressing the Add button to display the Add FTP Task entry form Figure 15 3 entering the required task and FTP server settings described below Figure 15 3 and pressing the OK button Settings in the Add FTP Task form with the exception of Applica tion Name and Description can be edited in the FTP Task Properties table after the task is added Add FTP Task E Application Name Description Source Directory Indude Subdirectories Transfer Schedule __Transfer Start Time FIP Server Address FIP Server Port User Name Password FIP Type Passive Mode Task Properties FODC Biling 7 Billing logs for On Demand Conferencing varlog OnDemandBillingLogs No Daily EE fip innovsys com 21 fipdownload fipSdownload 12 Normal Passive Figure 15 3 Add FTP Task Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 226 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 15 FTP Transfer Service The task and server settings found in the Add FTP Task and FTP Transfer Service windows are described in the table below Task Properties Application Name Name of the application requesting the FTP This setting cannot be edited after the task is created Description Description of the FTP transfer This setting cannot be edited after the task is created Source Directory Starting directory for transfers Include Subdirec
334. rowse button and select one of the following options from the top of the drop down list Pre Staged Selecting this option will display the primary service and sys Packages tem packages that have been automatically downloaded from Innovative Systems and are ready to install See Chapter 4 Network Configuration for information on which ports need to be open for the APmax to receive pre staged packages Patch Packages Displays the patch packages that have been downloaded and are ready to install Utility Packages Displays the utility packages that have been downloaded and are ready to install Document 715025 231 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 16 Package Management Once a folder is entered or selected any packages in that folder will be displayed in the Package Files list on the left hand side of the Select a Package to Deploy window Browse For Folder Select a directory where package Files CP apes can be Found l My Documents E z My Computer DI SW My Network Places al Recycle Bin Figure 16 4 Browse for a Package 4 Select the package you wish to deploy in the Package Files list on the left hand side of the window The contents of the package will be displayed in the General Info Dependen cies and Contents tabs to the right of the list These tabs are described below Preview the information in each tab and then continue to the next step General
335. rt 5 and port 6 to port 6 If APmax web services such as Web Portal are to be used the system s Internet Ps must be con figured accordingly and the WAN port port 2 on each unit must be connected to the Internet The VoIP network connects to the APmax via the VoIP port port 4 Whether or not the APmax will be used for VoIP will determine how the system should be cabled In addition to properly cabling the system the Administration Call Processing IPs and DSP IPs must be configured accordingly If the networks on which the APmax resides do not support the default IP ranges preconfigured before shipment then the system IPs will need to be updated see Chapter 4 Network Configuration for more information NOTE Setting the IPs on the APmax is done by sending a broadcast query from the UI to all units within the system When changing the APmax IPs the PC on which the UI runs must be on the same network as the APmax Administration network If VoIP is utilized meaning the APmax will be hosting external VoIP traffic the VoIP port port 4 on each unit must be connected to the Call Processing network on which the APmax resides It is required that the OAM amp P Administration and VoIP Call Processing networks be located on separate physical networks 1 2 Procedure 1 Mount the APmax into the desired equipment rack using four 10 panel bolts per unit The APmax should be mounted in a location such that cables and wiring reach t
336. rtificate must be purchased from a certificate authority that provides certificates in the PEM CRT or PFX file format NOTES e CRT and PFX formats require APmax Release 4 3 90 or greater e If the certificate is a CRT PEM file with text content but the file name ends with a CRT extension and it has BEGIN CERTIFICATE and END CERTIFICATE in it then it must be renamed to have a PEM extension before being installed Document 715025 178 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings The purpose of the SSL Setup tab Figure 11 23 in the Internet Access Settings interface is to make the steps of requesting and installing a server certificate easier These steps are given below 1 Open the Internet Access Settings interface as described at the beginning of Chapter 11 and select the SSL Setup tab as illustrated below ha F l Internet Access settings amp Priax 9511 oe Private Key Pass Phrase MyPassPhrase Key Length 1024 Certificate Signing Request Certificate Curent New Figure 11 23 SSL Setup Tab 2 If there is currently a working certificate that is being updated via this procedure then press the Backup button to save the existing certificate as a local file The backup file is a Dem file with all information private key main certificate intermediate certificate in the correct order
337. rts 281 20 2 Monitoring Trunks 283 20 3 SUP Status EE 285 20 4 DS Channel Summary 286 Chapter 21 Ethernet Switch Information 289 21 1 Switch Port Statistics 290 Document 715025 vii Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Table of Contents Chapter 22 Log Reader 00000 aeaa 293 22 1 Viewing System Logs 0 ees 293 22 1 1 Log Reader Toolbar ccc cece cette eens 294 22122 VIEW LOG kycacnrces eet EE EE 295 22 1 3 Real Time View of og 295 Ze Nie AAAI Ze HOO inthe Gere St hous bad haus at sos toads tae takes 296 Chapter 23 SS7 Status 299 23 1 Monitoring SS7 Links 299 Chapter 24 Daily Log Analysis Tool 303 24 1 Daily Log Analysis Tool 303 24 1 1 Setting Administrator E mail Address 303 24 1 2 Example of Daily Log Analysis Report 304 24 1 3 Log Analysis File Content Information 306 Part 5 Services 309 Chapter 25 License Viewer 000 2 ccc ee 311 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management 315 26 1 Subscriber Management Interface 315 26 1 1 SUDSCHDELS Aere a cae Aare wae MES Peas Nab TAs ae Sua 317 26 1 1 1 Gathering Subscriber Information 319 26 1 1 2 Subscribers List Commands 0 cece ee eens 320 2621213 Adding Subscribers EE 324 26 1 1 4 Deleting Subscribers 326 26 1 1 5 Adding Billing Servi
338. runk Group Settings 0 0 cee tenes 141 9 3 3 SUP Trunk Members EE 145 9 4 SIP Trunk Groups EEN 147 9 4 T Adding a SIP FERREIRA EEN Gens d 147 9 4 2 SIP Trunk Group Settings 0 0c ec cee nes 148 9 5 MGCP Trunk Groups 00 0000 149 9 5 1 Adding an MGCP Trunk Group 149 9 5 2 MGCP Trunk Group Settings 0 0 ccs 149 9 6 Generic Trunk Groups 150 9 6 1 Adding a Generic Trunk Group 150 9 6 2 Generic Trunk Members 151 9 7 PRI Trunk Groups eet Ee E one Oot we oa wh AE OR ee Se Giel 153 9 7 1 Adding a PRI Trunk GOUD EEN 153 Chapter 10 SIP Registration 155 10 1 SIP Client Registration Management 156 10 2 SIP Client Registration Settings 157 10 3 SIP Server Management 158 10 3 1 Realm Management 40488 sens tenes wolcnes deere eee ea ee keane 159 10 3 2 Realm Member Management 159 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings 161 11 1 General Internet Access Settings 162 Document 715025 V Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Table of Contents IL Web Portal EEN 163 ee eg Ire EE 164 TLA RrAdang as Ponal hu iaaia bot Actas aa E K aod act add ote ae athe BY 164 T2 k2 Gel lee a e NEE 166 Ltr Deleting a Portal Ze ee iota heehee dete hehehe ea ee 166 kee RK nr Le WEE EE 166 11 2 2 1 Obtaining a Google Provider Key 0 0 0 e eee ee eee 167 11 2 2 2 Obtaining a Facebook Provider Key 00 eee eee 173 1
339. runks see Figure 20 5 in Section 20 2 SIP see Figure 20 6 in Section 20 3 and Summary see Figure 20 7 in Section 20 4 Mitchell System Configuration ia System Maintenance Da System Surveillance Alarm Status Digital Carrier Status Ethernet Switch Information Log Reader 557 Status Figure 20 1 Digital Carrier Status Menu Command 20 1 Monitoring DS Ports The DS tab Figure 20 2 is displayed by default when the Digital Carrier Status interface 1s accessed It contains information about the status of each DSI and DS3 that is enabled for the current APmax system DS ports are enabled in the Digital Carrier Configuration interface described in Section 7 1 Document 715025 281 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 20 Digital Carrier Status _ Digital Carrier Status APmax Mitchell show MME DI DS Trunks ll SIF d Summary D51 Status Unit DS Status Timing Source 1 0511 INS Yes 9 Rx Slip Count Te Slip Coun Bipolar Violation Count EX Count D D 1 D51 1 D53 051 1 9 Rx Slip Count Tx Slip Count Bipolar Violation Count EX Count ME 053 Status Bipolar violation Count a2001 2540 Figure 20 2 Digital Carrier Status DS Tab Each DS1 is represented by a row in the DS J Status section of the tab The following columns of information are available for each DSI Unit The number of the APmax system
340. rvice Note The FIP Transfer Service requires the FTPUtilityService package to be installed on the selected system To access the FTP Transfer Service interface right click on the APmax system s icon 2 in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Maintenance FTP Transfer Service command as illustrated in Figure 15 1 An FTP Transfer Service window sim ilar to Figure 15 2 will be displayed 7 Announcement Manager Command Line Diagnostics d File Viewer Package Management Reboot Utility Report Viewer Figure 15 1 FTP Transfer Service Menu Command Document 715025 225 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 di F JFTP Transfer Service Pima 9511 FTP Tasks Report Files ODC Billing Billing logs for On Demand Cor Chapter 15 FTP Transfer Service FTP Task Properties a 7 Bi 2 ees Description Source Directory Indude Subdirectories No Transfer Schedule Daily Transfer Start Time 3 00 00 AM File Inclusion Mask File Exclusion Mask Directory Exdusion Mask fip innovsys com FTF Server Port 21 User Name fipdownload Password fipSdownload12 FTF Type Normal Passive Mode Passive Figure 15 2 FTP Transfer Service Window The left hand side of the FTP Transfer Service window contains a list of tasks that have been pre viously configured Selecting a task in this list will display its settings in the FTP Task P
341. s If the audit completes without finding any discrepancies Figure 16 28 will be displayed If the audit finds differences then a Package Audit Information window similar to Figure 16 29 will be displayed Audit Succeeded ES No Problems were found for the selected package Figure 16 28 Package Audit Succeeded Ge Package Audit Information 9 File Path Problem Type Disk File Version Package File Version ap bin acdtestconsole Incorrect Version 115 fap lib gsoap_modules AdministrationACD so Incorrect Version 100 Figure 16 29 Package Audit Information Window Each unit in the APmax system is represented by a row in the Package Audit Information window On the left hand side of each unit s row is a tree symbol that can be clicked to display a list of errors found by the audit as illustrated in Figure 16 29 If discrepancies are found for any pack age other than the base package it may be necessary to re deploy the package Document 715025 246 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 17 Report Viewer Chapter 17 Report Viewer The Report Viewer tool allows system administrators to create and view reports of subscribers and enhanced services on an APmax system The purpose of this chapter is to describe the func tionality of the Report Viewer tool For more information on specific subscriber or enhanced ser vice field definitions see Chapter 26 Subscriber Mana
342. s e g used as an SS7 link The Selected Trunks list shows the T1 channels that will be assigned to the selected trunk group when the OK button is pressed Trunk members can be moved from the Available Trunks list to the Selected Trunks list by first selecting one or more available trunks and then press the Add gt gt button between the lists Trunk members can be removed from the Selected Trunks list by selecting one or more trunks from the right hand list and then pressing the lt lt Remove button The removed trunk members will be placed at the bottom of the Available Trunks list After the desired trunk members have been moved to the Selected Trunks list press the OK button to insert those trunk members into the Trunk Members tab see Figure 9 7 Pressing the Cancel button will close the Select Trunk Member s to Add window without adding any trunk members to the trunk group Document 715025 139 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration 9 3 ISUP Trunk Groups 9 3 1 Adding an ISUP Trunk Group To add an ISUP trunk group follow these steps 1 Press the Add button in the lower left hand corner of the Trunk Configuration window Figure 9 2 An Enter Trunk Group Info window similar to Figure 9 10 the Far end Name field is not initially shown will be displayed Enter Trunk Group Info Trunk Group 1 2 Signaling Type ISUF wi Trunk Group Name CL MM Dire
343. s a subscriber with a normal Internet Access account can only access their own settings Wa IS lInternet Access settings amp Priax 9511 General Web Portal Password Management SSL Setup Administrative Users Username Description Provisioning Administrator Figure 11 28 Administrative Users Tab Instructions for adding editing and deleting administrative users are given below 11 5 1 Adding a User To define a new administrative user follow these steps 1 Press the Add button in the Administrative Users tab An Administrative User window similar to Figure 11 29 will be displayed Administrative User Username sysadmin Password SEE RERE kk Description Provisioning Administrator Figure 11 29 Administrative User Window Document 715025 182 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings 2 Populate the following fields in the Administrative User window Username The name of this Internet Access account This name must be unique among subscribers associated with the same Internet Access service provider Password The password of this Internet Access account This pass word is used in conjunction with the Username to allow the subscriber to have administrative access to the provisioning API Description A short description of this account 3 Press the OK button in the Administrative User window The
344. s com registered TechSupportthtn O BAX Ginnovsyscom x AP APMAX SUPPORT eLation SUPPORT Innovative Sy S t E m S PRODUCTS NEWS amp EVENTS CONTACT AP Technical Support Please contact Innovative Systems Technical Support at 605 995 6120 before submitting a request COMPANY AP Technical Support hours 8am 5pm CST CDT After hours emergency 605 333 4609 email support innovsys com CAREERS Representatives i MITCHELL SD INFO Anna Thompson Don Cuppy 7 Greg Goldsmmer John Cersosimo 7 Travis Strand ONLINE AP APMAX SUPPORT Steve Laufman COMPANY OVERVIEW CONTACT INNOVATIVE SYSTEMS eLation SUPPORT Powered By BOMG R Remote PC Access Software for Help Desk Support AP APMAX ACCOUNT ACCESS Log In To Your AP APMAX Account 100 e Figure 3 16 Online Technical Support File be LogE nts Dates 11 14 2012 4 54 35 PM lt Date gt lt Messagel ype EnorMessage lt Messagelype gt lt Message gt Eror Unable to get the customer information Soap Error Message sp GetSubsenberByld failed to get the Subscriber details Message gt lt StackTrace gt at InnovatryeSystems 4PLAPACI TomController FindCustomer String subG uid at Innovatives ystems AP AP TCM SubMaomt FindSubscriber String startups ubecriber Phone umber String startupSubscriberGuid lt Stack Trace lt LogEntry gt Figure 3 17 Program Messages Document 715025 40 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User M
345. s is the address of an SMTP server you are allowed to send mail through Close the Internet Access Settings window to save any changes to the properties 11 2 Web Portal The Web Portal tab see Figure 11 3 or Figure 11 7 provides an interface for configuring Web Portal Service administrative settings The Web Portal Service is an enhanced APmax service that must be installed separately on APmax systems For more information on the Web Portal Service see the documentation that is packaged with the service The APmax Root Web Address setting at the top of the Web Portal tab is described below All other settings are partitioned into the Silverlight Section 11 2 1 and HTML Section 11 2 2 tabs APmax Root Web Address Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 This setting is used to determine whether or not Internet Access enabled subscribers can access the Web Portal Service login page by navigating their web browser directly to the External Address defined in the General tab see Section 11 1 Options are as follows Default The login page is only accessible by navigating to http lt Exter nal Address gt Portal PortalPage html where lt External Address gt is the IP address or domain name defined in the General tab see Section 11 1 This option should be primarily used for test purposes when the service provider does not want the login page to be exactly the same as the Exter nal Address Portal The Web Portal Servi
346. s of the selected installed package See Section 16 1 3 for more information 16 1 1 Deploying a Package To install a new or updated feature on an APmax system a package containing the new tables and files must be deployed to the system When a package is deployed the contents of the package are copied to the appropriate locations on the system To deploy a package complete the following steps 1 Note the name of the APmax system in the caption of the Package Management window see Figure 16 2 This is the system to which the package will be deployed If this is not the correct system close the window and use the method described in Section 16 1 to open Package Management for the correct system 2 Press the nstall button located below the list of installed packages in the Package Man agement window The Select a Package to Deploy window see Figure 16 3 will be dis played The top of the Select a Package to Deploy window contains the Location field and Browse button and is used to locate packages for deployment The middle of the window is used to preview the contents of a package before it is deployed The nstall button at the bot tom of the window is used to confirm the deployment of a package to the APmax system The Deploy Only to Unit s selection box in the lower left hand corner of the window is used to choose the units on the system to which the package should be deployed The Deploy Only to Unit s selection box should be
347. scribed in Section 9 1 At this time there is one setting specific to MF trunk groups Start Type If this setting is not visible in the General Settings tab click the tree symbol next to the Signalling Settings legend in the General Settings tab The Start Type setting will be dis played as illustrated in Figure 9 6 E Signalling Settings Start Type Figure 9 6 MF Trunk Group General Settings Use the Start Type pull down menu to select the appropriate start of dialing signal used between the APmax and the far end switch This field may be set to one of the following values Wink The APmax will return a wink back to the switch when an off hook is received Digit collection will not begin until the wink has been returned Immediate The APmax will not return a wink and will begin digit collection immediately after an off hook is received 9 2 3 MF Trunk Members This section contains information on adding and removing trunk members trunks for MF trunk groups Trunk members are viewed added and deleted from within the Trunk Members tab of the Trunk Configuration window When an MF trunk group is selected in the list on the left hand side of the window all of the currently defined trunk members under the selected group will be shown in this tab see Figure 9 7 Document 715025 137 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration Unit Ti Channel E 1051 1 11 1051 1
348. se button in the Called Areas list area and select the Add New Area command from the popup menu The same edit mode behavior as Called Numbers is also exhibited where an editable prompt is displayed until you have completed entering the desired areas At the prompt enter the name of the Called Area Called Area names typically describe the type of Called Numbers that they will contain e g the name of the city or town Assigning Called Areas to Calling Numbers Each Called Area can be assigned to one or more Calling Numbers This assignment defines for each calling number the called numbers that are considered toll free To assign one or more Called Areas to a Calling Number use one of the following methods 1 Drag and Drop a Select one or more numbers in the Called Areas list The selection is accomplished via the normal Windows list selection mechanisms That is a single area is selected by clicking on the area name in the list Multiple contiguous areas are selected by holding the lt Shift gt key down while clicking on the last area name in the range to be selected Multiple non contiguous areas are selected by holding the lt Ctrl gt key down while selecting multiple desired areas b Click and hold down the left hand mouse button on one of the selected area names While holding down the left hand mouse button drag the selection to one of the num bers in the Calling Numbers list c When the desired Calling Number is highl
349. se settings is the SIP Trunk Group Settings group box Next to the legend of the group box is a tree symbol Clicking a tree symbol will alter nately show and hide the settings in the group box Figure 9 17 illustrates this portion of the Gen eral Settings tab when all of the settings are displayed SIP Trunk Group Settings Prowy Address Load Balance No z Tone Detection Negotiate Use Authentication No Figure 9 17 SIP Trunk Group Settings The SIP specific trunk group settings are described below Proxy Address This field is used to specify the SIP proxy server address of the switch and optionally the port Le server port If left blank the Proxy Address functions as a catch all trunk group essen tially bypassing security Load Balance This field indicates whether or not the unit receiving calls will redirect every other call to the mate unit to balance the load between the two units This setting is applicable if the switch can only send calls to one IP address typically the VRRP address of the APmax Options include Yes or No with No being the default value Tone Detection Use the pull down menu to select the method of sending and receiving DIMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency tones This field may be set to one of the following values e Automatic The APmax listens for both in band and out of band tones In band detection is turned off if any out of band tones are detected to avoid double digit detectio
350. selected then the Subscriber Management interface will be docked at the bottom of the APmax UI window see Figure 26 3 Subscriber Management vil Subscribers General Info Phone Number 605555101 4 Find Name an Janes Billing Account Number 1 103988534 7125 oe Jane Jones 1 989756293 71 23 oe John Jones 1 238394994 7342 oe Jack Jones 1 134532344 71 24 TE Jones o SA K Sc er 1000 prea 7 Ez BBB 1010 Ji ACD Call Center Call Logging Notify Plus ie On Demand Conferencing SIP ACS Voice Mail fe Clear l cht D lt Delete G GIS Figure 26 3 Subscriber Management Interface Docked View The pin 4 button in the upper right hand corner of the docked Subscriber Management interface can be clicked to pin or unpin the docked interface When the Subscriber Management inter face 1s pinned it will always be displayed and will remain on top of any other windows opened in the APmax UI When the Subscriber Management interface is unpinned it will be minimized to the Subscriber Management tab in the lower left hand corner of the APmax UI window see Fig ure 26 4 when the mouse cursor moves away from the interface Moving the mouse cursor over the Subscriber Management tab will show the interface and give the user the opportunity to pin interface if they wish Document 715025 316 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber M
351. service provider for all of the APmax systems defined in the APmax UI WARNINGS Setting up a Single Web Portal host system will apply to ALL systems defined in the APmax UI Also using Single Web Portal on sites with only one defined APmax sys tem may have unintended consequences Document 715025 55 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started SE APmax System Administration Defined APmas s Master APrmax Setup single Web Portal Note Single Web Portal is designed for companies with multiple APM as systems and would like to host ther Web Portal page from one specific system Clicking the Send Data button will compile all the Internet Access records of every defined system on to the target host system Warming Using Single Web Portal on sites with only one defined Amay may have unintended consequences Host System 9511 Send Data Figure 3 42 Single Web Portal Follow these steps to setup a Single Web Portal system 1 Open the Internet Access Settings interface of the APmax system that will be the Single Web Portal host See Chapter 11 for information on the Internet Access Settings interface 2 In the General tab of the Internet Access Settings interface see Section 11 1 set the External Address setting to the IP address or domain name that someone on the Internet would use to access this service provider Close the Int
352. set to All unless vendor documentation or vendor support personnel specifically designate otherwise Document 715025 230 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 16 Package Management Select Package s to Deploy Location Pre Staged Packages e E Browse Package Files _ selected Package Infomation Name SEL TI Dependencies Contents C51500 Announcements 3 2 4 ISUF Announcements 4 1 1 apex On Demand Conferencing Plus GUID af Sec 75f decS 40b 0 5 radd 7d 3H 9547 TrigqgerRouter 1 0 27 apex Name On Demand Conferencing Plus Version 42 40 Description On Demand Conferencing with outdial capabilities Deploy Only to Unit al Instal Cancel Figure 16 3 Select a Package to Deploy 3 Choose the path to the folder containing the new package using one of the following mechanisms e Enter the path to the folder in the Location field and press lt Enter gt on the keyboard e Press the Browse button located in the upper right corner of the window to display the Browse For Folder window see Figure 16 4 and navigate to the folder containing the package s If packages have been previously deployed to the APmax system the paths to the loca tions of those packages can be selected by clicking the button next to the Browse button to display a drop down list of the previously used locations e Click the button next to the B
353. sh to edit in the System List in the right hand pane of the win dow and press the Edit button A System Information window populated with the current System ID and System Name values will be displayed see Figure 3 37 System Information Dustem ID System Name Mitchell Figure 3 37 Editing a System 4 Only the name can be edited for existing systems Enter the new name in the System Name field and press the OK button to apply the changes to the system or press the Can cel button to exit the window without saving any changes If the name is changed the new name will be displayed with the associated system icon in the Command Center win dow and in the captions of any configuration windows that display the system name Document 715025 52 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started 3 4 2 3 Deleting a System WARNING Use this command with EXTREME CAUTION Deleting an APmax system will NOT affect the configuration on the APmax system however the configuration will not be accessible from the APmax UI Follow these steps to delete a APmax system from the APmax UI SL 1 Right click on the APmax Ul icon in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the APmax System Definition command as illustrated in Figure 3 23 The APmax System Administration window see Figure 3 24 will be displayed 2 Inthe left hand pane of the Defined APma
354. signment You may delete a Called Number from a Called Area by either selecting and deleting the number from the area in the Called Area list or by selecting and deleting the area name under the desired number in the Called Numbers list The delete mechanisms are the same three choices press the lt Delete gt key click the Delete button associated with the list or select the Delete Number com mand from a popup menu A delete confirmation window is displayed before the delete action 1s actually performed The user can choose to abort the delete action or continue with the delete action The Called Numbers and Called Areas lists will be updated appropriately Document 715025 125 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration 8 6 3 2 Called Areas Called Areas are logical collections of Called Numbers For instance one area may contain the 800 series of NPAs and other areas may represent cities towns or other extended service areas Each area is identified with a name chosen by the telephone company administrator Each Called Area is assigned to one or more Calling Numbers There may be as many or as few areas as nec essary to assign the correct Called Numbers to the list of Calling Numbers Adding Called Areas Adding Called Areas is similar to adding new Called Numbers see Section 8 6 3 1 select the Add button below the Called Areas list or click the right hand mou
355. ss the lt Delete gt key click the Delete button or select the Delete Area command from the popup menu Again the user must confirm the delete request before the delete is performed The area s will be removed from the Called Areas list Also any reference to the area s in the Called Numbers and Calling Numbers lists will be removed 8 6 3 3 Calling Numbers The Calling Numbers list contains call originators or originator groups that are within a telephone company s service area The numbers in this list may be defined as NPAs NPA NXXs or com plete 10 digit directory numbers This list should include either as a specified 10 digit DN entry or as amember of a NPA or NPA NXX group each originating DN that can be provided enhanced services on the APmax The definition of these entries depends on how the telephone company defines local toll free calling for its customers If local calls are defined based on orig inating area then this list will include originating areas e g NPA NXXs If local calls can be individually selected per customer then the list will include each originating DN Document 715025 127 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration Adding Calling Numbers Adding Calling Numbers is similar to adding new Called Numbers see Section 8 6 3 1 select the Add button below the Calling Numbers list or click the right hand mouse button in the Call ing Nu
356. stall the signed certificate file s This is done by clicking the New button at the bottom of the Internet Access Settings window to display a standard Open window selecting one or more certificate response files NOTE Multiple PEM and CRT files may be selected and pressing the Open button If the certificate contains a private key then a password prompt Figure 11 27 will be given Enter Certificate Password Password Cancel Figure 11 27 Enter Certificate Password 9 The certificate is now installed on the APmax system The details of the installed certifi cate can be viewed by pressing the Current button in the SSL Setup tab but no further action is necessary to install the certificate on the APmax 10 Press the Backup button to save the newly installed certificate as a local file The backup file is a pem file with all information private key main certificate intermediate certifi cate in the correct order and can be installed on another server or APmax Document 715025 181 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 11 Internet Access Settings 11 5 Administrative Users The Administrative Users tab Figure 11 28 provides an interface for managing user accounts that have administrative access to the provisioning API Administrative access provides a login for third party provision systems An administrative user can provision the settings of any sub scriber whereas a
357. steps 1 Press the Add button in the lower left hand corner of the Trunk Configuration window Figure 9 2 An Enter Trunk Group Info window similar to Figure 9 20 will be dis played Enter Trunk Group Info Trunk Group 1 F Signaling Type Generic k Trunk Group Name Generici Direction Incoming wi Figure 9 20 Enter Generic Trunk Group Info The four trunk group properties displayed in the Enter Trunk Group Info window are described in Section 9 1 2 Enter the new trunk group number in the Trunk Group field The trunk group number must be unique and if it is not an error will be shown Select Generic in the Signaling Type drop down menu 4 Enter the Trunk Group Name This field is optional Select the direction of call setup for this trunk group Document 715025 150 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration 6 Press the OK button to add the new Generic trunk group to the list of trunk groups on the left hand side of the Trunk Configuration window 7 Configure trunk members see Section 9 6 2 for the new Generic trunk group 9 6 2 Generic Trunk Members This section contains information on adding and removing trunk members trunks for Generic trunk groups Trunk members are viewed added and deleted from within the Trunk Members tab of the Trunk Configuration window When a Generic trunk group is selected in the list on the left hand si
358. t 715025 Version 4 3 10 Introduction to the APmax Ul General Description The APmax is a next generation IP Multimedia Subsystem IMS Application Server AS created to provide advanced TDM and IP telephony features It acts as a Service Control Point SCP in the 557 Network and meets North American Public Switching Telephone Network PSTN industry standards for operations and reliability This online help file is intended to provide the general information needed to setup and operate the APmax New users of this product should review most of the contents of the Installing the APmax UI and Getting Started online help topics See the System Configuration topic for a list of topics that provide in depth discussion of configuring communications time and other features for APmax systems System Requirements A personal computer PC is required for the APmax Ul The APmax Ul is used to manage ae 8 e GEET eee Sg D 3 e eee BR Bes eee eee E ee ee ee eee H Figure 3 14 Online Help Contents B About ka AP Version 4 1 2 Copyright Innovative Systems LLC Modules Version ACDConfiguration ACDSubscriberMgmt 1 4 0 35 AlarmStatus 3 0 0 4 AnnouncementConfiguration 4 0 0 33 AnnouncementManager 4 0 0 1 APDefinition 4 0 0 7 APImporterExpor ter 4 1 0 1 Innovative Systems Figure 3 15 About Window 39 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started hittp Annmw innovsy
359. t use 7 00e7alb c 2 english female 1573 way DMS 10 site nu 01869abd 9 2 english female 21202 wa SIT Mo Circuit I O1chee88 5 2 english Female 1626 Wway We re SOY Wow O24FOefa be 2 english Female 1686 Wway This is the end Figure 16 25 Fragments Tab 16 1 3 1 Auditing a Package Packages that have been installed on an APmax system can be audited to verify the files in the package match the files on each unit in the system This feature is intended for use in verifying redundancy in file versions between packages and all units on a system To audit a package right click on the package in the list of installed packages in the Package Management window see Figure 16 2 to invoke a popup menu see Figure 16 26 below and select the Audit command in the menu A progress window Figure 16 27 will be displayed while the package is being audited GL Package Management APmax 9511 hakas Installed Packages IM Hide License Only Packages Name Version ACD 1 0 100 0 Announcement Service Interface 4 0 23 0 AnnouncementLibrary BasicConferencing sl Install Call Logging G Remove Calling Name I Properties CiscoScreenPop 51500 Announcements Figure 16 26 Select the Audit Menu Command Document 715025 245 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 16 Package Management Working Auditing Package Figure 16 27 Package Audit Progres
360. t Text ease on off optional meg silence 300 me To hear the numbers on your list dial 1 To hear these instructions repeated dial 0 Please dial now tone 400 Hz 300 me sec silence Selected Phrase Properties Phrase Inflection Language Voice P To turn this service None english Female Figure 14 11 Phrase Component Properties Selecting a phrase in the Announcement Text section of the Add Announcement window or Edit Announcement window illustrated in Figure 14 11 will display the details of the phrase in the Selected Phrase Properties section of the window Phrase properties in the Announcement Text section are read only and are described below Figure 14 12 Phrases can be added or deleted from new or existing announcements To add a phrase to an announcement select Phrase in the Type selection box of the Add Announcement or Edit Announcement windows see Figure 14 11 and press the Add button An Add Phrase window similar to Figure 14 12 will be displayed Document 715025 210 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager Add Phrase Voce female ka Fhrases service is now on ka Figure 14 12 Add a Phrase Component The Add Phrase window for phrase components contains the following fields Type Language Voice Phrases The type of component Phrase or Information that is being added to the announcement Select the Phrase option if it is n
361. t any time The Test Email but ton will also be displayed if the Send Progress Emails box is checked allowing the email settings to be verified prior to the start of the upgrade If the Require Upgrade Confirmation box 1s not checked then the upgrade process will run until completion E sstem Upgrade Manager amp Prmax 9511 1 Retieve Backup Databases 2 Transter TAR Files J Transter and Install Prestage Package 4 Set up Email Updates amp Upgrade System Test Email Start Upgrade Figure 18 6 Non Upgrade Steps Completed Pressing the Test Email button if available will show the Email Settings window Figure 18 7 which can be used to adjust the Email Server and address settings and will send two test emails one for each APmax unit which contain system configuration information Document 715025 270 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 18 System Upgrade Manager Email Settings Email Server jeanmail innsys innoveys cor To dennisu innoveys cor From jinfo innovsys comi Test Email i Cancel Figure 18 7 Test Email Settings Press the Start Upgrade button to continue the upgrade process The System Upgrade Manager screen will show the upgrade status of the units that are being upgraded If both units are being upgraded then a promp
362. t inter face to choose the type of identification you wish to use to locate the subscriber The types of identification are described below these steps 2 Enter the appropriate identification value e g 10 digit directory number e mail address of the subscriber into the field next to the Find button This value must match the type of identification that is selected 3 Press the Find button Once the Find button has been pressed the subscriber information retrieval process will begin When the retrieval process is complete all subscribers matching the entered criteria will be displayed in the Subscribers list on the left hand side of the Subscriber Management interface Subscribers from previous searches will remain in the Subscribers list unless the Clear button is pressed prior to the search The standard types of identification are described below Phone Number search for subscribers by entering a 9 or 10 digit phone num ber If the number entered has nine digits then the space is treated as a wildcard character For example entering 605 555 100 see Figure 26 6 and pressing the Find button will result in information for all subscriber phone numbers begin ning with 605 555 100 being retrieved Figure 26 6 Finding Subscribers E mail Address Search for subscribers by entering their e mail address Billing Account Search for subscribers by entering their billing account number Number SIP Address Search for subscribers by ente
363. t the System Configuration Serial Configuration command as illustrated in Figure 6 1 The name of the system for which you are configuring settings will be displayed at the top of the Serial Port Configuration window Figure 6 2 Mitchell be System Maintenance at System Time Manager wi System Surveillance Ethernet Configuration Za Internet Access Settings i Serial Configuration Service Access Map kb SIF Registration Sy 557 Configuration Figure 6 1 Serial Configuration Menu Command Serial Port Configuration APmax Mitchell H al Serial Ports Selected Serial Fort Settings Unit 1 Port 1 Lini U nit 1 Port 2 Serial Pork 2 Unit 2 Port 1 Mode A5232 Parity None Data Bits D Stop Bits 1 Baud Rate 9600 Figure 6 2 Serial Port Configuration Window The left hand side of the Serial Port Configuration window contains a list of APmax system units and serial ports that have already been configured Selecting a unit port combination in the list will display its serial port settings in the right hand side of the window where the serial port sig naling values may be modified The settings in the Selected Serial Port Settings section are described below Figure 6 3 To delete a serial port from the configuration select the unit port combination you wish to delete in the Serial Ports list and press the Delete button below the list Document 715025 91 Innovati
364. t will be displayed when the Unit 1 upgrade is complete see Figure 18 8 After validating that Unit is in service press the Resume Upgrade button to begin upgrading Unit 2 EN Sesten Upgrade Manager Prax 9511 H g S o ooooi 1 Retrieve Backup Databases 2 Transfer Upgrade Files Transfer and Install Prestage Package 4 Set up Email Updates D Upgrade System Unit 1 Upgrading Upgrade Complete Unit 2 Waiting For User to Resume Upgrade Complete Unit 1 Upgrade Complete Please validate that Unit 1is in service before resuming upgrade on Unit 2 Figure 18 8 Unit 1 Complete Resume Upgrade Prompt For support purposes a log file is created for each system upgrade The log file is located in the Documents folder of the logged in PC user When the upgrade is finished a prompt will display the exact path to the log file see Figure 18 9 This is also the directory where all remotely down loaded files are located Automatically downloaded files will be deleted automatically upon a successful upgrade Document 715025 271 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 18 System Upgrade Manager dm system Upgrade Manager Prax 9511 g da oooooi 1 Heiteve Backup Databases amp Transfer Upgrade Files Transfer and Install Prestage Package 4 Set up Email Updates 5 Upgrade System Upgrade Complete Complete
365. te of the T1 channel The column will indicate whether the associated channel is IDLE not currently in use BUSY currently in use or OOS out of service The Auxiliary States of the T1 channel An example of Auxiliary states are ISUP local blocked or remote blocked conditions that may be present on ISUP trunk group channels The S P tab Figure 20 6 is used to monitor and manage SIP activity for the selected APmax sys tem The following columns of information are given for each APmax unit Unit Active Call Count Status Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 The number of the APmax system unit The number of SIP calls currently being handled by this APmax unit The state of SIP on this unit Potential states are In Service Ignore Calls or Redirect Calls The state of a unit can be changed by right clicking on the unit row to invoke a popup menu illustrated in Figure 20 6 and then selecting either the Enable Disable or Redirect Calls menu command 285 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 20 Digital Carrier Status o Digital Carrier Status APmax 9511 show MME DS 1s ID Trunks SIP Summary SIP Status Enable Disable O In Service Redirect Calls Figure 20 6 SIP Tab 20 4 DS Channel Summary The Summary tab Figure 20 7 provides a condensed view of all the DS channels that have been assigned to MF and ISUP trunk groups on this APmax system Channels
366. ter 17 Report Viewer Criteria Columna 1 Subscriber Record Billing Account Number Billing Environment Code Billing Service Address Default Phone Mumber Like 605555 Dial By Name Digits Last Updated By Latitude Longitude Name Placement Type Time Zone 2 Address List Address Type Subscriber Address 3 Service List Billing Service ID Service List System ID E AN ez Specifies the services associated with this subscriber account Figure 17 8 Criteria Tab for Subscriber Records Clicking in the cell next to a field will display a dropdown button Clicking the button will display a filter control that allows you to narrow the scope of values to be considered for that database field when the report is generated The filter control will vary depending on the type of data that is associated with the selected field For example clicking the dropdown button 7 next to the Service List field will display a filter control similar to the one seen in Figure 17 9 while clicking the button next to the Default Phone Number field will result in a control similar to Figure 17 10 Date criteria fields will include the With in filter see Figure 17 11 which allows a relative date range within the last current previous number of days weeks months years to be specified 3 Service List Service List System ID Co Include CC Exclude A Group Membership Service Mame AAR TerminatingCallMan
367. the APmax UI see Section 3 3 4 User Preferences The floating window and docked presentations of the Subscriber Management interface have the same fields controls and functions If the Subscriber Management interface is not automatically displayed when the APmax UI is started then right click on the Services icon wh in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the Subscriber Management command as illustrated in Figure 26 1 A Subscriber Management window similar to Figure 26 2 will be displayed Ei Licensing ap Subscriber ap Management Figure 26 1 Subscriber Management Menu Command Document 715025 315 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management g subscriber Management Subscribers General Info Phone Number M 605555101 a Find Name Jim Jones Billing Account Number 1 103988534 7125 Ge Jane Jones 1 989756293 71 23 Ge John Jones 1 238394994 7342 Ge Jack Jones 1 134532344 71 24 Ge JonesCo 001 Ea 2545 es Jim Jones 1 103988534 71 23 gt 1000 mg Dr 605 555 7010 ACD Call Center Si Call Logging Notify Plus g On Demand Conferencing w SIF ACS Voice Mail fe Clear lt p Add D lt Delete B GIS Figure 26 2 Subscriber Management Interface Floating View If the Docked option for the Subscriber Management Location setting in APmax UI User Pref erences is
368. the function Unchecking either box will disable the associated type of access to the selected function Alternatively you may right click on a function to invoke a popup menu see Figure 3 6 and select the command you wish to perform TA User Access Rights F APmax Configuration APmax Maintenance H A APmax Surveillance sf InnoStream Server Configuration InnoStream Server Maintenance HA InnoStream Server Surveillance GS Service Provisioning 2 E ad Remove Read Access Add Write Access 4 3 GIS APmax System Administration Access Rights W Read E Write L Gei Figure 3 6 User Access Rights Popup Menu To quickly set access rights to all sub items in a category click on the category e g System Con figuration in the tree and enable or disable read or write access using the same methods described above for individual functions A prompt see Figure 3 7 will be displayed asking if you would like to apply the rights change to all services beneath the selected node Choose Yes to confirm applying the change to the sub items or No to decline it Apply Rights Z would you like to apply this rights change to all services beneath this node Figure 3 7 Apply Rights Prompt 3 3 The Command Center The purpose of this section is to familiarize you with the APmax UI Command Center and to pro vide basic instructions for using the APmax UI User Interface for the first time e Section 3 3 1 Command Cent
369. tifyPlus_V4 Downloading update 96 498 KB NotifyPlus_V5 Downloading Figure 2 22 Downloading and Installing Updates If no updates are found when the APmax Ul is started or if Cancel is selected in the download and install prompt Figure 2 20 then the APmax UI will automatically check for updates every twenty four hours after startup If updates are found during the automatic 24 hour checkup then a prompt with a 2 hour timer will be displayed see the nstall button in Figure 2 23 The APmax UI will be restarted and the updates will be installed when the timer reaches zero unless the Can cel button is pressed 10 APmax UI Update s are Available Release Notes NotifyPlus_V5 Version 5 4 0 14 Fixed a problem where Carrier codes are only displayed as 3 digits i leading digit is 0 SubscriberManagement Version 4 1 0 9 Fired problem that would produce odd subscriber node hierarchy when searching by Name TCMAdmin Version 3 0 0 28 Fix a problem that the UI would not always save data VMailSubMemt V4 Version 4 4 0 52 Fired No longer attempts to generate an initial action list i the defaul VMailSubMemt V5 Version 5 4 0 63 Fixed No longer attempts to generate an initial action list if the WirelessOTAAdmin V1 Version 1 0 0 4 Disable fields within the UI to prevent them from accidently being changed or data being erroneously being changed There are currently 10 update s available for the APmax UI Do you want to
370. to configure DS1 and DS3 ports for the APmax system Document 715025 95 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 7 Digital Carrier Configuration E Digital Carrier Configuration APmax 9919 kaka p Digital Camier Setup PRI Setup Digital Signal Caries Settings for Unit 1 Sync Master De e DS1s Enable Disable Figure 7 2 Digital Carrier Configuration Window The Digital Carrier Setup tab is partitioned into two panes The left hand pane contains a tree structure of each unit in the selected APmax system and the DS1 and DS3 ports beneath that unit The right hand pane displays the settings that can be configured for the unit DS1 or DS3 that is selected in the left hand pane These settings are described in the following sections e Section 7 1 1 Unit Settings e Section 7 1 2 DS1 Settings e Section 7 1 3 DS3 Settings 7 1 1 Unit Settings When an APmax unit is selected in the left hand pane of the Digital Carrier Setup tab see Figure 7 2 the Sync Master setting and DS1 Enable and Disable buttons will be displayed in the right hand pane The functions associated with these controls are described below Sync Master The sync master port is the preferred source of external clock synchroni zation and is used to synchronize all internal clocks to the network or BITS clock By default the Sync Master for a unit is set to Free Run
371. to be installed on your computer Click Install to begin er installing these requirements Status Requirement Pending Microsoft NET Framework 4 0 Figure 2 1 NET Framework Requirement Screen If the prompt to install the NEI Framework is displayed see Figure 2 1 then press the Install button The APmax UI will begin downloading the NET Framework install file if the necessary files are not already downloaded A progress screen similar to Figure 2 2 will be displayed while the file is being downloaded InstallShield Wizard rel AFmas requires that the following requirements be installed on your computer prior to kal installing this application Click Install to begin installing these requirements Statue Requirement Downloading Microsoft MET Framework 4 0 Downloading file dotnetfy 35 exe Wm Estimated time remaining min 3 sec BO6 4 KE of 207848 KE downloaded at 1 9 MB sec Cancel Figure 2 2 NET Framework Downloading Screen After the file is downloaded the setup program will automatically begin unpacking the downloaded file and will load the installation components as shown in Figure 2 3 Document 715025 14 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 2 Installing the APmax UI APmax InstallShield Wizard See Abma requires the Following items to be installed on your computer Click Install to begin installing these requirements Status Requirement
372. to other trunk groups or services e g used as an SS7 link The Selected Trunks list shows the T1 channels that will be assigned to the selected trunk group when the OK button is pressed Trunk members can be moved from the Available Trunks list to the Selected Trunks list by first selecting one or more available trunks and then press the Add gt gt button between the lists Trunk members can be removed from the Selected Trunks list by selecting one or more trunks from the right hand list and then pressing the lt lt Remove button The removed trunk members will be placed at the bottom of the Available Trunks list After the desired trunk members have been moved to the Selected Trunks list press the OK button to insert those trunk members into the Trunk Members tab see Figure 9 21 Pressing the Cancel button will close the Select Trunk Member s to Add window without adding any trunk members to the trunk group Document 715025 152 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 9 7 PRI Trunk Groups 9 7 1 Adding a PRI Trunk Group To add a PRI trunk group follow these steps Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration 1 Press the Add button in the lower left hand corner of the Trunk Configuration window Figure 9 2 An Enter Trunk Group Info window similar to Figure 9 24 will be dis played Enter Trunk Group Into Trunk Group E Signaling Type Trunk Group Name Direction FRI Type PRI DESS
373. tton type Event Viewer in the Search box and then double click Event Viewer in the list of results b View the Application event log in Event Viewer In Windows 7 this is done by expanding the Windows Logs tree item and clicking on Application c Look for events with the Source title of APMax Central Reporting Service see Fig ure 17 40 and click on them to view error details regarding why the report failed to be sent a Event Viewer e 5 File Action View Help e 2E HIE E Event Viewer Local gt A Custom Views a Ce Windows Logs Lewel Application Number of events 23 364 1 New events available Date and Time Source E Application T Error 5 6 2013 8 00 18 AM Report Server Windows Service M Sei Security CO Information 5 6 2013 8 00 17 AM Outlook E Setup CD Information 5 6 2013 7 59 56 AM MSSQLSERVER Se System eo Error 5 3 2013 1 06 45 PM Report Server Windows Service M Forwarded Events Error 5 3 2013 1 06 30 PM Report Server Windows Service M b LE Applications and Services Lo Error 5 3 2013 11 13 28 AM APMax Central Reporting Service 4 Subscriptions CD Information 5 3 2013 10 56 07 AM Office Software Protection Platfor CD Information 5 3 2013 10 55 47 AM Office Software Protection Plattor CD Information 5 3 2013 10 52 01 AM Office Software Protection Plattor D Information 5 3 2013 10 50 52 AM Office Software Protection Plattor 1 Error 53 20
374. uilding or unexposed wiring or cabling only The intra building port s of the equip ment or subassembly MUST NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring These interfaces are designed for use as intra building interfaces only Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR 1089 CORE Issue 4 and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring 1 1 3 Rear and Front Views The rear and front views of an APmax unit are shown in Figure 1 1 Rear and Front Views o o CRMCAL MAWA MINOR 4V PWR SERIAL 1 Rear View Figure 1 1 Rear and Front Views Document 715025 5 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 1 Hardware Installation 1 1 4 Redundancy An APmax system consists of a pair of units in order to provide the redundancy necessary for telecommunications applications Each system contains a site specific database For true redundancy the databases in each of the system s two units are identical under normal operation conditions If either unit should be unable to perform its function either because of unit failure a power failure an SS7 link failure or a T1 failure the other unit will maintain service In many cases if one unit 1s removed and replaced it will obtain the correct database from the mate unit
375. ult greeting Sbb9c899 3035 476a a Default _greeting b5f41359 6a24 4302 After you have Finish AFTER_RECORD_MENU 645F2190 835c5 40b5 After you have Finish AFTER RECORD MENU 234c4F55 4F2c 4cb0 We re sorry your regu Reguest_cannot be 39c38aec 4084 4Fe 40ced612 eed2 49d1 30431 bef abO 4bdF 7218c 755 bd6e 43a4 We re sorry you Rav boo Tew digits We re sorry You hay Too Few digits We re sorry the digits Digit_dialed_mot_valid Goodbye Goodbye 1 1 1 1 led06e73 a341 4c69 1 We re sorry your regu Regquest_cannot_be_ 1 1 1 1 Figure 16 11 Annoucements Tab The Announcements tab selected in Figure 16 11 contains a list of the announcements found in the package The following properties of each announcement are displayed in the list GUID The unique announcement ID Document 715025 236 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 16 Package Management Version The version number of the announcement Annc Text The text that the announcement will voice when it is played Description A short description of the announcement General Info Dependencies Contents Tables Files Licenses Announcements Addons Lang Voice File Frag GUID Default Infle Version 4 english Female Seay Eight belabFdF Ending english Female SO way Twenty dGeaep IW Mone english female DI way T
376. umbers are members of this area In addition the target Called Area name will be displayed under the selected numbers in the Called Numbers list indi cating that this number has been assigned to an area and showing the area to which it has been assigned see Figure 8 26 Document 715025 124 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 8 SS7 Configuration Called numbers Called Areas GU ZO Nu E CN Mitchell UD DAD wu B DOUD OD vun B DOUD OD vun EN CN Woonsocket CN 800 Numbers ir Mitchell EN CN Alpena BOO wu OF HME HRMM DE eaten Figure 8 26 Called Number Assignments Deleting Called Numbers Called Numbers can be deleted from the Called Numbers list by selecting one or more numbers in the list and then performing one of the following actions pressing the lt Delete gt key clicking the Delete button below the Called Numbers list or selecting the Delete Number command from a popup menu invoked by clicking the right hand mouse button on one of the selected numbers A delete confirmation window is displayed before the delete action is actually performed The user can choose to abort the delete action or continue with the delete action The deleted number s will be removed from the Called Numbers list Also if the numbers are assigned to Called Areas they will be deleted from their respective areas in the Called Areas list Deleting Called Number Area As
377. unks to play announcements and carry telephone conversations The SS7 interface can also be used for controlling the message waiting indicator MWI function The Ethernet channels are used for inter unit communication in a system and allow placing the APmax on a local area network LAN The LAN connection can be used for maintenance and control and OPM reporting The VoIP connection supports Session Initiation Protocol SIP for call setup and Real time Transport Protocol RTP for audio data 1 1 1 Parts List Each APmax kit is shipped with e 2 APmax units e 2 Ethernet cables for inter unit communication e 2 sets mounting brackets for mounting in a 19 rack with screws e APmax User Interface Software on CD ROM e APmax Operating Software pre loaded e APmax User Manual Softcopy PDF provided on APmax User Interface CD ROM Required items not supplied with the kit e 2 T1 cable assemblies e CATS or smilar cable to connect the APmax System to the computer network Document 715025 3 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 1 Hardware Installation e Fuse 3A is recommended Optional items not supplied with the kit e APmax Spare e APmax User Manual Printed Depending on the type of APmax system configuration specified or the particular application s purchased with the system other parts may be included and other software may be pre loaded in addition to what is specified her
378. uration If the desired far end for this trunk group is not available in the drop down menu it can be added by pressing the button to the right of the Far end Name field which will display the Add New Route window see Figure 9 11 See Section 9 3 1 for information about using the Add New Route window RLT Use the pull down menu to select a Release Link Trunking set ting Release Link Trunking allows the APmax to release facili ties between the APmax and the switch and merge the remaining established portions of the call to eliminate the APmax from the call path Without this feature two facilities between the switch and the APmax must be held during the entire call This field may be set to one of the following values e None Indicates the Release Link Trunking feature is turned off This is the default value e EWSD Turns the Release Link Trunking feature on for an EWSD switch e DMS10 Turns the Release Link Trunking feature on for a DMS 10 switch Document 715025 142 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 9 Trunk Configuration Pick Order This field is used to specify how a trunk will be selected within the trunk group for an outbound call This field is only applica ble to outgoing and 2 way trunk groups For 2 way trunk groups it is important to select a pick order to minimize glare The order of ISUP trunks is based on CIC while the order of analog trunks
379. use there are no alarms on the sys tem right click on the system s icon 2 in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and select the System Surveillance Alarm Status command as illustrated in Figure 19 2 The name of the system for which you are viewing alarms will be displayed at the top of the Alarm Status window Figure 19 3 Mitchell e System Configuration cl System Maintenance Kal System Surveillance Digital Carrier Status Ethernet Switch Information Log Reader Notify Status Bi S57 Status Figure 19 2 Alarm Status Menu Command Document 715025 275 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 19 Alarm Status 4A Alarm Status APmax 9511 Date CPU Level Alarm Oct 25 17 03 43 Admin Minor Admin CPU restarted Oct 25 17 01 11 i Call Proc Minor DS1Port 1 SMB Oct 25 17 01 11 Call Proc Minor DS1Port 2 SMB Oct 25 18 00 31 1 Call Proc Minor Main CPU restarted Oct 25 17 02 07 2 Call Proc Minor DS1Port 1 SMB Oct 25 17 03 59 2 Admin Minor Admin CPU restarted Oct 25 170208 2 Call Proc Minor DS1 Port 2 SMB Oct 25 18 00 31 2 Call Proc Minor Main CPU restarted PePPPPPEE E Cancel Alarm Silence Audible E Options Figure 19 3 Alarm Status Window The left hand side of the Alarm Status window displays a system icon MBs for each unit
380. ustrates a Subscribers list with five subscriber records four collapsed one expanded The expanded subscriber has two billing service addresses One of the subscriber s billing service addresses has nine services associated with it and the other address has one service and two service groups One service group is subscribed to two services and the other is sub scribed to one service Document 715025 317 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management Subscribers Phone Number 605555101 z Find Ge Jane Jones 1 983756293 7123 Ge John Jones 1 238394994 7342 Ge Jack Jones 1 134532344 71 24 Ge JonesCo 001 598234 2345 i Jim Jones 1 103988534 71 23 d 1000 Innovative Dr 605 555 701 0 Ji ACD Call Center do Call Logging Notify Plus i On Demand Conferencing A Originating Call Management W SIPACS gt Terminating Call Management gt Universal Call Management Voice Mail gt 1501 Main Ave 605 555 1110 Voice Mail Ges Jane a Terminating Call Management Voice Mail Ges Jim Voice Mail f Clear lt p Add D X lt Delete IS GIS Figure 26 5 Subscribers Section The lower portion of the Subscribers section contains buttons for performing the following func tions e Removing all query results from the list is done by pressing the Clear button e Adding Subscribers see Section 26 1 1 3 e De
381. vailable to perform the desired APmax modification it is very strongly recommended that the APmax UI function be used to update the APmax rather than these direct access methods Command Line Provides access to the APmax command line where APmax commands can be entered and the response displayed Diagnostics Used to collect detailed information logs statistics core files etc from one or more APmax units The information is then archived and can be used by vendor technical Support personnel File Viewer Allows the display and manipulation of files stored on the APmax s disk It also provides disk usage information Process Viewer Monitors the CPU usage of processes running on each unit of the APmax system Reboot Utility Used to perform the following actions for each APmax unit Restart the Administration CPU restart the Call Processing CPU restart all DSPs Shutdown Document 715025 191 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 To access the maintenance interfaces for an APmax system right click on the system s icon 2 in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu Select the System Mainte nance command to expand the popup menu as illustrated in the figure below The expanded menu will display all of the available maintenance interfaces for this system Select a command from the expanded menu to display the associated interface E System Configuration H
382. ve Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 6 Serial Configuration To add a serial port to the configuration press the Add button below the Serial Ports list An Add Serial Port window similar to Figure 6 3 will be displayed If all serial ports for all APmax units have already been defined the Add button will be disabled Add Serial Port Unit Serial Port Mode Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Baud Rate Cancel Figure 6 3 Add Serial Port Window Specify the following settings in the Add Serial Port window and press the OK button to complete the addition of the serial port Unit The unit on the APmax system for which this serial port is being configured If all of the serial ports 1 and 2 of a unit have already been defined in the Serial Port Configuration interface that unit number will not be available when adding new serial ports Serial Port The serial port 1 or 2 that is being configured on the selected APmax unit If a serial port has already been defined for the selected APmax unit in the Serial Port Configuration interface it will not be available as an option when adding new serial ports Mode The mode the selected serial port uses to connect to the APmax unit The options are listed in the drop down control None RS232 and RS449 The default mode is RS232 Parity Parity checking is used to detect transmission errors in the serial link s data stream The Parity fiel
383. when power is reapplied 1 1 5 System Requirements Each unit must be supplied with 48 VDC power The two sets of power input connections should be tied to independent sources in order to provide redundant powering Each unit may be configured for SS7 communication over a T1 channel A personal computer running the APmax User Interface Software is required for configuration administration and maintenance of the APmax system 1 1 6 Network Configuration Each APmax system ships with a set of default Administration and Call Processing IPs The Dig ital Signal Processors DSPs reside on the Call Processing network and their IPs are also defaulted before shipment It is required that the OAM amp P Administration and VoIP Call Processing networks be located on separate physical networks By keeping the VoIP network private quality of service is assured Improper configuration of the network cabling and IP assignment could result in loss of call processing inability to administer the system and subsequent loss of service 1 1 7 Ethernet Cabling The OAM amp P Administration network connects to the APmax via the OAM amp P port port 1 on the APmax Ethernet switch The tielines are used to maintain redundant databases between the units There are two tielines Document 715025 6 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 1 Hardware Installation and they connect from port 5 to po
384. window in the list will bring it to the foreground 1 Command Center Region South Dakota 2 Subscriber Management 3 License Viewer Contents Displays the table of contents of the APmax UI online help documenta tion See Figure 3 14 Check for Checks the Innovative Systems E Updates FTP site for updated APmax UI files Online Tech Support and gives a prompt to download Program Messages and install any updates that are found See Section 2 3 APmax UI Update for more information Figure 3 12 Help Menu Displays the APmax UI version and also a list of the add ons that are installed with the APmax Ul See Figure 3 15 Online Tech Sup Opens the online technical support port page on the Innovative Systems website http Awww innovsys com registered TechSupport htm See Figure 3 16 Program Mes Opens the Program Messages sages interface see Figure 3 17 and dis plays a standard file selection win dow that allows a trace file to be viewed and emailed using the File Send menu command Document 715025 38 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Region East South Dakota ze Chapter 3 Getting Started Command Description Used to display and change the active region as described in Sec tion 3 4 1 4 Figure 3 13 Region Menu Introduction to the APmax UI System Configuration S System Maintenance S System Surveillance GE Services Documen
385. x s tab select the region of the system you wish to delete 3 Click on the system you wish to delete in the System List in the right hand pane of the window and press the Delete button located below the System List A delete confirma tion prompt see Figure 3 38 will be displayed Confirm Delete l 2 Delete the Ap Mitchell 1 ke Figure 3 38 Delete Confirmation Prompt 4 Press the Yes button to complete the deletion and remove all of the configurations associ ated with the system from the APmax UI or press the No button to cancel the deletion 3 4 3 Master APmax Management The Master APmax Setup tab in the APmax System Administration window see Figure 3 39 is used to share APmax UI configuration settings e g regions users between multiple APmax UI installations see Section 3 4 3 1 Document 715025 53 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started F APmax System Administration Defined APmas s Master APmax Setup Single Web Portal System List System Mame System ID GK GE Rune Video Monitor 9924 mitchellipty 9052 wall 2007 7020 7020 amine 9919 9919 Le 9073 9073 9068 9068 LABS056 9056 Figure 3 39 Master APmax Setup Tab The APmax UI status bar Figure 3 40 will display Master Mode ON if a master APmax is con figured and Master Mode OFF if a master APmax is not configured Master Mode OFF Figure 3
386. x User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 14 Announcement Manager When the Test Announcement window is opened any parameters or information components in the announcement will be listed in the Announcement Input Values section of the window This section contains a table with the following three fields for each component Item The name of the parameter or information component Types of param eters and information components may include silence strings of digits date and time weather station readings etc See Table 14 1 Sample Test Input Value Formats for examples This field is read only Input Value Enter the value to be used for testing this item For example if a param eter would typically be a 10 digit phone number then click in this field and enter a 10 digit number that would adequately test the announce ment See Table 14 1 Sample Test Input Value Formats for exam ples of input value formats Announcement The phrase text that will be played when this item is reached during the playing of the announcement This field is read only and is dependent on the combination of item and input value For example if the item is WindDirectionStation5 and the input value is 11 then this field will be West South West The Announcement Text section at the bottom of the Test Announcement window displays the entire contents of the announcement including the results of the input values currently entered for any parameters
387. xp Allowed DI O N i System Never mitchell Calling Name Targus Expans Calling Targus Exp Allowed DI 0 N i System Never mitchell Mek Echo Net Echo Caller ID Subscribers Of109000 0 NA System Never Figure 25 2 License Viewer Window Document 715025 311 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 25 License Viewer The License Viewer window displays a list of the licenses found the systems being managed by this installation of the APmax UI The list can be sorted by clicking on the column headings The columns in the list are described below System The name of the APmax system to which this license applies Consumer The service or application that is being licensed e g Voice Mail Resource The resource within the consumer that is being licensed e g subscribers mail boxes ports License Use The usage information for this license The first usage indicator is an x y fraction where x is the number of used licenses and y is the total number of licenses To the right of the fraction is a percentage indicator of the licenses that are in use Additionally each License Use cell in the table is a bar graph that will fill up from left to right to indicate how many of the licenses are already in use Unit The unit on this APmax system to which this license applies For example if the Unit value is 1 then the license is only valid for unit 1 on this system If the Un
388. y Build Revision Overwrite Document 715025 Version 4 3 10 The name of the file The type of file e g Driver Executable Library Script The build number of the file The revision number of the file The property only applies to files that do not have a version If this box is checked then this file will overwrite any existing files with the same name and path when the package Is deployed 234 Innovative Systems L L C APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 16 Package Management General Info Dependencies Contents Tables Files Licenses Announcements Addons Generated 7 2 2007 11 36 52 4M System ID 9505 Consumer Name Resource Mame Expiration Date Maximum f CONSUMER VOICEMAIL RESOURCE _YOICE_MAIL Figure 16 9 Licenses Tab The Licenses tab Figure 16 9 contains three informational fields and a list of the licenses included in the package Generated The date the package license information was generated System ID The ID of the system to which these licenses apply Package Name The name of the package these licenses are associated with The following properties of each license are displayed in the list Scope The system unit s to which this license applies If the Scope is System Wide then the license applies to all units on the sys tem If the license is for a specific unit then the value will be Unit vi where x is the number of the unit to which the license
389. y as the NTP server when setting up each additional unit should be the Administration Address for Unit 1 see Chapter 4 Network Configuration Section 4 1 1 1 General Settings for more information 4 Set the number of synch retries the system should attempt before throwing a time alarm indicating it could not synch to an NTP server This is done by entering a value between and 100 into the Synch Retry Attempts field The default value is 1 5 When all additions deletions and settings are finished in the NTP Configuration tab press the Set NTP Servers button to save the changes If the System Time Manager is closed without the Set NTP Servers button being pressed all changes will be lost Saved changes will be immediately transferred to all units in the selected system A confirma tion message see Figure 5 8 will be displayed when the NTP servers are successfully saved Press the OK button to close the message System Time Manager The NTP servers on the 4P have been set successfully Figure 5 8 NTP Servers Set Successfully Message Document 715025 90 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 6 Serial Configuration Chapter 6 Serial Configuration This chapter describes how to configure serial ports for APmax system units To access the Serial Port Configuration interface right click on the system s icon E in the Command Center window to invoke a popup menu and selec
390. ystems L L C Version 4 3 10 APmax User Manual Release 4 3 Chapter 26 Subscriber Management Note The Centrex Extension address type is only available if APmax Release 4 5 7 or greater is installed on the system hosting the subscriber record Add Mew Address Address Type Address Um OMesAinnovsys com EE Figure 26 36 Add New E mail Address Add Mew Address Address Type SIP Address k Address SIDD SMS com mmer Figure 26 37 Add New SIP Address Add New Address Address Type Centres Extension Ades Custom Centres Group Cancel Figure 26 38 Add New Centrex Extension Address After selecting the Address Type enter a properly formatted value as illustrated in the figures above into the Address field and press the OK button If the Address Type is Centrex Extension then a custom Centrex group name may be specified as illustrated in Figure 26 38 The new address will be displayed in the Subscriber Addresses list If the new address is a 10 digit phone number then it will now be available to this billing service address or service group as a Default Phone Number option in the General Info tab see Section 26 1 2 26 1 3 2 Deleting Addresses To delete a phone number e mail address SIP address or Centrex extension associated with a billing service address or service group select the address to delete in the Subscriber Addresses list and press the Delete button located below t
391. zero False english female Ending one False english Female Ending False english Female Ending Three False english Female Ending Four False english Female Ending Five False english Female Ending Div False english Female Ending Seven False english Female Ending Nine False english Female None Ten False english Female None Eleven False english Female None Twelve False english Female None Thirteen False english Female None Fourteen False english Female None Fifteen False english Female None Sixteen False Figure 14 21 Phrases Tab The Phrases tab contains a list with the following columns of information about each phrase on the APmax Language The language e g English Spanish TTY that is used to voice the phrase Voice The voice used in the phrase e g female female_2 Inflection Whether or not there is an inflection at the end of the phrase Phrases with ending inflections sound more natural when played at the end of an announcement sentence WAV File The name of the phrase audio file on the APmax All phrase files are of the wav format Phrase Text Descriptive text used to help identify the phrase when using it with announcements This text would typically be the word s that will be voiced by the phrase Custom Is this a custom phrase True or False Custom phrases are those that have been added manually and were not deployed with an APmax package Document 715025 220 Innovative Systems L L C Version 4 3 10

AP MAX User Manual.book

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents